Navigation

  • Page 1

    GE Fanuc Automation Computer Numerical Control Products Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A Connection Manual (Function) GFZ-63943EN-1/02 June 2004

  • Page 2

    GFL-001Warnings, Cautions, and Notesas Used in this PublicationWarningWarning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment ormay be associated with its use.In situatio...

  • Page 3

    B-63943EN-1/02 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE s-1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Al...

  • Page 4

  • Page 5

    B-63943EN-1/02 PREFACE p-1 PREFACE Organization of this manual This manual describes all the NC functions required to enable machine tool builders to design their CNC machine tools. The following items are explained for each function. 1. Overview Describes feature of the function. Refer to Ope...

  • Page 6

    PREFACE B-63943EN-1/02 p-2 NOTE 1 For an explanatory purpose, the following descriptions may be used according to the types of path control used: - T series: For the lathe system - M series: For the machining center system 2 Unless otherwise noted, the model names 31i/310i/310is-A, 31i/310i/310i...

  • Page 7

    B-63943EN-1/02 PREFACE p-3 Description of symbols The following symbols are used in this manual. These symbols are described below. - M Indicates a description that is valid only for the machine center system set as system control type (in parameter No. 0983). In a general description of the ...

  • Page 8

    PREFACE B-63943EN-1/02 p-4 Description of signals [Example of controlling one path using one PMC] G0000~F0000~X000~Y000~CNCPMCMachine tool [Example of controlling three path using one PMC] G0000~F0000~X000~Y000~CNCPMCMachine toolPath 1G1000~F1000~Path 2Path 3F2000~G2000~

  • Page 9

    B-63943EN-1/02 PREFACE p-5 [Example of controlling multipath CNC using PMC system] G0000~F0000~X000~Y000~CNCPMCI/O devicefor firstmachinePath 1G1000~F1000~G2000~F2000~G3000~F3000~G4000~F4000~FirstPMCG0000~F0000~G1000~F1000~G2000~F2000~G3000~F3000~G0000~F0000~SecondPMCThirdPMCG0000~F0000~G1000~F1...

  • Page 10

    PREFACE B-63943EN-1/02 p-6 - Expression of signals Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn000 OP SA STL SPL RWD In an item where both lathe system and machining center system are described, some signals are covered with shade ( ) in the signal add...

  • Page 11

    B-63943EN-1/02 PREFACE p-7 Description of parameters Parameters are classified by data type as follows: Data type Valid data rangeRemarks Bit Bit machine group Bit path Bit axis Bit spindle 0 or 1 Byte Byte machine group Byte path Byte axis Byte spindle -128 to 127 0 to 255 Some parameters hand...

  • Page 12

    PREFACE B-63943EN-1/02 p-8 3.1 STANDARD PARAMETER SETTING TABLES This section defines the standard minimum data units and valid data ranges of the CNC parameters of the real type, real machine group type, real path type, real axis type, and real spindle type. The data type and unit of data of e...

  • Page 13

    B-63943EN-1/02 PREFACE p-9 (C) Velocity and angular velocity parameters Unit of data Increment system Minimum data unitValid data range IS-A 0.01 0.0 to +2400000.0 IS-B 0.001 0.0 to +240000.0 IS-C 0.0001 0.0 to +100000.0 IS-D 0.00001 0.0 to +10000.0 mm/min degree/min IS-E 0.000001 0.0 to +...

  • Page 14

    PREFACE B-63943EN-1/02 p-10 - Parameters of the bit type, bit machine group type, bit path type, bit axis type, and bit spindle type #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0000 EIA NCR ISP CTV TVC - Parameters other than the bit-type parameters above 1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis N...

  • Page 15

    B-63943EN-1/02 PREFACE p-11 Related manuals of Series 30i/300i/300is- MODEL A Series 31i/310i/310is- MODEL A Series 31i/310i/310is- MODEL A5 Series 32i/320i/320is- MODEL A The following table lists the manuals related to Series 30i/300i /300is-A, Series 31i/310i /310is-A, Series 31i/310i /310is...

  • Page 16

    PREFACE B-63943EN-1/02 p-12 Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR αis/αi series The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR αis/αi series Table 2 Related manuals Manual name Specification number FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis series FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series DESCRIPTIONS B-65262...

  • Page 17

    B-63943EN-1/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1 PREFACE....................................................................................................p-1 1 AXIS CONTROL...................

  • Page 18

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63943EN-1/02 c-2 1.4.2 Optional Command Multiplication.......................................................................113 1.4.3 Absolute Position Detection.................................................................................114 1.4.4 FSSB Setting ............

  • Page 19

    B-63943EN-1/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-3 2 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION .................................................324 2.1 EMERGENCY STOP................................................................................. 325 2.2 CNC READY SIGNALS .....................................................

  • Page 20

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63943EN-1/02 c-4 4.8 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE MARKS (SERIAL) ................................................................................................... 524 4.9 EXTENDED FUNCTION OF THE DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE ...........................

  • Page 21

    B-63943EN-1/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-5 6.8 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION................................................ 636 6.9 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ............................................................. 640 6.9.1 Cylindrical Interpolation ..............................................

  • Page 22

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63943EN-1/02 c-6 7.1.11.2 Automatic feedrate control function ................................................................ 748 7.2 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL........................................ 770 7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration .......................

  • Page 23

    B-63943EN-1/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-7 9.2 MANUAL FEED FOR 5-AXIS MACHINING ............................................. 1030 9.2.1 Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed/Tool Axis Direction JOG Feed/Tool Axis Direction Incremental Feed .....................................................................

  • Page 24

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63943EN-1/02 c-8 9.5.6 Alarm and Message ............................................................................................1159 9.6 TOOL DIRECTION THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION ..... 1161 10 AUXILIARY FUNCTION.......................................................

  • Page 25

    B-63943EN-1/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-9 11.11.13.3 Signals related to gear switching........................................................ 1393 11.11.13.4 Signals related to the addition of multi spindle control...................... 1394 11.11.13.5 Notes on interface with the PMC .................

  • Page 26

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63943EN-1/02 c-10 12 TOOL FUNCTIONS...........................................................................1537 12.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF LATHE SYSTEM............................................... 1538 12.1.1 Tool Offset ........................................................

  • Page 27

    B-63943EN-1/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS c-11 13.5.2 Indirect Axis Address Command .......................................................................1720 13.5.3 Interruption Type Custom Macro.......................................................................1722 13.6 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING....

  • Page 28

    TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63943EN-1/02 c-12 16.4.1 Input of tool offset value measured ....................................................................1867 16.4.2 Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B.............................................................1869 16.5 TOOL LENGTH / WORKPIECE ZE...

  • Page 29

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 1 - 1 AXIS CONTROL

  • Page 30

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 2 - 1.1 CONTROLLED AXIS Overview - Series 30i, Series 300i, Series 300is The maximum number of machine groups, maximum number of paths, maximum number of servo axes, and maximum number of spindles differ depending on the model, as listed in the table below. Se...

  • Page 31

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 3 - Reference item Manual name Item name USER’S MANUAL (B-63944EN) Number of controlled axes CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (This manual) Multipath control

  • Page 32

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 4 - 1.2 SETTING EACH AXIS 1.2.1 Name of Axes Overview Each axis that is controlled by the CNC (including those controlled by the PMC) must be named. To name an axis, select a desired character from among A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, and Z and set the character as the...

  • Page 33

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 5 - NOTE 1 If the second axis name character is not set for an axis, the third axis name character is invalid. 2 When setting 0 to 9 for the second axis name character, do not set A to Z for the third axis name character. 3 When an axis name ends with a numeric ch...

  • Page 34

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 6 - 1020 Program axis name for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 67,85 to 90 An axis name (axis name 1: parameter No. 1020) can be arbitrarily selected from 'A', 'B', 'C', 'U', 'V', 'W', 'X', 'Y', and 'Z'. (When...

  • Page 35

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 7 - 1025 Program axis name 2 for each axis 1026 Program axis name 3 for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 48 to 57, 65 to 90 When axis name extension is enabled (when bit 0 (EEA) of parameter No. 1000 is set to ...

  • Page 36

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 8 - Example - Example of setting an axis name When No. 1020 = 88, No. 1025 = 0, and No. 1026 = 0, the axis name is set to X. When No. 1020 = 88, No. 1025 = 65, and No. 1026 = 0, the axis name is set to XA. When No. 1020 = 88, No. 1025 = 66, and No. 1026 = 65, t...

  • Page 37

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 9 - 1.2.2 Increment System Overview The increment system consists of the least input increment (for input) and least command increment (for output). The least input increment is the least increment for programming the travel distance. The least command increment...

  • Page 38

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 10 - Name of an increment systemLeast input increment Least command increment Maximum stroke 0.000001 mm 0.000001 mm ±999.999999 mm 0.0000001 inch 0.0000001 inch ±99.9999999 inch IS-E 0.000001 deg 0.000001 deg ±999.999999 deg When bit 7 (IPR) of parameter No. ...

  • Page 39

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 11 - # 0 INM Least command increment on the linear axis 0: In mm (metric system machine) 1: In inches (inch system machine) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1004 IPR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 7 IPR When a number with no deci...

  • Page 40

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 12 - # 0 ISA # 1 ISC # 2 ISD # 3 ISE Increment system of each axis Increment system#3 ISE #2 ISD #1 ISC #0 ISA IS-A 0 0 0 1 IS-B 0 0 0 0 IS-C 0 0 1 0 IS-D 0 1 0 0 IS-E 1 0 0 0 Reference item Manual name Item name USER’S MANUAL (B-63944EN)...

  • Page 41

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 13 - 1.2.3 Diameter and Radius Setting Switching Function Overview Usually, whether to use diameter specification or radius specification to specify a travel distance on each axis is uniquely determined by the setting of bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006. Howev...

  • Page 42

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 14 - NOTE 1 When operating an input signal by using an M code, for example, during automatic operation, perform a switching operation according to the method below to reflect the state of diameter/radius specification switching in the execution block correctly. As...

  • Page 43

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 15 - - Switching operation According to the switching methods above, diameter/radius specification is internally switched as described below. 1) Switching using a signal - When parameter DIAx = 0 (radius specification) → Operation is performed with diameter ...

  • Page 44

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 16 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn296 DI8 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 Fn296 DM8 DM7 DM6 DM5 DM4 DM3 DM2 DM1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3400 PGD [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 5 PGD Specification of...

  • Page 45

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 17 - Limitation - Feedrate A radius-based feedrate is specified in both of diameter specification and radius specification at all times. - Data not switchable The following data follows the setting of parameter DIAx, so that diameter/radius specification switch...

  • Page 46

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 18 - Caution CAUTION When switching is performed from diameter specification to radius specification, the travel distance based on the same move command is doubled when compared with diameter specification. So, when switching from diameter specification to radi...

  • Page 47

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 19 - 1.2.4 Specifying the Rotation Axis Overview Parameter ROTx (No.1006#0) can be used to set each axis to a linear axis or rotation axis. Parameter ROSx (No. 1006#1) can be used to select the rotation axis type, A or B, for each axis. See the explanation of the...

  • Page 48

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 20 - ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis. ROSx ROTx Meaning 0 0 Linear axis (1) Inch/metric conversion is done. (2) All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360_) (3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to ...

  • Page 49

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 21 - NOTE 1 RRLx is valid only when ROAx is 1. 2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter No.1260. 1260 Amount of a shift per one rotation of a rotation axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is ...

  • Page 50

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 22 - 1.2.5 Controlled Axes Detach Overview These signals release the specified control axes from control by the CNC. When attachments are used (such as a detachable rotary table), these signals are selected according to whether the attachments are mounted. When m...

  • Page 51

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 23 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn124 DTCH8DTCH7DTCH6DTCH5DTCH4DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn110 MDTCH8 MDTCH7 MDTCH6 MDTCH5 MDTCH4 MDTCH3 MDTCH2 MDTCH1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0012 RMVx [Input type] Setting i...

  • Page 52

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 24 - Caution CAUTION When a multiaxis amplifier is used, the motor cannot be disconnected from the amplifier. When the motor needs to be disconnected from the amplifier for replacement of the rotary table or other reasons, a 1-axis amplifier must be used. Not...

  • Page 53

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 25 - 1.2.6 Outputting the Movement State of an Axis Overview The movement state of each axis can be output to the PMC. Signal Axis moving signals MV1 to MV8<Fn102> [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals indicate that a control axis is m...

  • Page 54

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 26 - CAUTION CAUTION Axis moving signals and axis moving direction signals are output in both automatic and manual operations.

  • Page 55

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 27 - 1.2.7 Mirror Image Overview Mirror image can be applied to each axis, either by signals or by parameters (setting input is acceptable). All movement directions are reversed during automatic operation along axes to which a mirror image is applied. Z0AWhen MI1...

  • Page 56

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 28 - Mirror image check signals MMI1 to MMI8<Fn108> [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals indicate the mirror image condition of each axis. The mirror image is set by taking the logical sum of the signal from the MDI panel and the input ...

  • Page 57

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 29 - CAUTION CAUTION Even when the mirror image is applied, commands which do not actuate mirror image (such as automatic reference position return and manual operation) do not affect mirror image check signals MMI1 to MMI8 <F108>. Reference item Manual ...

  • Page 58

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 30 - 1.2.8 Follow-up Overview If the machine moves in the state in which position control on controlled axes is disabled (during servo-off, emergency stop, or servo alarm), feedback pulses are accumulated in the error counter. The CNC reflects the machine movemen...

  • Page 59

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 31 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1819 FUPx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 FUPx To perform follow-up when the servo is off is set for each axis. 0: The follow-up signal, *FLWU, determines whether follow-up is performed ...

  • Page 60

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 32 - 1.2.9 Servo off/Mechanical Handle Feed Overview Place the controlled axes in the servo off state, stop the current to the servo motor, which disables position control. However, the position detection feature functions continuously, so the current position i...

  • Page 61

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 33 - Caution CAUTION 1 In general, interlock is applied to an axis while the servo off signal for that axis is 1. 2 When one of these signals turns to "1", the servo motor is turned off. The mechanical clamp is done by using the auxiliary function. ...

  • Page 62

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 34 - 1.2.10 Position Switch Overview Position switch signals can be output to the PMC while the machine coordinates along a controlled axes are within a specified ranges. Using parameters, specify arbitrary controlled axes and machine coordinate operating ranges ...

  • Page 63

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 35 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6901 PSA EPW [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 1 EPW The number of position switches is: 0: Not extended. 1: Extended. # 2 PSA In determination of a position switch function operation r...

  • Page 64

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 36 - 6930 Maximum value of the operating range of the 1-st position switch (PSW101)to 6945 Maximum value of the operating range of the 16-th position switch (PSW116) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine u...

  • Page 65

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 37 - 1.2.11 High-Speed Position Switch Overview The high-speed position switch function monitors the current position at shorter intervals than the normal position switch function to output a high-speed precise position switch signal. In the same way as for the n...

  • Page 66

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 38 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Yxxx HPS08HPS07HPS06HPS05HPS04HPS03 HPS02 HPS01 Yxxx+1 HPS16HPS15HPS14HPS13HPS12HPS11 HPS10 HPS09xxx indicates the address set using parameter No. 8565. When bit 0 (HPF) of parameter No. 8501 is set to 1, the sig...

  • Page 67

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 39 - 8565 Output address of the high-speed position switch signal NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 126 This parameter sets...

  • Page 68

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 40 - 8570 Controlled axis for which the first high-speed position switch function is performed to 8579 Controlled axis for which the tenth high-speed position switch function is performed 12201 Controlled axis for which the eleventh high-speed position switch ...

  • Page 69

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 41 - NOTE Parameters No. 8586 to 8589 and No. 12221 to 12226 are valid only when EHP (bit 7 of parameter No. 8500) is 1. 8590 Minimum value of the operation range of the first high-speed position switchto 8599 Minimum value of the operation range of the tenth...

  • Page 70

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 42 - 1.2.12 Direction-Sensitive High-Speed Position Switch Overview The high-speed position switch function monitors the machine coordinates and move direction to output high-speed position switch signals. Two machine coordinates are monitored. When the tool pas...

  • Page 71

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 43 - Fig. 1.2.12 (a) shows the output status of a direction-sensitive high-speed position switch signal when the current position moves from a to b, c, d, e, f, and g. The direction-sensitive high-speed position switch signal is assumed to be set as follows: - 1 w...

  • Page 72

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 44 - Relationships between direction-sensitive high-speed position switches and output addresses Output signal address Controlled-axis number Output type switchingEnable/disableMaximum operating range Effective direction for point A Minimum operating range Effect...

  • Page 73

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 45 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8508 D08 D07 D06 D05 D04 D03 D02 D01 8509 D16 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D09 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. D01 t...

  • Page 74

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 46 - CAUTION 1 Specifying a nonexistent signal address causes the high-speed position switch function to be disabled. 2 Y signal address Y127 cannot be specified for this function. 3 Address output signals (Y1001 and above) on the M-NET board cannot be specified...

  • Page 75

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 47 - 1.3 ERROR COMPENSATION 1.3.1 Stored Pitch Error Compensation Overview If pitch error compensation data is specified, pitch errors of each axis can be compensated in detection units per axis. Pitch error compensation data is set for each compensation positio...

  • Page 76

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 48 - Explanation - Specifying the compensation position To assign the compensation positions for each axis, specify the positive direction or the negative direction relative to the compensation position No. of the reference position. If the machine stroke exceed...

  • Page 77

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 49 - No. of the compensation position of the reference position + (Machine stroke on the positive side/Interval between the compensation positions)= 40 + 800/50= 56 The correspondence between the machine coordinate and the compensation position No. is as follows: ...

  • Page 78

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 50 - The No. of the farthest compensation position in the positive direction is as follows: No. of the compensation position of the reference position + (Move amount per rotation/Interval between the compensation positions)= 60 + 360/45= 68 The correspondence betw...

  • Page 79

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 51 - 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68+1 -2 +1 +3 -1 -1 -3 +2 +1NumberCompensationvalue(deg)061 62 63 64 65 66 6768(60)-1-2-3-4+1+2+3+4Pitch errorcompensation value(absolute value)45 9013518022527031561 62 63 64 65 66 6745 90135180225270315061 6245 9068(60)Reference posi...

  • Page 80

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 52 - 3622 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely positive position for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid dat...

  • Page 81

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 53 - 3625 Travel distance per revolution in pitch error compensation of rotation axis type NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inc...

  • Page 82

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 54 - Warning WARNING - Compensation value range Compensation values can be set within the range from -127 × compensation magnification (detection unit) to +127 × compensation magnification (detection unit). The compensation magnification can be set for each ax...

  • Page 83

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 55 - 1.3.2 Backlash Compensation Overview - Backlash compensation Function for compensating for lost motion on the machine. Set a compensation value in parameter No. 1851, in detection units from 0 to ±9999 pulses for each axis. - Backlash compensation for ea...

  • Page 84

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 56 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1800 RBK [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 RBK Backlash compensation applied separately for cutting feed and rapid traverse 0: Not performed 1: Performed 1851 Backlash compensating value...

  • Page 85

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 57 - Caution CAUTION The backlash compensation for rapid traverse and cutting feed is not performed until the first reference position return is completed after the power is turned on. Under this state, the normal backlash compensation is performed according to ...

  • Page 86

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 58 - 1.3.3 Smooth Backlash Explanation With normal backlash compensation, all backlash compensation pulses are output at the location where the direction of axis moving reverses. (Fig. 1.3.3 (a)) Direction of axis moving(Direction reverse) Total amount of back...

  • Page 87

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 59 - ・First stage backlash compensation output At the location where the direction of axis moving reverses, the first stage backlash compensation output is performed. Set the first stage backlash compensation B1, using parameter No. No.1848. ・Second stage ba...

  • Page 88

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 60 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1817 SBL [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 2 SBL Smooth backlash compensation is : 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. 1846 Distance ...

  • Page 89

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 61 - 1848 Value of the first stage of smooth backlash compensation NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] -9999 to 9999 Set the valu...

  • Page 90

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 62 - 1.3.4 Straightness Compensation Overview For a machine tool with a long stroke, deviations in straightness between axes may affect the machining accuracy. For this reason, when an axis moves, other axes are compensated in detection units to improve straight...

  • Page 91

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 63 - - Example Imagine a table whose Y-axis ball screw is placed on its X-axis ball screw. If the X-axis ball screw is inclined at a certain angle because of, for example, bending, the machining precision related to the Y-axis becomes low because its ball screw i...

  • Page 92

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 64 - [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the axis numbers of moving axes for straightness compensation. When 0 is set, compensation is not performed. 5721 Straightness compensation : Axis number of compensation axis 1 f...

  • Page 93

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 65 - 13324 Straightness compensation : Compensation point number d of moving axis 6 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 1535...

  • Page 94

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 66 - Alarm and message Number Message Description PW1103 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (S-COMP.128)The parameter for setting 128 straightness compensation points or the parameter compensation data is incorrect, PW5046 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (S-COMP.) The parameter for setting stra...

  • Page 95

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 67 - 1.3.5 Straightness Compensation at 128 Points Overview In straightness compensation, this function sets compensation data as the compensations at individual compensation points in the same way as in stored pitch error compensation. This enables fine compens...

  • Page 96

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 68 - φ Number of the furthest straightness compensation point in the negative region on the moving axis Parameters Nos. 13381 to No.13386 π Number of the furthest straightness compensation point in the positive region on the moving axis δ Straightness compensa...

  • Page 97

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 69 - Parameter setting examples The following explains how to set the parameters for moving and compensation axes, as well as effective magnifications. The parameters for moving and compensation axes can be set as described below. <1> A single compensation...

  • Page 98

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 70 - 1.3.6 Interpolated Straightness Compensation Overview This function divides the compensation data established using the compensation data for straightness compensation at 128 points among compensation points and outputs the resulting data. Explanation - Co...

  • Page 99

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 71 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3605 IPC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 2 IPC Interpolated straightness compensation functi...

  • Page 100

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 72 - 5725 Straightness compensation : Axis number of compensation axis 5 for moving axis 5 5726 Straightness compensation : Axis number of compensation axis 6 for moving axis 6 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation ...

  • Page 101

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 73 - 13391 Magnification for straightness compensation for moving axis 1 13392 Magnification for straightness compensation for moving axis 2 13393 Magnification for straightness compensation for moving axis 3 13394 Magnification for straightness compensati...

  • Page 102

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 74 - CAUTION CAUTION 1 Straightness compensation at 128 points and interpolated straightness compensation are both optional functions. 2 If the options, straightness compensation at 128 points and interpolated straightness compensation, are to be attached, the op...

  • Page 103

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 75 - 1.3.7 Gradient Compensation Overview By compensating for those errors in tools such as feed screws that depend on the position of the machine system in detection units, machining precision can be improved and mechanical life can be prolonged. Compensation is...

  • Page 104

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 76 - In above figure, the compensation amounts at the individual compensation points located between points a and b are (β-α)/(b-a). Parameter 5861 Inclination compensation : Compensation point number a for each axis 5862 Inclination compensation : Compensa...

  • Page 105

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 77 - Alarm and message Number Message Description PW1102 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (I-COMP.) The parameter for setting slope compensation is incorrect. This alarm occurs in the following cases: - When the number of pitch error compensation points on the axis on which slop...

  • Page 106

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 78 - 1.3.8 Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation Overview In bi-directional pitch error compensation, different pitch error compensation amounts can be set for travel in the positive direction and that in the negative direction, so that pitch error compensation...

  • Page 107

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 79 - 2. Pitch error compensation data The compensation point numbers can be from 0 to 1535 and from 3000 to 4535. This data may be used for both the positive and negative directions. Note, however, that the set of compensation data for a given axis cannot extend o...

  • Page 108

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 80 - Table 1.3.8 (b) Positive-direction pitch error data Compensation point number 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Compensation amount to be set-1 +1 0 +1 +1 +2 -1 -1 As pitch error data, always set incremental values as viewed in the negative direction (direction towa...

  • Page 109

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 81 - - Compensation example If, in the setting example given in the previous section, the machine moves 0.0 to 40.0, 40.0 to -40.0, and -40.0 to 0.0 for a manual reference position return, pitch error compensation pulses are output as follows: Machine coordi...

  • Page 110

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 82 - - Setting and displaying data All the compensation data can be displayed and set on the conventional screen for the pitch error compensation data. And those data can be input and output by the following methods. - Input by MDI - Input by G10 - Input and ou...

  • Page 111

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 83 - 3621 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid dat...

  • Page 112

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 84 - 3624 Interval between pitch error compensation positions for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (mach...

  • Page 113

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 85 - 3626 Number of the both-direction pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position (for movement in the negative direction) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Paramet...

  • Page 114

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 86 - Note NOTE 1 To use this function, the stored pitch error compensation option is required. 2 This function is enabled after a manual reference position return or an automatic reference position return with the same sequence as that of a manual reference posit...

  • Page 115

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 87 - 1.3.9 Extended Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation Overview In bi-directional pitch error compensation, it is possible to use 0 - 1535, 3000 - 4535 points as the compensation points. By using this function, the compensation points are extended and it is ...

  • Page 116

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 88 - Set the number of the pitch error compensation position at the extremely negative position for each axis. 3622 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely positive position for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be ...

  • Page 117

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 89 - 1.3.10 Interpolation Type Pitch Error Compensation Overview In stored pitch error compensation, the pitch error compensation pulse at each pitch error compensation point is output in the interval between that point and the next compensation point, as shown i...

  • Page 118

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 90 - - Setting the parameters When interpolation type pitch error compensation is used, the following parameters are assigned the same values as those in stored pitch error compensation. - Number of the pitch error compensation point of the reference position on ...

  • Page 119

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 91 - A minimum interval where multiple compensation pulses are not output at a time is determined by the following expression: Minimum pitch error compensation point interval = (Fmax/7500) × (Pmax+1) Fmax: Maximum feedrate Pmax: Maximum pitch error compensa...

  • Page 120

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 92 - 1.3.11 About Differences among Pitch Error Compensation, Straightness Compensation, and Gradient Compensation (for Reference Purposes) Overview Any of pitch error compensation, straightness compensation, and gradient compensation is applied to each compensat...

  • Page 121

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 93 - abcd - Straightness compensation In straightness compensation, similarly to gradient compensation, four typical pitch error compensation points (a, b, c, and d) are selected from pitch error compensation points and specified as straightness compensation p...

  • Page 122

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 94 - 1.3.12 Cyclic Second Pitch Error Compensation Overview When a rotary table is rotated using a gear, there are two cycles of the occurrence of pitch errors: One cycle is the same as that of the rotation of the rotary table while the other is the same as that ...

  • Page 123

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 95 - Although a rotary table is used as an example here, cyclic second pitch error compensation can be used in the same way when the machine is moved along a linear axis using a gear. For example, in a configuration such as that shown in Fig. 1.3.9 (c), stored pit...

  • Page 124

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 96 - - Pitch error with a 360° cycle 0°20°360°180°Aε Fig. 1.3.12 (e) - Pitch error after superimposition in portion A Pitch error with the cycle ofthe rotation of the gearεAε : Pitch error in portion A Fig. 1.3.12 (f) Synchronous Second Pitch Error Th...

  • Page 125

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 97 - Parameter 14985 Number of the farthest second cyclical pitch error compensation point in the negative direction for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Dat...

  • Page 126

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 98 - 14988 Magnification for second cyclical pitch error compensation for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to 100 S...

  • Page 127

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 99 - 1.3.13 Three-Dimensional Error Compensation Outline In ordinary pitch error compensation, compensation is applied to a specified compensation axis (single axis) by using its position information. For example, pitch error compensation is applied to X-axis by ...

  • Page 128

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 100 - P1x and P2x are the X coordinates of P1 and P2. The interior division ratios on Y and Z-axes are determined in the same way. The compensation amount Cx for X-axis at P is determined as follows: The compensation amount Cy and Cz on Y and Z-axes are determine...

  • Page 129

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 101 - Parameters 10800 Axis for which three-dimensional error compensation is performed (1st axis) 10801 Axis for which three-dimensional error compensation is performed (2nd axis) 10802 Axis for which three-dimensional error compensation is performed (3rd axi...

  • Page 130

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 102 - [Valid data range] From 1 through the number of the compensation points. Set three-dimensional error compensation point number at the reference position 10809 Magnification for three-dimensional error compensation (1st axis) 10810 Magnification for th...

  • Page 131

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 103 - Note NOTE 1 The controlled axis on which three-dimensional error compensation is to be applied must be a linear axis. 2 Three-dimensional error compensation cannot be performed until a reference position return is performed for the compensation axis. 4 The r...

  • Page 132

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 104 - 1.4 SETTINGS RELATED TO SERVO-CONTROLLED AXES The servo interface of the Series 16 features the following: • Digitally controlled AC servo motor • Motor feedback with serial pulse coders (1) Absolute pulse coder with a resolution of 1,000,000 pulses/re...

  • Page 133

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 105 - 1.4.1 Parameters Related to Servo Overview Terms frequently used in explanation of parameters related to servo systems are listed below: Least command increment The minimum unit of a command to be given from CNC to the machine tool Detection unit The min...

  • Page 134

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 106 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1815 APCxAPZx OPTx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 1 OPTx Position detector 0: A separate pulse coder is...

  • Page 135

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 107 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1816 DM3xDM2xDM1x [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. #4 DM1 #5 DM2 #6 DM3 By using DM1, DM2, and...

  • Page 136

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 108 - (1) T series Least input increment Least command increment 0.001 mm (diameter specification) 0.0005 mm Millimeter input 0.001 mm (radius specification) 0.001 mm 0.0001 inch (diameter specification) 0.0005 mm Millimeter machine Inch input0.0001 inch (radius ...

  • Page 137

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 109 - (2) M series Least input increment and least command increment Increment system IS-AIS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E UnitMillimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 mm Millimeter input 0.0010.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 ...

  • Page 138

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 110 - NOTE If a feedrate exceeding the feedrate found by the expression below is used, an incorrect travel amount may result or a servo alarm may be issued. Be sure to use a feedrate not exceeding the feedrate found by the following expression: Fmax[mm/min] = 1...

  • Page 139

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 111 - 1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in movement [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis. If the positio...

  • Page 140

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 112 - Generally, set the middle value between the positioning deviation limit during movement and the positioning deviation at rapid traverse as the feed stop positioning deviation. 1850 Grid shift and reference position shift for each axis NOTE When this para...

  • Page 141

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 113 - 1.4.2 Optional Command Multiplication Overview If the detection unit becomes a special value, an optional command multiplication can be set with an n:m ratio. The valid data range is between 1/9999 to 9999/1. Explanation - Optional command multiplication...

  • Page 142

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 114 - 1.4.3 Absolute Position Detection Overview An absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder) is an incremental pulse coder with an absolute counter. It detects the absolute position based on the value of the absolute counter. For an axis on which an ab...

  • Page 143

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 115 - - Manual reference position return Follow the procedure below to perform manual reference position return. (1) Set bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No. 1815 to 0. Alarms (PW0000) and (DS0300) are displayed. (2) Turn the power off, then on again. Alarm (DS0300) is...

  • Page 144

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 116 - [Operation] These signals are 1 in the following case: - The batteries for the absolute position detector have run out. The batteries need be replaced in the status in which the power to the machine is on. These signals are 0 in the following case: - The b...

  • Page 145

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 117 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1803 NFP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 7 NFP If position matching between the machine position and absolute position detector is not performed even once, follow-up operation is: 0: No...

  • Page 146

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 118 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1819 CRFx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 1 CRFx When the servo alarm SV0445 (soft disconnection), SV0447 (hard disconnection (separate)), or SV0421 (dual position feedback excessive error) is iss...

  • Page 147

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 119 - Number Message Description SV0301 APC ALARM: COMMUNICATION ERROR Since the absolute-position detector caused a communication error, the correct machine position could not be obtained. (data transfer error) The absolute-position detector, cable, or servo inte...

  • Page 148

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 120 - Caution CAUTION The normal voltage of the backup batteries for an absolute pulse coder is 6 V. The voltage drops as time goes by. 6VPBATLPBATZ4.5V1.5V PBATL: Battery voltage low alarm This alarm is output when the voltage becomes 4.5 V or less. When thi...

  • Page 149

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 121 - Note NOTE 1 For an absolute position detector, batteries are used because the absolute position must be retained. When the battery voltage becomes low, a battery low alarm for the absolute position detector is displayed on the machine's operator panel or s...

  • Page 150

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 122 - 1.4.4 FSSB Setting Overview Connecting the CNC control section to servo amplifiers via a high-speed serial bus (FANUC Serial Servo Bus, or FSSB), which uses only one fiber optics cable, can significantly reduce the amount of cabling in machine tool electric...

  • Page 151

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 123 - M1/M2: First/second separate detector interface unit12345678SlaveNo.1X2Y3Z4A5B6CControlledaxisnumberProgramaxis name(No. 1020)CNCTwo-axisamplifierSingle-axisamplifierM1Two-axisamplifierSingle-axisamplifierM2 - Manual setting 1 The manual setting 1 is valid...

  • Page 152

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 124 - • No number can be skipped in parameter No. 1023; for example, servo axis number 3 cannot be used for any axis unless servo axis number 2 is used. • The following servo functions cannot be used: - High-speed current loop - Tandem control - Electric gear ...

  • Page 153

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 125 - - Manual setting 2 After parameter FMD (No. 1902#0) is set to 1 or automatic setting has been terminated (ASE (No. 1902#1) is set to 1), manual setting 2 for each parameter for axis setting can be performed. To perform manual setting 2, set parameter Nos. 1...

  • Page 154

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 126 - No.1437614377143781437914380 14381 1438214383 0 4 32 32 32 32 32 32 No.1438414385143861438714388 14389 1439014391 3 2 5 32 32 32 32 32 No.14392 to 14407 - - For servo HRV3 control When servo HRV3 control is used, specify numbers other than a multiple of 4...

  • Page 155

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 127 - - For servo HRV4 control When servo HRV4 control is used, specify odd numbers in parameter No. 1023 as servo axis numbers. Also set bit 1 (2AX) of parameter No. 14476 to 1 to use the servo software 90Dx series for servo HRV4 control. 1 X12 Y33 Z54 A75 B96...

  • Page 156

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 128 - FSSB display and setting procedure - Display The FSSB setting screen displays FSSB-based amplifier and axis information. This information can also be specified by the operator. 1 Press the SYSTEM function key. 2 To display [FSSB], press the next menu page ...

  • Page 157

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 129 - The amplifier setting screen consists of the following items: • NO. : Slave number For each FSSB line, the serial numbers assigned to up to 18 slaves (up to 16 amplifiers and up to 2 separate detector interface units) connected by the FSSB are displayed....

  • Page 158

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 130 - 1026 are also displayed. If the controlled axis number is 0, - is displayed. • The following items are displayed as amplifier information: - UNIT : Servo amplifier unit type - SERIES : Servo amplifier series - CUR. : Maximum rating current • The followin...

  • Page 159

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 131 - • M2:Connector number for separate detector interface unit 2 The connector number for separate detector interface unit 2 that is retained in the SRAM is displayed. • M3:Connector number for separate detector interface unit 3 The connector number for sepa...

  • Page 160

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 132 - The amplifier maintenance screen displays the following items: • AXIS : Controlled axis number • NAME : Controlled axis name • AMP : Type of amplifier connected to each axis • SERIES : Servo amplifier series of an amplifier connected to each axis ...

  • Page 161

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 133 - When the [SETING] key is pressed after data has been entered, a warning message is displayed if the entered data contains an error. When the data is valid, the corresponding parameter (Nos.1023, 1905, 1936 to 1939, 14340 to 14375, and 14376 to 14407) is set...

  • Page 162

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 134 - (2) Axis setting screen On the axis setting screen, the following items can be specified: • M1:Connector number for separate detector interface unit 1 • M2:Connector number for separate detector interface unit 2 • M3:Connector number for separate de...

  • Page 163

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 135 - EGB. These numbers must be consecutive and within a range between 1 and the number of controlled axes. If a number that falls outside the valid range is entered, the message DATA IS OUT OF RANGE is displayed. When the [SETING] soft key is pressed on the a...

  • Page 164

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 136 - No. 143581435914360143611436214363 14364 1436514366 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 80 No. 143671436814369143701437114372 14373 1437414375 -40 -96 -96 -96 -96 -96 -96 -96 -96 No. 144081440914410144111441214413 14414 1441514416 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 64 No. 144171441814419...

  • Page 165

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 137 - No. 10231905#6PM1 1905#7PM2 1905#1PM3 1905#2PM4 1936 1937 19381939X10 30 0 1 0 0 - 1 - - Y10 31 0 1 0 0 - 2 - - Z10 32 0 1 0 0 - 3 - - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1902 ASE FMD [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When this p...

  • Page 166

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 138 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1905 PM2 PM1 PM4 PM3 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 1 PM3 The third separate detector interface unit is...

  • Page 167

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 139 - NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to 7 Set the connector numbers corresponding to connectors to be connected when the sepa...

  • Page 168

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 140 - 14340 ATR value corresponding to slave 01 on FSSB line 1 14341 ATR value corresponding to slave 02 on FSSB line 1 to 14357 ATR value corresponding to slave 18 on FSSB line 1 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operatio...

  • Page 169

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 141 - NOTE 1 When the electric gear box (EGB) function is used Although an amplifier is not actually required for an EGB dummy axis, set this parameter with assuming that a dummy amplifier is connected. That is, as the address conversion table value for a nonexis...

  • Page 170

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 142 - - Example of axis configuration and parameter settings Example 1 1021324354664758-569to 18-96Slave numberATRNo.14340 to 14357 X A Y Z B (M1) C (M2) (None) Axis 1 X 1 2 Y 3 3 Z 4 4 A 2 5 B 5 6 C 6 Controlled axis number Program axis name No.1020 Servo axi...

  • Page 171

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 143 - Example 2 Example of axis configuration and parameter settings when the electric gear box (EGB) function is used (EGB slave axis: A-axis, EGB dummy axis: B-axis) 10 21 32 44 55 664 7-56 83 Slave numberATR No.14340 to 14357 XYAZC(M1)(M2)B(Dummy)Axis1 X 12...

  • Page 172

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 144 - 14358 ASTR value corresponding to slave 01 on FSSB line 2 14359 ASTR value corresponding to slave 02 on FSSB line 2 to 14375 ASTR value corresponding to slave 18 on FSSB line 2 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operat...

  • Page 173

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 145 - 14376 ATR value corresponding to connector 1 on the first separate detector interface unit to 14383 ATR value corresponding to connector 8 on the first separate detector interface unit 14384 ATR value corresponding to connector 1 on the second separate d...

  • Page 174

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 146 - NOTE When the FSSB is set to the automatic setting mode (when the parameter FMD (No.1902#0) is set to 0), parameter Nos. 14376 to 14407 are automatically set as data is input on the FSSB setting screen. When the manual setting 2 mode is set (when the parame...

  • Page 175

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 147 - 14444 ATR value corresponding to connector 1 on the first separate detector interface unit connected to an additional axis board 14445 ATR value corresponding to connector 2 on the first separate detector interface unit connected to an additional axis boa...

  • Page 176

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 148 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 14476 2AX NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit # 1 2AX Servo software 90Dx series for servo HRV4 control is: 0: N...

  • Page 177

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 149 - Number Message Description SV5138 FSSB:AXIS SETTING NOT COMPLETE The axis setting has not completed yet, in an automatic setting mode. SV5139 FSSB:ERROR The axis setting has not completed yet, in an automatic setting mode. SV5197 FSSB:OPEN TIME OUT Servo ini...

  • Page 178

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 150 - 1.4.5 Temporary Absolute Coordinate Setting Overview In the full closed system with an inner absolute position pulse coder (serial pulse coder) and an incremental scale, the position is set by using absolute position data from the inner absolute position pu...

  • Page 179

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 151 - ・Differences between the specifications of the FS30i and those of the FS16i/FS18i/FS21i With the FS16i/FS18i/FS21i, when bit 1 (XZF) of parameter No. 1807 is set to 0, the coordinate system is established. At this time, the reference position establishment...

  • Page 180

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 152 - # 4 APZx Machine position and position on absolute position detector when the absolute position detector is used 0 : Not corresponding 1 : Corresponding NOTE 1 If the following parameters is modified, the parameter APZ (No.1815#4) will be changed to &q...

  • Page 181

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 153 - # 7 XIAx The Temporary Absolute Coordinate Setting function is 0 : invalid. 1 : valid. NOTE In case of using the Temporary Absolute Coordinate Setting, parameters No.1815#1(OPTx), No.1815#5(APCx), No.1874 and No.1875 must be set.

  • Page 182

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 154 - 1.5 SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS 1.5.1 Machine Coordinate System Overview The point that is specific to a machine and serves as the reference of the machine is referred to as the machine zero point. A machine tool builder sets a machine zero p...

  • Page 183

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 155 - - G53 specification immediately after power-on Since the machine coordinate system must be set before the G53 command is specified, at least one manual reference position return or automatic reference position return by the G28 command must be performed aft...

  • Page 184

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 156 - Parameter 1240 Coordinate value of the reference position in the machine coordinate system NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm...

  • Page 185

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 157 - 1.5.2 Workpiece Coordinate System/Addition of Workpiece Coordinate System Pair Overview A coordinate system used for machining a workpiece is referred to as a workpiece coordinate system. A workpiece coordinate system is to be set with the CNC beforehand (s...

  • Page 186

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 158 - By specifying a G code from G54 to G59, one of the workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 can be selected. G54 .......... Workpiece coordinate system 1 G55 .......... Workpiece coordinate system 2 G56 .......... Workpiece coordinate system 3 G57 .......... Wor...

  • Page 187

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 159 - Format - Changing by inputting programmable data G10 L2 Pp IP_; p=0 : External workpiece zero point offset value p=1 to 6 : Workpiece zero point offset value correspond to workpiece coordinate system 1 to 6 IP_: For an absolute command, workpiece zero poi...

  • Page 188

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 160 - T If IP is an incremental command value, the work coordinate system is defined so that the current tool position coincides with the result of adding the specified incremental value to the coordinates of the previous tool position. (Coordinate system shift) ...

  • Page 189

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 161 - WZn-Machine zero pointWorkpiece zeropoint offset valueWzoG54 workpiececoordinate system beforemanual interventionG54 workpiece coordinatesystem after manualinterventionPoPnAmount ofmovement duringmanual intervention In the operation above, a workpiece coord...

  • Page 190

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 162 - 1.5.2.3 Adding workpiece coordinate systems (G54.1 or G54) Besides the six workpiece coordinate systems (standard workpiece coordinate systems) selectable with G54 to G59, 48 or 300 additional workpiece coordinate systems (additional workpiece coordinate sy...

  • Page 191

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 163 - P codes other than workpiece offset numbers cannot be specified in a G54.1 (G54) block. Example 1) G54.1G04P1000; Example 2) G54.1M98P48; 1.5.2.4 Automatic coordinate system setting When ZPR (bit 0 of parameter No. 1201) for automatic coordinate system set...

  • Page 192

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 164 - ZXzxX-Z : Coordinate system in programmingx-z : Current set coordinate system with shift amount 0(coordinate system to be modified by shifting)OO’Set the shift amount from O' to O in the work coordinate system shift memory.Shift Fig. 1.5.2 (b) Workpiece ...

  • Page 193

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 165 - - Diameter and radius values The workpiece coordinate system shift amount depends on diameter programming or radius programming. Example) Although the base point should be positioned at X = φ120.0 (diameter value) and Z = 70.0 from the workpiece zero poi...

  • Page 194

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 166 - 1: Not displayed NOTE When the workpiece coordinate shift amount setting screen is not displayed, a workpiece coordinate system shift amount modification using G10P0 cannot be made. # 7 WZR If the CNC is reset by the reset key on the MDI panel, extern...

  • Page 195

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 167 - NOTE When the external workpiece zero point offset is made invalid, the following operation results: 1 As the external workpiece zero point offset on the workpiece zero point offset setting screen, a workpiece coordinate system shift amount is displayed. 2 ...

  • Page 196

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 168 - 1220 External workpiece zero point offset value in each axis [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 9 d...

  • Page 197

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 169 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3104 PPD [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 3 PPD Relative position display when a coordinate system is set 0: Not preset 1: Preset NOTE If any of the following is executed when PPD is set to 1, th...

  • Page 198

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 170 - 1.5.3 Local Coordinate System Overview When a program is created in a workpiece coordinate system, a child workpiece coordinate system can be set for easier programming. Such a child coordinate system is referred to as a local coordinate system. Format G5...

  • Page 199

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 171 - CAUTION 1 When ZCL (bit 2 of parameter No.1201) is set to 1 and an axis returns to the reference point by the manual reference point return function, the zero point of the local coordinate system of the axis matches that of the work coordinate system. The ...

  • Page 200

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 172 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1201 ZCL [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 2 ZCL Local coordinate system when the manual reference position return is performed 0: The local coordinate system is not canceled. 1: The local...

  • Page 201

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 173 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5400 D3R [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 2 D3R The three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode can be cancelled by: 0: The G69 (M series) command, the G69.1 (T series) command, a reset operation,...

  • Page 202

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 174 - 1.5.4 Rotary Axis Roll Over Overview The roll-over function prevents coordinates for the rotation axis from overflowing. The roll-over function is enabled by setting parameter ROAx (No. 1008#0) to 1. For an incremental command, the tool moves the angle spec...

  • Page 203

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 175 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1008 RRLx RABx ROAx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 0 ROAx The roll-over function of a rotation axis is ...

  • Page 204

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 176 - For the rotation axis used for cylindrical interpolation, set the standard value. Note NOTE This function cannot be used together with the indexing function of the index table (machining center system). Reference item Manual name Item name USER’S MANUAL...

  • Page 205

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 177 - 1.6 FEED AXIS SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL Overview When a movement is made along one axis by using two servo motors as in the case of a large gantry machine, a command for one axis can drive the two motors by synchronizing one motor with the other. Moreover, b...

  • Page 206

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 178 - 1.6.1 Axis Configuration for Feed Axis Synchronization Control Explanation - Master axis and slave axis for feed axis synchronization control An axis used as the reference for feed axis synchronization control is referred to as a master axis (M-axis), and ...

  • Page 207

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 179 - Setting for using synchronous operation at all times When bit 5 (SCA) of parameter No. 8304 for the slave axis is set to 1, synchronous operation is performed at all times, regardless of the setting of the signal SYNCx/SYNCJx. - Synchronization control a...

  • Page 208

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 180 - - Axis selection on the screen display On a screen such as the current position display screen, a slave axis is also displayed. The display of a slave axis can be disabled by setting bit 0 (NDP) of parameter No. 3115 to 1 and setting bit 1 (NDA) of paramet...

  • Page 209

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 181 - 1.6.2 Synchronization Error Compensation Explanation When a synchronization error value exceeding the zero width set in parameter No. 8333 is detected, compensation pulses for synchronization error reduction are calculated and added onto the command pulses ...

  • Page 210

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 182 - B: Synchronization error zero width 2 (parameter No. 8335) (0 < B < A) Kd: Synchronization error compensation gain (parameter No. 8334) Ks: Synchronization error compensation gain 2 (parameter No. 8336) (0 < Ks < Kd) Er: Synchronization error va...

  • Page 211

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 183 - 1.6.3 Synchronization Establishment Explanation Upon power-up or after emergency stop cancellation, the machine positions on the master axis and slave axis under feed axis synchronization control are not always the same. In such a case, the synchronization...

  • Page 212

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 184 - The result of comparing the positional difference between the master axis and slave axis with a maximum allowable compensation value for synchronization establishment can be checked using the synchronization establishment enable state output signal SYNOF (F0...

  • Page 213

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 185 - NOTE When the grid position difference between the master axis and slave axis is large, a reference position shift can occur, depending on the timing of the *DEC signal set to 1. In the example below, the shift along the slave axis is so large that the po...

  • Page 214

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 186 - - One-direction synchronization establishment When synchronization error compensation is disabled, synchronization establishment can be performed by setting bit 0 (SSO) of parameter No. 8305 to 1 to move the machine in one direction along the master axis an...

  • Page 215

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 187 - 1.6.4 Automatic Setting for Grid Position Matching Explanation Before feed axis synchronization control can be performed, the reference position on the master axis must be matched with the reference position on the slave axis. With this function, the CNC a...

  • Page 216

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 188 - 1.6.5 Synchronization Error Check Explanation A synchronization error value is monitored at all times. If an error exceeding a certain limit is detected, an alarm is issued and the movement along the axis is stopped. When synchronization error compensation...

  • Page 217

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 189 - - Synchronization error check based on machine coordinates When synchronization error compensation is not performed, a synchronization error check based on machine coordinates is made. The machine coordinate on the master axis is compared with that on the s...

  • Page 218

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 190 - 1.6.6 Methods of Alarm Recovery by Synchronization Error Check Explanation To recover from an alarm issued as a result of synchronization error check, two methods are available. One method uses the correction mode, and the other uses normal operation. If t...

  • Page 219

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 191 - 5. When the synchronization error is reduced to within the allowable value for suppressing the alarm, reset the value of bit 2 (ADJ) of parameter No. 8304 to the original value to switch from the correction mode to the normal synchronization mode. Synchroni...

  • Page 220

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 192 - 1.6.7 Feed Axis Synchronization Control Torque Difference Alarm Explanation If a movement made along the master axis differs from a movement made along the slave axis during feed axis synchronization control, the machine can be damaged. To prevent such dam...

  • Page 221

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 193 - 4. Read the absolute torque difference value presented when normal operation is being performed. In the threshold parameter (No. 2031), set a value obtained by adding some margin to the read absolute value. An absolute torque difference value can be read u...

  • Page 222

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 194 - [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit operates as described below: - During memory or MDI operation, the control unit issues the move command specified for the master axis to both the master axis and slave axis of feed axis synchronous...

  • Page 223

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 195 - Synchronization compensation enable state output signals SYNOF1 to SYNOF8<Fn211> [Classification] Output signal [Function] When master/slave axis pairs are set for feed axis synchronous control, this signal notifies an external unit that the positio...

  • Page 224

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 196 - - Input signals Address bitSymbol Signal name Master and slave axes Master axis onlyGn100 0 +Jx Feed axis direction select signals O Gn102 0 -Jx Feed axis direction select signals O Gn104 0 +EXLx Stored stroke limit 1 switching signals in axis direction O...

  • Page 225

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 197 - Parameter 2031 Torque-command-difference threshold for a torque-difference alarm [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Minimum unit of data] 0 to 14564 An alarm is issued when the absolute value of a torque-command-difference between two a...

  • Page 226

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 198 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8303 SOF SAF ATS ATE [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 0 ATE In feed axis synchronous control, automatic s...

  • Page 227

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 199 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8304 SYE SMS SCA MVB CLP ADJ SSA [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 SSA When the one-direction synchronization establishment function under feed axis synchronous control is used: 0: The axis with a large...

  • Page 228

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 200 - # 5 SCA In feed axis synchronous control: 0: Synchronous operation is performed when the feed axis synchronous control manual feed selection signal SYNCJ or the feed axis synchronous control selection signal SYNC for slave axes is set to 1. 1: Synchrono...

  • Page 229

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 201 - 8311 Axis number of master axis in feed axis synchronous control NOTE Set this parameter to the same value for both the master and slave axes. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Select ...

  • Page 230

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 202 - NOTE In synchronous operation with mirror image applied, synchronization error compensation, synchronization establishment, synchronization error checking, and modification mode cannot be used. 8314 Maximum allowable error in synchronization error check b...

  • Page 231

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 203 - 8325 Maximum compensation value in synchronization establishment based on machine coordinates [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the...

  • Page 232

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 204 - 8330 Multiplier for a maximum allowable synchronization error immediately after power-up NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range]...

  • Page 233

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 205 - 8333 Synchronization error zero width for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 When a synchronization error below the value set in this parameter is detected, synchro...

  • Page 234

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 206 - 8337 M code for turning off synchronization in feed axis synchronous control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 1 to 999999999 This parameter specifies an M code for switching from synchronous operation to normal ope...

  • Page 235

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 207 - (1) Parameters which must be set to the same value for the master and slave axes Parameter number Description 12#7 Releasing the assignment of the controlled axis for each axis 1005#0 Whether reference position return has been performed 1005#1 Enabling sett...

  • Page 236

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 208 - Parameter number Description 3605#0 Using bidirectional pitch error compensation 3605#1 Using interpolation type pitch error compensation 3624 Interval between pitch error compensation positions for each axis 3625 Travel distance per revolution in pitch erro...

  • Page 237

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 209 - Parameter number Description 3626 Number of the both-direction pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position (for movement in the negative direction) 3627 Pitch error compensation at reference position when a movement to the reference posi...

  • Page 238

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 210 - Diagnosis The synchronization error and compensation are displayed on the diagnostic screen. 3500 Synchronization error for each axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Description] The difference between the positions of the master and slave axes (synchron...

  • Page 239

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 211 - Number Message Description SV0420 SYNC TORQUE EXCESS In feed axis synchronization control, for synchronization, the difference value of torque between a master and slave axes exceeded the parameter (No. 2031) setting value. This alarm occurs for a master axi...

  • Page 240

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 212 - NOTE 3 During synchronous operation, the axis-by-axis signals such as for external deceleration, interlock, and machine lock are enabled for the master axis only. During synchronous operation, those signals for the slave axis are ignored. 4 When switching t...

  • Page 241

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 213 - 1.7 TANDEM CONTROL Overview If a single motor cannot produce sufficient torque to move a large table, for example, this function allows two motors to be used. By means of this function, two motors can be used to perform movement along a single axis. Positio...

  • Page 242

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 214 - Specified pulse Position loop Velocity loop + - - Built-in detector Separate detector Scale Average?Reverse? PRM.1815#1PRM. 2008#2PRM. 2022PRM. 2087 Preload (L) Speed FBCurrent loop Rotor position Servo amplifier Power line Master axisSpeed FB Power line PR...

  • Page 243

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 215 - Explanation - Axis configuration in tandem control To specify the axis configuration in tandem control, follow the procedure below: (1) Tandem control can be performed for up to sixteen pairs of axes. It can be performed for up to twelve pairs of axes for ...

  • Page 244

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 216 - - Preload function By adding an offset to the torque controlled by the position (velocity) feedback device, the function can apply opposite torques to the master and slave axes so that equal and opposite movements are performed for both axes. This function...

  • Page 245

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 217 - For details of these functions, refer to FFANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis/αi series PARAMETER MANUAL (B-65270EN). - Notes on stability of tandem control An important factor affecting stability in tandem control is the capability of back feed. Back feed is to ca...

  • Page 246

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 218 - Parameter - Setting data (parameters) The parameters that are generally set for each axis can, when set for axes under tandem control, be classified into the following three groups: i) Parameters in which identical values must be set for the master and slav...

  • Page 247

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 219 - If, for example, a motor with serial pulse coder A is used with a linear scale capable of detecting a position in 1-µm units, and if a single rotation of the motor produces a movement of 4 mm, specify the parameters as shown below: Master axis Slave axis...

  • Page 248

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 220 - - Parameters that may be set to different values for the master and slave axes Parameter No.Meaning of parameters 1023 Servo axis number 2022 Motor rotation direction 2087 Preload value 3115 Current position display 1310#0 Soft OT2 1310#1 Soft OT3 1320 1st ...

  • Page 249

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 221 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1817 TANx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 6 TANx Tandem control 0: Not used 1: Used NOTE Set this p...

  • Page 250

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 222 - 2021 Load inertia ratio [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 2022 Motor rotation direction NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parame...

  • Page 251

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 223 - 1.8 ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL Overview When the angular axis installed makes an angle other than 90° with the perpendicular axis, the angular axis control function controls the distance traveled along each axis according to the inclination angle as in the case ...

  • Page 252

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 224 - +Y (Angular axis)+Y' (Virtual axis)θYp tanθ (perpendicular axiscomponent produced bytravel along the angular axis)Xp and YpXa and YaActual tool travel+X (Perpendicular axis) Fig. 1.8 (b) - Feedrate When the Y-axis is an angular axis, and the X-axis is...

  • Page 253

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 225 - • By using bit 2 (AZR) of parameter No. 8200, whether to make a movement along the perpendicular axis by a movement made along the angular axis when a manual reference position return operation is performed along the angular axis can be chosen. When a mov...

  • Page 254

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 226 - - Reference position return operation of high-speed type When a reference position is already established and a reference position return operation of high-speed type is to be performed, the reference position return operation need not be performed in the o...

  • Page 255

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 227 - - Commands for linear interpolation and positioning of linear interpolation type (G01, G00) The tool moves to a specified position in the Cartesian coordinate system when the following is specified: (G90)G00X_Y_; (when the Y-axis is an angular axis, the X-a...

  • Page 256

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 228 - 30°P1P0(0,0)P2200115.470+Y (Angular axis)+Y' (Virtual axis)+X (Perpendicularaxis) - Three-dimensional coordinate conversion In the three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode, slanted coordinate system conversion is applied to the workpiece coordinate s...

  • Page 257

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 229 - The pre-movement stroke check function does not work in a slanted coordinate system. Unless this function is enabled, and the coordinate system is converted to the Cartesian coordinate system, no stroke check is made. • Stored stroke external setting (fun...

  • Page 258

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 230 - Input signal Signal name AddressClassificationRemarks Feed axis direction selection signal +Jx -Jx G100 G102 Cartesian A movement is made in the Cartesian coordinate system. (When the +J/-J signal for the angular axis is made high, a movement is made also a...

  • Page 259

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 231 - • Return operation cannot be performed along the perpendicular axis while return operation is being performed along the angular axis. - Synchronous control • To perform synchronous control over related axes under angular axis control, specify the angul...

  • Page 260

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 232 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8200 AZR AAC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 0 AAC 0: Does not perform angular axis control...

  • Page 261

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 233 - # 6 A53 So far, if a slanted axis is singly specified by a machine coordinate command (G53) in angular axis control, this parameter set to 0 specifies that "compensation is applied to the Cartesian axis", and this parameter set to 1 specifies t...

  • Page 262

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 234 - 8210 Slant angle of a slanted axis in angular axis control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] -180.000 to 180.000. Howev...

  • Page 263

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 235 - Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0372 REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE An attempt was made to perform an automatic return to the reference position on the orthogonal axis before the completion of a return to the reference position on the angular axi...

  • Page 264

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 236 - 1.9 CHOPPING FUNCTION Overview When contour grinding is performed, the chopping function can be used to grind the side face of a workpiece. By means of this function, while the grinding axis (the axis with the grinding wheel) is being moved vertically, a ...

  • Page 265

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 237 - Explanation - Chopping activated by signal input Before chopping can be started, the chopping axis, reference position, upper dead point, lower dead point, and chopping feedrate must be set using the parameter screen (or the chopping screen). Chopping is s...

  • Page 266

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 238 - - Chopping feedrate (feedrate of movement to point R) From the start of chopping to point R, the tool moves at the rapid traverse rate (specified by parameter No. 1420). The override function can be used for either the normal rapid traverse rate or chopping...

  • Page 267

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 239 - - Chopping after the upper dead point or lower dead point has been changed When the upper dead point or lower dead point is changed while chopping is being performed, the tool moves to the position specified by the old data. Then, chopping is continued usi...

  • Page 268

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 240 - (3) When the upper dead point is changed during movement from the lower dead point to the upper dead point New upper dead pointPrevious upper dead point Previous lower dead point The tool first moves to the previous upper dead point, then to the lower de...

  • Page 269

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 241 - the displacement of the tool from the upper dead point and the displacement of the tool from the lower dead point becomes smaller than the setting of parameter No. 8377, after the start of chopping, the control unit performs compensation. When compensation i...

  • Page 270

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 242 - Point R Upper dead point L2L4L6 L1L3L5Lower dead point Time Displacement between the tool and the upper dead point: L2, L4, L6 Displacement between the tool and the lower dead point: L1, L3, L5 Compensation starts when: | L3 - L2 | < (parameter No. 837...

  • Page 271

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 243 - - Stopping chopping The following table lists the operations and commands that can be used to stop chopping, the positions at which chopping stops, and the operation performed after chopping stops: Operation/ command Stop position Operation after chopping ...

  • Page 272

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 244 - - Program restart When a program contains G codes for starting chopping (G81.1) and stopping chopping (G80), an attempt to restart that program results in an alarm (PS5050) being output. When a program that does not include the chopping axis is restarted du...

  • Page 273

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 245 - Signal Chopping hold signal *CHLD<Gn051#7> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Suspends chopping. [Operation] Once this signal has been set to 0, the tool is moved from the current position to point R, thus suspending chopping. Again settin...

  • Page 274

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 246 - Chopping-in-progress signal CHPMD<Fn039#2> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Posts notification of chopping in progress. [Operation] This signal is set to 1 in the following case: - Upon chopping start signal CHPST being set to 1 to start ...

  • Page 275

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 247 - # 7 CHF On the chopping screen, the chopping feedrate: 0: Can be set. 1: Cannot be set. 8370 Chopping axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to Number of controlled axes This parameter sets which servo axis the...

  • Page 276

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 248 - 8374 Chopping feedrate [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, deg/min (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] Refer to standard parameter ...

  • Page 277

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 249 - Reference item Manual name Item name USER’S MANUAL (B-63944EN) Chopping function

  • Page 278

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 250 - 1.10 ELECTRIC GEAR BOX 1.10.1 Electric Gear Box Overview This function enables fabrication of high-precision gears, screws, and other components by rotating the workpiece in synchronization with a rotating tool or by moving the tool in synchronization with...

  • Page 279

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 251 - NOTE The sampling cycle in which feedback pulses are read from the master axis, the synchronization pulses of the slave axis is calculated based on the synchronization coefficient K, and the pulses are issued for the position control for the slave axis is 1...

  • Page 280

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 252 - A single servo axis is used exclusively so that digital servo can directly read the rotation position of the master axis. (This axis is called the EGB dummy axis.) - Synchronization control (1) Start of synchronization If G81 is issued so that the machine...

  • Page 281

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 253 - EGB mode signal SYNMDO becomes "0". (4) Cancellation of synchronization When cancellation of synchronization is issued, the absolute coordinate on the workpiece axis is updated in accordance with the amount of travel during synchronization. Subse...

  • Page 282

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 254 - NOTE 1 During synchronization, manual handle interruption can be performed on the workpiece and other axes. 2 The maximum feedrates on the tool and workpiece axes are restricted by the position detector used. 3 In synchronization mode, no inch/metric convers...

  • Page 283

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 255 - - Synchronization start/cancellation timing chart example Synchronization start command (G81) Synchronization mode EGB mode confirmation signalSYNMOD<Fn065#6> Tool axis rotation command (S_M03) Tool axis stop command (M05) Tool axis rotation speed W...

  • Page 284

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 256 - - Helical gear compensation For a helical gear, the workpiece axis is compensated for the movement along the Z-axis (axial feed axis) based on the torsion angle of the gear. Helical gear compensation is performed with the following formulas: Compensation a...

  • Page 285

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 257 - - Direction of helical gear compensation The direction depends on HDR, bit 2 of parameter No. 7700. When HDR is set to 1. +CC:+, Z:+, P:+ Compensation direction : + (a) -Z +Z +CC:+, Z:+, P:- Compensation direction : -(b) +CC:+, Z:-, P:+ Compensation direct...

  • Page 286

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 258 - - Synchronization coefficient A synchronization coefficient is internally represented using a fraction (Kn/Kd) to eliminate an error. The formula below is used for calculation. αβTLKK =t coefficienation Synchronizdn×= where L : Number of teeth T : Numb...

  • Page 287

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 259 - - Retract function (1) Retract function with an external signal When the retract signal, RTRCT, becomes "1" (the rise of the signal is captured), retraction is performed with the retract amount set in parameter No. 7741 and the speed set in param...

  • Page 288

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 260 - CAUTION 1 Retraction is performed at the speed specified in parameter No. 7740. 2 Feed hold is not effective to movement during retraction. 3 Feedrate override is not effective to movement during retraction. 4 The delay of the cancellation of synchronizatio...

  • Page 289

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 261 - - Servo - Flowchart of the processing of the retract function with a spindle alarm Fault on servo axisServo amplifier errorStart of spindle deceleration and stop: PMC Spindle faultSpindle amplifier faultStart spindle deceleration stop: Spindle amplifierSt...

  • Page 290

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 262 - Signal Retract signal RTRCT <Gn066#4> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Performs retraction for the axis specified with a parameter. [Operation] When this signal becomes "1", the CNC operates as follows: The CNC can capture the...

  • Page 291

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 263 - Parameter The table below gives parameters related to EGB. Parameter number Description 1006 # 0 If the amount of travel along the slave axis is to be specified with L (speed) with a synchronization command, the slave axis must be set as a rotation axis (RO...

  • Page 292

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 264 - Note the following points when specifying parameters for the electronic gear box. 1 Arrange the controlled axes such that a slave axis appears before a dummy axis. (Example) Example of correct setting Example of incorrect setting Axis name Servo axis numbe...

  • Page 293

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 265 - 1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the serv...

  • Page 294

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 266 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3115 NDPx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 NDPx The current position display is: 0: performed. 1: not performed. NOTE If using the electric gear box function (EGB), set 1 for the dummy axis of ...

  • Page 295

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 267 - When HDR = 1 +CC : +, Z : +, P : + Compensation direction:+(a)-Z +Z +CC : +, Z : +, P : - Compensation direction:-(b)+C C : +, Z : -, P : + Compensation direction:- (c)+CC : +, Z : -, P : - Compensation direction:+(d) -Z +Z C : -, Z : +, P : + C : Compensati...

  • Page 296

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 268 - # 3 ART The retract function executed when a servo spindle alarm is issued is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7703 ARO ARE ERV [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 ERV During EGB synchronization (G81), ...

  • Page 297

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 269 - 7709 Number of the axial feed axis for helical compensation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes This parameter sets the number of the axial feed axis for a helical gear. NOTE When this...

  • Page 298

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 270 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7731 ECN EHF EFX [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 EFX As the EGB command: 0: G80 and G81 are used. 1: G80.8 and G81.8 are used. NOTE When this parameter is set to 0, no drilling canned cycle can ...

  • Page 299

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 271 - 7741 Retracted distance [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, deg (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer ...

  • Page 300

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 272 - Gear ratio of the spindle to the detector B: 1/1 (The spindle and detector are directly connected to each other.) Number of detector pulses per spindle rotation β: 80,000 pulses/rev(Calculated for four pulses for one A/B phase cycle) FFG N/M of the EGB dumm...

  • Page 301

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 273 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2273 EGF [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 6 EGF FFG is: 0: Not considered in the synchronization coefficient. 1: Considered. The synchronization coefficient is subject to the following restrictio...

  • Page 302

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 274 - Setting example Slave axis control Number of pulses of the position detector per rotation about the slave axis parameter No. 7773 Number of pulses of the position detector per rotation about the master axis parameter No. 7772 Slave axis 1,000,000 p/rev Maste...

  • Page 303

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 275 - 2372 Serial EGB exponent specification (γ) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 0 to 15 By setting a value in this parameter, it is possible to internally multiply the value of parameter No. 7772 or 7782 by 2γ. With ...

  • Page 304

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 276 - Setting example) Number of pulses of the position detector per rotation about the master axis = 1,000,000 [pulse/rev] Master axis FFG=1/1 Number of pulses of the position detector per rotation about the slave axis = 360,000 [pulse/rev] Slave axis Detection u...

  • Page 305

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 277 - 1.10.2 Electronic Gear Box Automatic Phase Synchronization Overview In the electronic gear box (EGB), when synchronization start or cancellation is specified, synchronization is not started or canceled immediately. Instead, acceleration/deceleration is ex...

  • Page 306

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 278 - Explanation - Acceleration/deceleration type Synchronization cancellation commandSynchronization start commandWorkpiece-axis speedSynchronization state AccelerationDecelerationSpindle speed G81R1 command execution G80R1 command execution Acceleration EGB m...

  • Page 307

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 279 - NOTE 1 During synchronization start/cancellation, acceleration/deceleration is linear. 2 In the automatic cancellation of synchronization due to one of the following causes, deceleration is performed and synchronization is canceled: <1> Reset <2>...

  • Page 308

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 280 - the acceleration according to the acceleration rate set in the parameter (No.7778). Upon completion of phase synchronization, the EGB mode signal SYNMOD becomes "1" and the G81R2 block terminates. 3. For cancellation, specify G80R2 while the tool ...

  • Page 309

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 281 - NOTE 3 In automatic phase synchronization, when a synchronization command is issued again in a synchronization state, movement about the workpiece axis is performed such that the position corresponding to the one-rotation signal of the spindle matches the po...

  • Page 310

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 282 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn065 SYNMOD Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7702 PHD PHS [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 6 PHS When the G81/G80 block contains no R command: 0: Acceleration/deceleratio...

  • Page 311

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 283 - 7777 Angle shifted from the spindle position (one-rotation signal position) the workpiece axis uses as the reference of phase synchronization [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] deg [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the in...

  • Page 312

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 284 - 1.10.3 Skip Function for EGB Axis Overview This function enables the skip or high-speed skip signal (these signals are collectively called skip signals in the remainder of this manual) for the EBG slave axis in synchronization mode with the EGB (electronic ...

  • Page 313

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 285 - Example G81 T200 L2 ; EGB mode ON X ; Z ; G31.8 G91 C0 P500 Q200 R1 ; EGB skip command After 200 skip signals have been input, the 200 skip positions on the C-axis that correspond to the respective skip signals are stored in custom macro variable...

  • Page 314

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 286 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6200 SRE SLS HSS SK0 GSK [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 GSK As a skip signal, the skip signal SKIPP is: 0: Invalid. 1: Valid. # 1 SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signa...

  • Page 315

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 287 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6201 SKPXE CSE IGX [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP, SKIPP, and SKIP2 to SKIP8 are: 0: Enabled as skip signals. 1: Disabled as skip signals. ...

  • Page 316

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 288 - 0: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to the bit is disabled. 1: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to the bit is enabled. The bits correspond to signals as follows: 6220 Period during which skip signal input is ignored for the continuous...

  • Page 317

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 289 - Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0115 VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGE A number that cannot be used for a local variable, common variable, or system variable in a custom macro is specified. In the EGB axis skip function (G31.8), a non-existent custom ...

  • Page 318

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 290 - 1.10.4 Electronic Gear Box 2 Pair Overview The Electronic Gear Box is a function for rotating a workpiece in sync with a rotating tool, or to move a tool in sync with a rotating workpiece. With this function, the high-precision machining of gears, threads, ...

  • Page 319

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 291 - - Synchronization start When the ratio of the master-axis travel to the slave-axis travel is specified, synchronization starts. Specify the master-axis travel in either of the following ways. 1 Master-axis speed T t: Master-axis speed (1≤ t ≤1000) 2 M...

  • Page 320

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 292 - NOTE 1 During synchronization, manual handle interruption can be performed on the slave and other axes. 2 The maximum feedrates on the master and slave axes are restricted by the position detector used. 3 In synchronization mode, no inch/metric conversion co...

  • Page 321

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 293 - <4> Alarm PW0000 (indicating that the power should be turned off) <5> An IO alarm is generated

  • Page 322

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 294 - 1.10.4.2 Description of commands compatible with those for a hobbing machine (G80, G81) A command compatible with that for a hobbing machine can be used as a synchronization command. Such a command cannot be used when a canned-cycle option is provided. Usua...

  • Page 323

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 295 - Explanation - Synchronization start Specify P and Q to use helical gear compensation. In this case, if only one of P and Q is specified, alarm (PS1594) is generated. When G81 is issued so that the machine enters synchronization mode, the synchronization of ...

  • Page 324

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 296 - NOTE 1 During synchronization, manual handle interruption can be performed on the workpiece and other axes. 2 The maximum feedrates on the tool and workpiece axes are restricted by the position detector used. 3 In synchronization mode, no inch/metric convers...

  • Page 325

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 297 - - Helical gear compensation For a helical gear, the workpiece axis is subjected to compensation for movement along the Z axis (axial feed axis) according to the twisted angle of the gear. Helical gear compensation is performed with the following data. Comp...

  • Page 326

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 298 - - Direction of helical gear compensation The direction depends on HDR, bit 2 of parameter No. 7700. When HDR = 1 +CC : +, Z : +, P : + Compensation direction:+(a)-Z +Z +CC : +, Z : +, P : - Compensation direction:-(b)+C C : +, Z : -, P : + Compensation dire...

  • Page 327

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 299 - 1.10.4.3 Controlled axis configuration example - For gear grinders Spindle : EGB master axis : Tool axis 1st axis : X axis 2nd axis : Y axis 3rd axis :C axis (EGB slave axis : Workpiece axis) 4th axis : C axis (EGB dummy axis : Cannot be used as a normal ...

  • Page 328

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 300 - NOTE The sampling cycle in which feedback pulses are read from the master axis, the synchronization pulses of the slave axis is calculated based on the synchronization coefficient K, and the pulses are issued for the position control for the slave axis is 1...

  • Page 329

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 301 - NOTE If the V-axis (linear axis) is synchronized with the spindle as in dressing, the V-axis travel range is determined by the rotation of the spindle. To perform dressing with the tool moving back and forth along the V-axis in a certain range, therefore, ...

  • Page 330

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 302 - Retraction completion signal RTRCTF<Fn065#4> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Reports that retraction is finished. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" in the following case. - When retraction is finished (movement is finished)...

  • Page 331

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 303 - Parameter The following table lists the parameters related to EGB. Parameter number Description 1006 # 0 If the amount of travel along the slave axis is to be specified with L (speed) with a synchronization command, the slave axis must be set as a rotation ...

  • Page 332

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 304 - Note the following points when specifying parameters for the electronic gear box. 1 Arrange the controlled axes such that a slave axis appears before a dummy axis. (Example) Example of correct setting Example of incorrect setting Axis name Servo axis numbe...

  • Page 333

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 305 - 1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the servo...

  • Page 334

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 306 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3115 NDPx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 NDPx The current position display is: 0: performed. 1: not performed. NOTE If using the electric gear box function (EGB), set 1 for the dummy axis of ...

  • Page 335

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 307 - When HDR = 1 +CC : +, Z : +, P : + Compensation direction:+(a)-Z +Z +CC : +, Z : +, P : - Compensation direction:-(b)+C C : +, Z : -, P : + Compensation direction:- (c)+CC : +, Z : -, P : - Compensation direction:+(d) -Z +Z C : -, Z : +, P : + C : Compensati...

  • Page 336

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 308 - # 3 ART The retract function executed when a servo spindle alarm is issued is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7703 ARO ARE ERV [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 ERV During EGB synchronization (G81), ...

  • Page 337

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 309 - 7709 Number of the axial feed axis for helical compensation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes This parameter sets the number of the axial feed axis for a helical gear. NOTE When this...

  • Page 338

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 310 - parameter has elapsed after the servo alarm is issued, EGB axis synchronization is canceled. This parameter is also valid when a servo alarm is issued for an axis along which to retract the tool. When this parameter is set, the output of the retract complet...

  • Page 339

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 311 - # 3 ECN When the automatic phase synchronization function for the electric gear box is disabled, during EGB synchronization, the G81 or G81.5 command: 0: Cannot be issued again. (The alarm (PS1595) is issued.) 1: Can be issued again. 7740 Feedrate dur...

  • Page 340

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 312 - Synchronization switch CNC Detection unitβ p/rev α p/revC-axisLeast command increment0.001deg Command pulses ×FFGGear ratio A Detector×CMRSlave axis Gear ratio B Error counterFollow-up ×CMRDummy axisn/m×FFG N/M MotorDetector SpindleError counterSpee...

  • Page 341

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 313 - fraction indicated by the settings. For example, you may set 16 for parameter No. 7772 and 108 for parameter No. 7773 for this example. 7782 Number of pulses from the position detector per EGB master axis rotation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type...

  • Page 342

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 314 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2273 EGF [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 6 EGF FFG is: 0: Not considered in the synchronization coefficient. 1: Considered. The synchronization coefficient is subject to the following restrictio...

  • Page 343

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 315 - Setting example Slave axis control Number of pulses of the position detector per rotation about the slave axis parameter No. 7773 Number of pulses of the position detector per rotation about the master axis parameter No. 7772 Slave axis 1,000,000 p/rev Maste...

  • Page 344

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 316 - 2372 Serial EGB exponent specification (γ) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 0 to 15 By setting a value in this parameter, it is possible to internally multiply the value of parameter No. 7772 or 7782 by 2γ. With ...

  • Page 345

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 317 - Setting example) Number of pulses of the position detector per rotation about the master axis = 1,000,000 [pulse/rev] Master axis FFG=1/1 Number of pulses of the position detector per rotation about the slave axis = 360,000 [pulse/rev] Slave axis Detection u...

  • Page 346

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 318 - 1.11 ROTARY AXIS CONTROL Overview A rotary axis is specified with bit 3 (RAAx) of parameter No. 1007. When an incremental command is specified for a rotary axis, the specified value itself sets a travel distance. When an absolute command is specified, the d...

  • Page 347

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 319 - By setting bit 5 (G90) of parameter No. 1007 to 1, a rotary axis control command can be regarded as an absolute command at all times. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1007 G90x RAAx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 3 RAAx R...

  • Page 348

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 320 - # 2 RRLx Relative coordinates are 0: Not rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation 1: Rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation Note NOTE 1 This function is valid only for a rotation axis for which rollover is set. 2 When bit 3 (RAA)...

  • Page 349

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 321 - 1.12 FUNCTION OF DECELERATION STOP IN CASE OF POWER FAILURE Overview If a power failure occurs during an axial movement, this function stops the movement by decreasing the speed on each axis at a rate specified in parameter No. 1791. This function prevents...

  • Page 350

    1.AXIS CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 322 - - Effect of application If a power failure occurs, energy required to decelerate and stop the linear motor is supplied from sub-module C (capacitor module). The amount of energy required for deceleration increases as the time constant decreases, or as the ...

  • Page 351

    B-63943EN-1/02 1.AXIS CONTROL - 323 - Parameter 1791 Acceleration rate on each axis for the outage-time deceleration stop function [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/sec/sec, inch/sec/sec, degree/sec/sec (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the i...

  • Page 352

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 324 - 2 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION

  • Page 353

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 325 - 2.1 EMERGENCY STOP Overview If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator's panel, the machine movement stops in a moment. Fig. 2.1 (a) EMERGENCY STOP This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the mach...

  • Page 354

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 326 - Emergency stop limit switchRelay powersupplySpark killer+X-X+Y-Y+Z-Z+4-4Emergency stop temporary releaseEMGSKFig. 2.1 (b) Connection of emergency stop limit switch The distance from the position where the dynamic brake is applied to that wher...

  • Page 355

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 327 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X008 *ESP (*ESP) (*ESP) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn008 *ESP Reference item Manual name Item name FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis/αi series DESCRIPTIONS (B-65262EN) Servo motor selection

  • Page 356

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 328 - 2.2 CNC READY SIGNALS Overview When the CNC is turned on and becomes ready for operation, the CNC ready signal is set to 1. Signal CNC Ready Signal MA<Fn001#7> [Classification] Output signal [Function] The CNC ready signal indicates t...

  • Page 357

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 329 - 2.3 OVERTRAVEL CHECK 2.3.1 Overtravel Signals Overview When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool limit switch, the tool decelerates and stops as a result of tripping the limit switch, and an OVER TRAVEL is disp...

  • Page 358

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 330 - The following shows the deceleration distance at overtravel. (i) Rapid traverse TRt2t1VR*+Lα limit switchCommand pulse decelerationServo system delaytV L1=VR(t1+t2+TR/2+TS)×1/6000 [mm or inch]...................<1> L1 : Deceleration d...

  • Page 359

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 331 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn114 *+L8 *+L7 *+L6 *+L5 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1 Gn116 *-L8 *-L7 *-L6 *-L5 *-L4 *-L3 *-L2 *-L1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3004 OTH [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path ...

  • Page 360

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 332 - 2.3.2 Stored Stroke Check 1 Overview A machine movable range is set with coordinates in the machine coordinate system in parameters. If the machine attempts to move beyond the range, it is decelerated and stopped and an alarm is displayed. Th...

  • Page 361

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 333 - Stroke check release signal RLSOT<Gn007#7> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects whether the stored stroke check 1 limits are checked or not. [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, does not check the stored stroke check ...

  • Page 362

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 334 - - Alarms OT0506, OT0507 : Hard OT - Alarms OT0510, OT0511 : Stored stroke check before movement Once the signal is set to 1, the axis and direction of the signal are stored. It is impossible to further move the tool along that axis in that dir...

  • Page 363

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 335 - # 7 BFA When the stored stroke check 1, 2, or 3 alarm is issued, an interference alarm is issued with the inter-path interference check function (T series), or a chuck/tail stock barrier (T series) alarm is issued: 0: The tool stops after e...

  • Page 364

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 336 - 1326 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis 1327 Coordinate value II of stored stroke check 1 in the negative direction on each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of...

  • Page 365

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 337 - Note NOTE 1 Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 can be used to specify whether to stop the tool before it enters the forbidden area or when it enters the area. 2 The forbidden area must be specified with correct positional relationships. An inco...

  • Page 366

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 338 - 2.3.3 Stored Stroke Check 2, 3 Overview For stored stroke check 2, the outside or inside of the area specified by parameters or a program is defined as the forbidden area. As a limit position, specify a distance from the origin of the machine...

  • Page 367

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 339 - Stored stroke check 1Storedstrokecheck 2Stored stroke check 3 : Forbidden area for the tool Fig. 2.3.3 (c) Stroke check The following shows the areas which the tool cannot enter for each stored stroke check. • Stroke check 1: Outside • ...

  • Page 368

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 340 - When setting the area by parameters, points A and B in the figure below must be set. X1>X2, Y1>Y2, Z1>Z2A (X1, Y1, Z1)B (X2, Y2, Z2) Fig. 2.3.3 (e) Creating or changing the forbidden area using a parameters The values X1, Y1, Z1, X2,...

  • Page 369

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 341 - must be set. When checking the tool tip (like point A), and if the tool length varies for each tool, setting the forbidden area for the longest tool requires no re-setting and results in safe operation. The position of thetool after referencep...

  • Page 370

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 342 - - Releasing the alarms If the enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved only in the backward direction. To cancel the alarm, move the tool backward until it is outside the forbidden area and reset the system. ...

  • Page 371

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 343 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1300 BFA RL3 OUT [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path # 0 OUT The area inside or outside of the stored stroke check 2 is set as an inhibition area 0: Inside 1: Outside # 5 RL3 St...

  • Page 372

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 344 - NOTE 1 Specify diameter values for any axes for which diameter programming is specified. 2 Whether the inside area or outside area is a prohibited area is set using bit 0 (OUT) of parameter No. 1300. 1324 Coordinate value I of stored stroke c...

  • Page 373

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 345 - Caution CAUTION 1 If the two points for specifying a forbidden area are identical, all areas are handled as movable areas for check 2/3. 2 Even if the two points for specifying a forbidden area are erroneously set, the rectangular parallelepip...

  • Page 374

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 346 - 2.3.4 Stroke Limit External Setting Overview When a tool is changed, the tool tip is aligned with the end of the limit area and signals are input. This operation sets the machine position (machine coordinates) at that time as the limit positi...

  • Page 375

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 347 - 2.3.5 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier T Overview The chuck/tail stock barrier function prevents damage to the machine by checking whether the tool tip interferes with either the chuck or tail stock. Specify an area into which the tool may not en...

  • Page 376

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 348 - tool. A chuck is assumed to be symmetrical about its Z-axis. CX, CZ : Specify the coordinates of a chuck position, point A, in the workpiece coordinate system. These coordinates are not the same as those in the machine coordinate system. L, L...

  • Page 377

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 349 - NOTE 1 For TZ, whether diameter programming or radius programming is used for the Z-axis determines the programming system. 2 Always specify D, D1, D2, and D3 in diameter programming. When radius programming is used for the Z-axis, specify L,...

  • Page 378

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 350 - - Retraction from the entry-inhibition area If the tool enters the entry-inhibition area and an alarm is issued, switch to manual mode, retract the tool manually, then reset the system to release the alarm. In manual mode, the tool can be mov...

  • Page 379

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 351 - Parameter - Profile of a chuck Profile of a chuck 1330 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 1 Select a chuck figure. 0 : Chuck which holds a workpiece on the inner surface 1 : Chuck which holds a wo...

  • Page 380

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 352 - Dimensions of the part of a claw at which a workpiece is held (L1) 1333 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [...

  • Page 381

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 353 - NOTE Whether to specify this parameter by using a diameter value or radius value depends on whether the corresponding axis is based on diameter specification or radius specification. ZX coordinate of a chuck (CZ) 1336 [Input type] Param...

  • Page 382

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 354 - Diameter of a tail stock (D) 1342 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digi...

  • Page 383

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 355 - Length of a tail stock (L2) 1345 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit...

  • Page 384

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 356 - Z coordinate of a tail stock (TZ) 1348 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of mini...

  • Page 385

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 357 - Warning WARNING 1 When the stored stroke check 2 or 3 option and chuck/tail stock barrier option are used at the same time, the chuck/tail stock barrier option is valid and stored stroke check 2 or 3 is ignored. 2 If an alarm is issued, the to...

  • Page 386

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 358 - 2.4 ALARM SIGNALS When an alarm is triggered in the CNC, the alarm is displayed on the screen, and the alarm signal is set to 1. If the voltage level of the memory backup battery falls to below a specified level while the CNC is turned off, th...

  • Page 387

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 359 - 2.5 START LOCK/INTERLOCK These signals disable machine movement along axes. When any of these signals is activated during movement, tool movement along the affected axis (or axes) is decelerated, then stopped. Signal Start lock signal STLK&l...

  • Page 388

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 360 - All axes Interlock signal *IT<G008#0> [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal is used to inhibit the machine from moving, and is effective regardless of the selected mode. [Operation] When the *IT signal is "0", ...

  • Page 389

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 361 - NOTE The overtravel distance of the motor after turning *IT to "0" is represented by the following formula. Where Qmax=Fm×1/60×(A/1000+Tc/1000+Ts/1000) Qmax : Overtravel quantity (mm or inch) Fm : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min) ...

  • Page 390

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 362 - [Operation] When an interlock signal for an axis direction is set to 1, the CNC applies an interlock to the specified axis direction only. During automatic operation, however, movements along all axes are stopped. NOTE With the T series, if...

  • Page 391

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 363 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn007 STLK Gn008 *BSL *CSL *IT Gn130 *IT8 *IT7 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1 Gn132 +MIT8+MIT7+MIT6+MIT5+MIT4+MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1 Gn134 -MIT8-MIT7-MIT6-MIT5-MIT4-MIT3 -MIT2 -MIT1 X004 ...

  • Page 392

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 364 - # 3 DIT The interlock signal for each axis direction is: 0: Valid. 1: Invalid. # 4 DAU When bit 3 (DIT) of parameter No. 3003 is set to 0, the interlock signal for each axis direction is: 0: Valid only in manual operation, and invalid ...

  • Page 393

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 365 - 2.6 MODE SELECTION Overview The mode select signal is a code signal consisting of the three bits MD1, MD2, and MD4. The following five modes can be selected. - Memory edit (EDIT) - Memory operation (MEM) - Manual data input (MDI) - Manual hand...

  • Page 394

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 366 - TEACH IN selection check signal MTCHIN<Fn003#7> Signal for checking manual reference position return selection MREF<Fn004#5> Table 2.6 (a) Mode selection signals and corresponding check signals (A hyphen (-) indicates that the mo...

  • Page 395

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 367 - NOTE 4 When switching to manual data input mode is made during operation in memory operation mode, the CNC enters the automatic operation stop state after executing the command in the current block. Signal STL is then set to 0. In this case,...

  • Page 396

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 368 - NOTE 5 When the HANDLE/INC mode is selected while the CNC is operating in the MEM or MDI mode, the automatic or MDI operation stops, the STL signal turns to "0", the SPL signal simultaneously turns to "1", and the CNC enters...

  • Page 397

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 369 - NOTE 6 When the JOG mode is selected during RMT, MEM or MDI mode operation, operation stops, the STL signal turns to "0", the SPL signal simultaneously turns to "1", and the CNC enters the JOG mode. Under these conditions,...

  • Page 398

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 370 - JogMEM/MDI/HADLE/ INCmode100msor moreJog feedenableJog feeddisableFeed axis directionselect signalMode signal time chart Fig. 2.6 (e) NOTE 7 The mode switching operation is summarized in the time chart below (Fig. 2.6 (f)). MDI operationp...

  • Page 399

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 371 - NOTE 8 Invalid mode selection signals When mode selection signals MD4, MD2, and MD1 are set to 0, 1, and 0, respectively, the mode before the signals are changed is selected. When MD4, MD2, and MD1 have been set to 0, 1, and 0, respectively, ...

  • Page 400

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 372 - 2.7 STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL The table below lists the status output signals. They indicate the state of the CNC. See the sections listed in the table for details of each signal. Signal name Symbol Reference section Alarm signal AL Alarm signals ...

  • Page 401

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 373 - Cutting feed signal CUT<Fn002#6> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Signals that cutting feed is being performed by automatic operation. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case: - When cutting feed is ...

  • Page 402

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 374 - 2.8 VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL Overview The German VDE safety standard requires that the motor be deactivated when the safety guard is opened. By using the VRDY OFF Alarm Ignore signal, however, the CNC can be restarted without resetting, ev...

  • Page 403

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 375 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1804 SAK [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 6 SAK When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal DVAL is 1, or when the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signals IGNVRYn are 1: 0: Servo ready sign...

  • Page 404

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 376 - 2.9 UNEXPECTED DISTURBANCE TORQUE DETECTION FUNCTION Machine collision, defective, and damaged cutters cause a large load torque on the servo and spindle motors, compared with normal rapid traverse or cutting feed. This function detects the di...

  • Page 405

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 377 - disturbance torque detection ignore signals IUDD1 to IUDD8 <G0125>. (This function is effective only for servo motors.) Procedure for parameter setting The following flowcharts explain how to specify parameters for the unexpected disturb...

  • Page 406

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 378 - (2) Spindle Unexpected disturbance torquedetection function is available.Specify parameter Nos. 4247, 4248, 4249, and 4250, and reset parameter No. 4341 to0.Unexpected disturbance torquedetection alarm function to be used?Only the estimateddist...

  • Page 407

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 379 - <1> When an unexpected disturbance torque is detected, servo motors are stopped immediately. Axes with the same group number set in parameter No. 1881 and axes with 0 set in the parameter are all stopped immediately then placed in the ...

  • Page 408

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 380 - NOTE 4 When an unexpected disturbance torque is detected for a spindle (serial spindle), ABTSP1 or ABTSP2 (F0090#1 or #2) is output immediately. The setting of parameter No. 1880 is ignored. 5 When an unexpected disturbance torque is detected ...

  • Page 409

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 381 - Fourth-spindle unexpected disturbance torque detection signal ABTSP4 <F091#4> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs the PMC that an unexpected disturbance torque was detected on the fourth spindle axis. [Output condition] T...

  • Page 410

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 382 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G0125 IUDD8IUDD7IUDD6IUDD5IUDD4IUDD3 IUDD2 IUDD1 Parameters - Common to servo axis and spindle #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1804 ANA [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 5 ANA When an une...

  • Page 411

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 383 - This parameter sets the time from the detection of an unexpected disturbance torque until a servo alarm is issued. When 0 is set, however, the specification of 200 msec is assumed. 1881 Group number when an unexpected disturbance torque is de...

  • Page 412

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 384 - # 0 ABNT Unexpected disturbance torque detection function (for each axis) is 0: Disabled 1: Enabled When using the unexpected disturbance torque detection alarm function and estimated disturbance torque output function, enable the unexpecte...

  • Page 413

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 385 - 2104 Threshold for unexpected disturbance torque detection alarm [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Torque command unit [Valid data range] 0 to 7282 (The maximum motor torque is 7282, regardless of the motor...

  • Page 414

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 386 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2215 ABDSW [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 5 ABDSW The Unexpected disturbance torque detection function for a specified axis: 0: Cannot be disabled. 1: Can be disabled. - Parameters ...

  • Page 415

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 387 - 4250 Observer gain 2 for spindle load torque monitor [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word spindle [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Standard setting is 500. 4341 Threshold for unexpected disturbance torque detection alarm [Input t...

  • Page 416

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 388 - 2.10 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION Overview For AI contour control function, parameters which place importance on feedrate or precision are set and a precision level is specified according to the machining condition during machining. ...

  • Page 417

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 389 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 13601 MPR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 0 MPR The machining parameter adjustment screen is...

  • Page 418

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 390 - 13614 Allowable acceleration rate change amount for each axis in speed control based on acceleration rate change under control on the rate of change of acceleration (precision level 1) 13615 Allowable acceleration rate change amount for each...

  • Page 419

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 391 - NOTE 1 For an axis with 0 set in this parameter, parameter No. 13614 and No. 13615 (allowable acceleration rate change amount in speed control based on acceleration rate change under control on the rate of change of acceleration) are valid. 2 F...

  • Page 420

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 392 - 13620 Allowable acceleration rate when AI contour control is used (precision level 1) 13621 Allowable acceleration rate when AI contour control is used (precision level 10) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data...

  • Page 421

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 393 - 13626 Maximum cutting speed when AI contour control is used (precision level 1) 13627 Maximum cutting speed when AI contour control is used (precision level 10) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch...

  • Page 422

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 394 - 13630 Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 1) of the parameter corresponding to arbitrary item 1 when AI contour control is used 13631 Value with emphasis on speed (precision level 1) of the parameter corresponding to arbitrary item...

  • Page 423

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 395 - 2.11 MALFUNCTION PREVENT FUNCTIONS Overview These functions monitor the CNC internal status and check that related data is within the allowable range. If an invalid state due to a deteriorated hardware component or noise is detected, these fu...

  • Page 424

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 396 - Parameter 12255 Maximum servo motor speed [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid dat...

  • Page 425

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 397 - Number Message Description DS0010 ILLEGAL REFERENCE AREA The malfunction prevention function detected an illegal reference area. DS0011 ILLEGAL REFERENCE AREA The malfunction prevention function detected an illegal reference area. DS0012 ILLEGA...

  • Page 426

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 398 - 2.12 OPERATOR ERROR PREVENT FUNCTIONS Overview If an invalid value is set for tool offset or the machine is operated improperly, a workpiece may be cut incorrectly or a tool may be damaged. If data is lost due to an operator error, time is re...

  • Page 427

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 399 - - Checking of the execution data range - Checking of the maximum incremental amount For details on the functions other than the start check signal, refer to the User's Manual. Start check signal If cycle start is performed when the start chec...

  • Page 428

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 400 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3191 SSF WSI [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 2 WSI On the workpiece zero point offset screen, the soft key [INPUT] is: 0: Displayed. 1: Not displayed. # 3 SSF On the setting scre...

  • Page 429

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 401 - 10040 Lower limit 2 of tool offsets No.01 to to 10059 Lower limit 1 of tool offsets No.20 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment sys...

  • Page 430

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 402 - 10100 Upper limit 3 of tool offsets No.01 to to 10119 Upper limit 3 of tool offsets No.20 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment sys...

  • Page 431

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 403 - 10140 Upper limit 4 of tool offsets No.01 to to 10159 Upper limit 4 of tool offsets No.20 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment sys...

  • Page 432

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 404 - 10200 Lower limit 6 of tool offsets No.01 to to 10219 Lower limit 6 of tool offsets No.20 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment sys...

  • Page 433

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 405 - 10260 Upper limit 1 of a tool offset number range No.01 to to 10279 Upper limit 1 of a tool offset number range No.20 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to maximum number of offset sets Each of these ...

  • Page 434

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 406 - 10288 Lower limit 8 of tool offsets No.01 to to 10291 Lower limit 8 of tool offsets No.04 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment sys...

  • Page 435

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 407 - 10300 Upper limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.01 to to 10303 Upper limit 2 of a tool offset number range No.04 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to maximum number of offset sets Each of these ...

  • Page 436

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 408 - 10316 Lower limit of a workpiece zero point offset range No.01 to to 10321 Lower limit of a workpiece zero point offset range No.06 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to maximum number of offset sets ...

  • Page 437

    B-63943EN-1/02 2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION - 409 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 10330 ASD EBC MID HSC ADC PDC IIC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit # 0 IIC At the time of incremental input, a confirmation message is: 0: Displayed. 1: Not displayed. # 1 PDC At the time of ...

  • Page 438

    2.PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 410 - 10332 Upper limit of external workpiece zero point offsets [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data rang...

  • Page 439

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 411 - 3 MANUAL OPERATION

  • Page 440

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 412 - 3.1 JOG FEED/INCREMENTAL FEED Overview - Jog feed In jog mode, setting a feed axis and direction selection bit to "1" on the machine operator's panel moves the tool along the selected axis in the selected direction. Manual operation is allowe...

  • Page 441

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 413 - Feed Axis and Direction Selection Signal +J1 to +J8<Gn100>-J1 to -J8<Gn102> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects a desired feed axis and direction in jog feed or incremental feed. The sign (+ or -) in the signal name indicates t...

  • Page 442

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 414 - Jog mode or incremental feedmode+J11st axis moveAxis is fed again after signalshave turned to "0" once.+J1 isineffectiveduring thisperiod. CAUTION 3 If the control unit is reset while the feed axis and direction selection signals are set to &...

  • Page 443

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 415 - Manual feedrate override signal *JV0 to *JV15<Gn010,Gn011> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects a feedrate in jog feed or incremental feed. These signals are in sixteen bit binary code, which corresponds to the override values as foll...

  • Page 444

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 416 - Jog feed mode or incrementalfeed mode+J1RT1st axis moveRapid traverse rateFeedrate selected by manual feedrate override signal WARNING After the power is turned on, the stroke limit function does not work until the reference position return is complet...

  • Page 445

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 417 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1401 RPD [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 RPD Manual rapid traverse during the period from power-on time to the completion of the reference position return. 0: Disabled (Jog feed is perform...

  • Page 446

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 418 - 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range...

  • Page 447

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 419 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7103 HNT [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 2 HNT When compared with the travel distance magnification selected by the manual handle feed travel distance selection signals (incremental feed signa...

  • Page 448

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 420 - 3.2 MANUAL HANDLE FEED Overview In the handle mode, when the manual pulse generator on the machine operator's panel is rotated, the axis moves accordingly. Select the axis along which the tool is to be moved with the handle feed axis selection switches...

  • Page 449

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 421 - Set value other than 0 : The feedrate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, but generated pulses exceeding the rapid traverse rate are not ignored. They are clamped as follows depending on the relationship between parameter No. 7117 and the manual han...

  • Page 450

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 422 - Note NOTE Rotate the manual pulse generator at a rate of five rotations per second or lower. If the manual pulse generator is rotated at a rate higher than five rotations per second, the tool may not stop immediately after the handle is no longer rotat...

  • Page 451

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 423 - Travel distance select signals for manual handle feed Distance traveled MP2 MP1 Manual handle feed 0 0 Least input increment × 1 0 1 Least input increment × 10 1 0 Least input increment × m (*1) 1 1 Least input increment × m (*1) *1 Scale factors m ...

  • Page 452

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 424 - [Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C) (When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +240000.0) Set the rate of manual rapid traverse when the rapid traverse override is 100% for each axis. NOTE 1 If 0 is set, the rate set in...

  • Page 453

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 425 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7103 HNT [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 3 HNT When compared with the travel distance magnification selected by the manual handle feed travel distance selection signals (incremental feed signa...

  • Page 454

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 426 - distance selection signals MP1 and MP2 <G019#4, #5>, the incremental feed amount is determined as described below. (Even if the rotation of the manual pulse generator is stopped, the tool stops after moving by the number of pulses accumulated in th...

  • Page 455

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 427 - 3.3 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPT Overview In the automatic operation mode (manual data input, DNC operation, or memory operation) or memory edit mode, you can turn the handle of the manual pulse generator to overlap the movement by manual handle operation wi...

  • Page 456

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 428 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn041 HS2IDHS2ICHS2IBHS2IAHS1IDHS1IC HS1IB HS1IA Gn042 HS3IDHS3IC HS3IB HS3IA Gn411 HS3IEHS2IEHS1IE Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1606 MNJx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit...

  • Page 457

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 429 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7102 HNGx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 HNGx Axis movement direction for rotation direction of manual pulse generator 0: Same in direction 1: Reverse in direction #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0...

  • Page 458

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 430 - 7117 Allowable number of pulses that can be accumulated during manual handle feed [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] Pulse [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 This parameter sets the number of pulses from the manual p...

  • Page 459

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 431 - 12351 Manual handle feed magnification n in each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 0 to 2000 For each axis, this parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feed movement selection signals MP1 and MP2...

  • Page 460

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 432 - 3.4 MANUAL RIGID TAPPING Overview To execute rigid tapping, set rigid mode, then switch to handle mode and move the tapping axis with a manual handle. Manual rigid tapping is enabled by setting bit 0 (HRG) of parameter No. 5203 to 1. - Basic procedure...

  • Page 461

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 433 - 5 To perform rigid tapping, select a tapping axis with the handle feed axis select switch, and move the tapping axis with the manual handle. - Cancellation of rigid mode To cancel rigid mode, specify G80 as the normal rigid tapping. When the reset key...

  • Page 462

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 434 - - Acceleration or deceleration type As the acceleration or deceleration type and acceleration or deceleration time constant used during manual rigid tapping, those set in the rigid tapping parameter are enabled. These are also enabled during extractio...

  • Page 463

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 435 - - Interpolation type rigid tapping Interpolation type rigid tapping cannot be used in the manual rigid tapping mode. To perform rigid tapping with a manual handle, select conventional rigid tapping using bit 3 (CHR) of parameter No. 5202. Parameter ...

  • Page 464

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 436 - 3.5 MANUAL NUMERIC COMMAND Overview The manual numeric command function allows data programmed through the MDI to be executed in jog mode. Whenever the system is ready for jog feed, a manual numeric command can be executed. The following eight functions...

  • Page 465

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 437 - NOTE 1 When the manual rapid traverse selection switch is off, clamping is performed so that the manual rapid traverse speed (parameter No. 1424) for each axis is not exceeded. 2 Traverse using linear interpolation positioning (this positioning makes th...

  • Page 466

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 438 - - 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position return (G30) The tool returns directly to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position without passing through any intermediate points, regardless of the specified amount of travel. To select a reference position, specif...

  • Page 467

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 439 - - B codes (second auxiliary functions) After address B, specify a numeric value no more than the number of digits specified by parameter No. 3033. NOTE 1 B codes can be named U, V, W, A, or C by setting parameter No. 3460. However, only when G-code sys...

  • Page 468

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 440 - - Functions for which manual numeric commands cannot be specified No manual numeric commands can be specified for an axis for which one of the following functions operate: - Spindle positioning - Polygon turning - Synchronous control, composite control...

  • Page 469

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 441 - # 3 JBF In manual numerical specification, B function specification is: 0: Allowed. 1: Not allowed. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7010 JMVx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 JMVx In manual numerical specification, axi...

  • Page 470

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 442 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3401 DPI [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal point 0: The least input increment is assumed. (Normal decimal point inp...

  • Page 471

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 443 - 3.6 I/O Link β MANUAL HANDLE INTERFACE Overview This function controls manual handle feed for FANUC servo unit β series with I/O Link option ( I/O Link β) by using a manual pulse generator on the host (CNC). Pulses from manual pulse generator are tr...

  • Page 472

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 444 - Signal Mode selection signal MD1 <Yy+0#0>, MD2 <Yy+0#1>, MD4<Yy+0#2> [Classification] CNC(host) → I/O Link β [Function] This signal selects the operation mode of I/O Link β. [Operation] This signal selects the manual handle mode...

  • Page 473

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 445 - Manual handle generators selection signal IOLBH1 <G199.0>, IOLBH2 <G199.1> [Classification] Input signal ( common among paths ) [Function] This signal selects the manual handle generator which operates the I/O Link β. [Operation] This sig...

  • Page 474

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 446 - - Parameter on CNC (FS30) side CAUTION The Change of the parameter LBH (No.7105#5) and the parameter (No.12330 - 12337) is valid after you turn off the power and turn on again. For example : Even if you change the parameter LBH(No.7105#5)from 1(...

  • Page 475

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 447 - # 2 G12 When PMC group 2 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator connected to the I/O Link are: 0: Transferred to that group. 1: Not transferred to that group. # 3 G13 When PMC group 3 (channel 1) i...

  • Page 476

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 448 - # 2 G1A When PMC group 10 (channel 1) is a Power Mate or I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator connected to the I/O Link are: 0: Transferred to that group. 1: Not transferred to that group. # 3 G1B When PMC group 11 (channel 1)...

  • Page 477

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 449 - # 2 G22 When PMC group 2 (channel 2) is a Power Mate or I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator connected to the I/O Link are: 0: Transferred to that group. 1: Not transferred to that group. # 3 G23 When PMC group 3 (channel 2) i...

  • Page 478

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 450 - # 2 G2A When PMC group 10 (channel 2) is a Power Mate or I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator connected to the I/O Link are: 0: Transferred to that group. 1: Not transferred to that group. # 3 G2B When PMC group 11 (channel 2)...

  • Page 479

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 451 - # 2 G32 When PMC group 2 (channel 3) is a Power Mate or I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator connected to the I/O Link are: 0: Transferred to that group. 1: Not transferred to that group. # 3 G33 When PMC group 3 (channel 3) i...

  • Page 480

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 452 - # 2 G3A When PMC group 10 (channel 3) is a Power Mate or I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator connected to the I/O Link are: 0: Transferred to that group. 1: Not transferred to that group. # 3 G3B When PMC group 11 (channel 3)...

  • Page 481

    B-63943EN-1/02 3.MANUAL OPERATION - 453 - # 2 G42 When PMC group 2 (channel 4) is a Power Mate or I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator connected to the I/O Link are: 0: Transferred to that group. 1: Not transferred to that group. # 3 G43 When PMC group 3 (channel 4) i...

  • Page 482

    3.MANUAL OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 454 - # 2 G4A When PMC group 10 (channel 4) is a Power Mate or I/O Link β, the pulses from the manual pulse generator connected to the I/O Link are: 0: Transferred to that group. 1: Not transferred to that group. # 3 G4B When PMC group 11 (channel 4)...

  • Page 483

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 455 - 4 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT

  • Page 484

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 456 - 4.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN Overview The tool is moved in the direction specified by parameter ZMI (No. 1006#5) setting the feed axis and direction select signal to "1" during manual reference position return mode. Move...

  • Page 485

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 457 - Explanation - Basic procedure for manual reference position return <1> Select manual continuous feed (JOG) mode, and the manual reference position return selection signal ZRN to "1". <2> Feed a target axis toward the...

  • Page 486

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 458 - The timing charts for the basic procedures are given below. Rapid traverse rateFL rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JOG mode orTEACHIN JOG modeZRN+J1*DEC1GridZP1ZRF1Feedrate NOTE Grid is not a PMC-CNC signal. - Installation...

  • Page 487

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 459 - (2) LDA: Distance between deceleration limit switch released position and reference position LDA = Move amount of 1/2 revolution of motor Since the above conditions do not include the limit switch operation variations, this point must al...

  • Page 488

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 460 - To shift the reference position beyond the distance to the first grid point, select the method by reference position shift and set bit 4 (SFDx) of parameter No. 1008 to 1. Either of the methods for adjusting the reference position is avail...

  • Page 489

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 461 - Deceleration dogReference positionGrid pointReference position return directionStop pointLDECLSFTLDEC:Distance from the end of the deceleration dog to the first grid point afterthat when the distance by which the reference position is to b...

  • Page 490

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 462 - CAUTION 4 This function cannot be used together with reference position setting without dog. 5 This function cannot be used together with the grid compensation function in feed axis synchronous control. - Manual reference position retur...

  • Page 491

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 463 - - High-speed manual reference position return after the reference position is established After the reference position is established, the tool can be positioned at the feedrate set in the relevant parameter independently of the decelerat...

  • Page 492

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 464 - Manual reference position return selection check signal MREF<Fn004#5> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that manual reference position return has been selected. [Output condition] This signal turns ...

  • Page 493

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 465 - Reference position return deceleration signals *DEC1 to *DEC8<X009> [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals decelerate the feedrate for manual reference position return to a low feedrate (FL). Deceleration signals ...

  • Page 494

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 466 - These signals turn to "0"when: - The tool has moved from the reference position. - An emergency stop is applied. - A servo alarm is raised. Reference position establishment signal ZRF1 to ZRF8<Fn120> [Classification] Out...

  • Page 495

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 467 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0002 SJZ [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit # 7 SJZ On an axis for which bit 3 (HJZx) of parameter No. 1005 is set: 0: If a reference position is not established yet, reference po...

  • Page 496

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 468 - NOTE SJZ is valid for the axis for which HJZx (bit 3 of parameter No. 1005) is set to 1. However, when DLZx (bit 1 of parameter No. 1005) is 1, if manual reference position return is performed after a reference position is established, p...

  • Page 497

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 469 - always performed at a parameter-set feedrate, regardless of the setting of HJZ. # 4 EDPx In cutting feed, an external deceleration signal in the + direction for each axis is: 0: Invalid 1: Valid # 5 EDMx In cutting feed, an exter...

  • Page 498

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 470 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ZMIx DIAx ROSx ROTx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotat...

  • Page 499

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 471 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1007 GRDx ALZx RTLx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 RTLx When manual reference position return is performed on a rotation axis (A type) with the deceleration dog pressed before a ...

  • Page 500

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 472 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1008 SFDx RRLx RABx ROAx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 0 ROAx The roll-over function ...

  • Page 501

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 473 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1201 ZCL ZPR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system when the manual reference position return is performed 0: Not set automatically 1: Set...

  • Page 502

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 474 - 1250 Coordinate system of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is performed [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend...

  • Page 503

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 475 - 1423 Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of t...

  • Page 504

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 476 - 1428 Reference position return feedrate for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied ...

  • Page 505

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 477 - NOTE 1 To this feedrate setting (100%), a rapid traverse override (F0, 25, 50, or 100%) is applicable. 2 For automatic return after completion of reference position return and machine coordinate system establishment, the normal rapid trave...

  • Page 506

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 478 - 1821 Reference counter size for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data r...

  • Page 507

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 479 - 1844 Distance to the first grid point after the deceleration dog is turned off in the case where the reference position shift amount of the reference position shift function is 0 NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned...

  • Page 508

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 480 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3003 DEC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 5 DEC Deceleration signal (*DEC1 to *DEC8) for reference position return 0: Deceleration is applied when the signal is 0. 1: Deceleratio...

  • Page 509

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 481 - NOTE This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is set to 1. Depending on the option configuration of the I/O Link, the actually usable X addresses are: X0 to X127, X200 to X327, X400 to X527, X600 to X727 3014 Bit...

  • Page 510

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 482 - Number Message Description PW0001 X-ADDRESS(*DEC) IS NOT ASSIGNED. The X address of the PMC could not be assigned correctly. This alarm may occur in the following case: - During the setting of parameter No. 3013, the X address could not be...

  • Page 511

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 483 - 4.2 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITHOUT DOG Overview This function moves each axis in the manual continuous feed mode near the reference position. It then sets the reference position in the reference position return mode without the decele...

  • Page 512

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 484 - The following figure shows the positional relation between the reference position and the point to which the tool is positioned by manual continuous feed. Grid- directionPosition afterjog feed+ directionA : Reference position for referenc...

  • Page 513

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 485 - - Setting the reference position without dog when the absolute-position detector loses the reference position When an absolute-position detector is provided [bit 5 (APCx) of parameter No. 1815 is set to 1] and the reference position is lo...

  • Page 514

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 486 - +J1 or -J1GridManual reference position returnmode......P1Ref.P2P3P4Set bit 4 (APZx) of param eterNo. 1815 to 1 at this position. Put the system in the MDI mode at point Ref used as the reference position and set bit 4 (APZx) of parameter ...

  • Page 515

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 487 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ZMIx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 5 ZMIx The direction of manual reference...

  • Page 516

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 488 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1012 IDGx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 IDGx The function for setting the reference position again, without dogs, is: 0: Not inhibited. 1: Inhibited. (The alarm (PS0301) is i...

  • Page 517

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 489 - 1250 Coordinate system of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is performed [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend...

  • Page 518

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 490 - 1821 Reference counter size for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data r...

  • Page 519

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 491 - NOTE For setting the reference position without dogs, only the grid shift function can be used. (The reference position shift function cannot be used.) Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0090 REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE 1. Th...

  • Page 520

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 492 - 4.3 AUTOMATIC REFERENCE POSITION RETURN AND RETURN FROM THE REFERENCE POSITION Explanation - Automatic reference position return (G28) The G28 command positions the tool to the reference position, via the specified intermediate point, th...

  • Page 521

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 493 - When linear interpolation positioning has been selected by setting LRP (bit 1 of parameter No. 1401) to 1, linear interpolation positioning can be used for the tool path from the intermediate point to the reference position in automatic re...

  • Page 522

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 494 - No. 1401) can be used to specify whether nonlinear interpolation positioning or linear interpolation positioning is used for the tool path from the reference position to the intermediate point and the tool path from the intermediate point ...

  • Page 523

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 495 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1007 ALZx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 1 ALZx In automatic reference position return (G28): 0: Reference position return is performed by positioning (rapid traverse). If no r...

  • Page 524

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 496 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1401 LRP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 1 LRP Positioning (G00) 0: Positioning is performed with non-linear type positioning so that the tool moves along each axis independentl...

  • Page 525

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 497 - Reference item Manual name Item name USER’S MANUAL (B-63944EN) Reference position return CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (This manual) Linear interpolation type G28,G30,G53

  • Page 526

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 498 - 4.4 2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN / 3RD, 4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN Overview The G30 command positions the tool to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position, via the specified intermediate point. It then sets the completion signal for 2n...

  • Page 527

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 499 - [Output condition] These signals turn to "1" when: - The second, third, or fourth reference position return (G30) is completed, and the current position is in the in-position area. These signals turn to "0" when: -...

  • Page 528

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 500 - Caution CAUTION 1 If the G30 command is issued in machine lock status, the completion signal for 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position return is not set to 1. 2 If millimeter input is selected for an inch-system machine, the completion sign...

  • Page 529

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 501 - 4.5 FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURN Overview It is possible to return the tool to the floating reference position by commanding the G30.1. The floating reference position is located on the machine and can be a reference position for so...

  • Page 530

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 502 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn116 FRP8FRP7FRP6FRP5FRP4FRP3 FRP2 FRP1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1201 FPC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 3 FPC When a floating reference position i...

  • Page 531

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 503 - 4.6 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITH MECHANICAL STOPPER Overview This function automates the procedure of butting the tool against a mechanical stopper on an axis to set a reference position. The purpose of this function is to eliminate th...

  • Page 532

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 504 - - Cycle operation When no reference position has been set, operations (A) to (E), below, are performed automatically to set a reference position. ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Current positionMechanicalstopper (A) The tool is moved along a specifie...

  • Page 533

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 505 - (D) The tool moves along the specified axis at a specified torque until it butts against the mechanical stopper. - The tool moves in the direction specified with parameter ZMIx (No. 1006#5), at the feedrate specified with parameter No. 718...

  • Page 534

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 506 - Manual reference position returnmodeManual handle feed axis selectsignals HS1A to HS1DAutomatic operation startsignal STCycle operationAutomatic operation signal OPReference position returnend signals ZP1 to ZP8Torque limitAxis feedrateTor...

  • Page 535

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 507 - Each signal is set to 0 when: - The torque limit is not reached for the corresponding axis during cycle operation for reference position setting with mechanical stopper. Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn180 CLRCH8 CLRCH7 CLRCH...

  • Page 536

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 508 - 7183 First butting feedrate in reference position setting with mechanical stopper 7184 Second butting feedrate in reference position setting with mechanical stopper 7185 Withdrawal feedrate (common to the first and second butting opera...

  • Page 537

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 509 - Note NOTE 1 Multiple axes cannot be selected simultaneously. 2 This cycle is not executed if either of the following conditions is satisfied: (A) Automatic operation signal OP <F000#7> is set to 1 (B) The direction of reference posit...

  • Page 538

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 510 - 4.7 DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE Overview The interval of each reference marks of distance coded linear scale are variable. Accordingly, if the interval is determined, the absolute position can be determined. The CNC measures the...

  • Page 539

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 511 - The timing chart for this procedures is given below. JOG ZRN +J1 Reference mark ZRF1 Feedrate FL rate FL rate FL rate Fig.4.7(b) Timing chart for reference position establishment - Procedure for establishing a reference position ...

  • Page 540

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 512 - Explanation - Reference Position Return (1) When the reference position is not established and the axis moved by turning the feed axis direction signal (+J1,-J1,+J2,-J2,...) to "1" in REF mode, the reference position establishme...

  • Page 541

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 513 - - Requirements when this function is used with feed axis synchronization control axes When this function is used with feed axis synchronization control axes, the distance coded linear scale used for the master axis and that used for the s...

  • Page 542

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 514 - Scale end Reference mark (1)(2)(3)(a) (b) (c) Master axis Slave axis Start point End Point (Example of 3 points measurement system) In the above example, the following sequence is executed. a. When the reference mark (1) of the master a...

  • Page 543

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 515 - - Angular axis control There are the following limitations when the angular axis control is used. (a) It is necessary to use the linear scale with the distance coded reference mark for both the perpendicular axis and the angular axis. (b)...

  • Page 544

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 516 - (4) In this procedure, the axis does not stop until two, three or four reference marks are detected. If this procedure is started at the position near the scale end, CNC can not detect three or four reference marks and the axis does not s...

  • Page 545

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 517 - # 2 DC2x When the reference point is established by the distance coded linear scale, 0 : The axis moving depends on the setting of the parameterDC4. 1 : The axis moves until two reference marks are detected. NOTE 1 When this parameter...

  • Page 546

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 518 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1817 SCPx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 4 SCPx For two-point measurement (when bit 2 ...

  • Page 547

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 519 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1818 RF2x RFSx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 RFSx If G28 is specified for an axis for which a reference position is not established (ZRF = 0) when a distance coded linear scal...

  • Page 548

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 520 - 1821 Reference counter size for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data r...

  • Page 549

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 521 - Use this parameter when the distance from the scale zero point to the reference position exceeds the setting range specified in parameter No. 1883. Parameter No. 1883 and No. 1884 are used to set the distance from the scale zero point to t...

  • Page 550

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 522 - Parameters No.1821 (interval of mark 1) = 20000 No.1882 (interval of mark 2) = 20020 No.1883 (reference position) = position of point A + 5.000 = distance between A and B/(mark 2 − mark 1) × mark 1 + 5000 = 9960/(20020-20000) × 20...

  • Page 551

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 523 - Number Message Description DS0027 MISMATCH OF SYNCHRONOUS AXIS(D.C.S) Master/slave axes of feed axis synchronization control, one of them is the linear scale with distance-coded reference marks, and the other of them is not the linear scal...

  • Page 552

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 524 - 4.8 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE MARKS (SERIAL) Overview By using High-resolution serial output circuit for the linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial), the CNC measures the interval of referenced mark by a...

  • Page 553

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 525 - - Connection It is available under linear motor system and full closed system. CNC Servo Amp Separate Detector Interface Unit Table High Resolution Serial Output Circuit C Full Closed System Linear scale with distance-coded reference ma...

  • Page 554

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 526 - - Procedure for reference position establishment through manual operation (1) Select the JOG mode, and set the manual reference position return selection signal ZRN to "1". (2) Set a direction selection signal(+J1,-J1,+J2,-J2,...

  • Page 555

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 527 - - Establishing a reference position and moving to the reference position By following operation, establishing a reference position and moving to the reference position is performed. Moving through manual operation in REF mode Moving thr...

  • Page 556

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 528 - - Angular axis control In case of using the angular axis control, please confirm the following items. - It is necessary to use the linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial) for both the perpendicular axis and the angular...

  • Page 557

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 529 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1818 SDCx RF2x RFSx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 RFSx If G28 is specified for an axis for which a reference position is not established (ZRF = 0) when a distance coded linear s...

  • Page 558

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 530 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1819 DATx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 2 DATx When a manual reference point return is executed, an automatic setting of parameter No.1883,1884 is 0 : Not executed. 1 : Execut...

  • Page 559

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 531 - Distance from the zero point to the reference position of a linear scale = No. 1884 × 1,000,000,000 + No. 1883 If the reference position is placed in the + direction when viewed from the scale zero point, set a positive value. If the re...

  • Page 560

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 532 - [Setting of linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial)] Follow the procedure below to measure the distance. <1> Set parameters OPT (No.1815#1), DCL(No.1815#2), and SDC(No.1818#3) to enable this function. Set an appr...

  • Page 561

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 533 - NOTE 1 On reference point establishment of manual feed axis for simple synchronous control, if you set this parameter on either master or slave axis, it become effective on both master and slave axes automatically. 2 On angular axis contro...

  • Page 562

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 534 - CAUTION 1 When the Linear scale with distance-coded reference marks (serial) is used, please set parameter SDCx No.1818#3 to 1. 2 And distance coded rotary encoder (serial type) is not available. 3 On the Linear scale with distance-coded ...

  • Page 563

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 535 - 4.9 EXTENDED FUNCTION OF THE DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE Overview The distance coded linear scale interface has reference marks at intervals that change at a constant rate. By determining the reference mark interval, the corres...

  • Page 564

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 536 - 4.9.1 Reference Position Established by the G00 Command Explanation - Activation conditions When the following conditions are satisfied, reference position establishment operation is performed automatically: <1> A G00 command is ...

  • Page 565

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 537 - A time chart for the above procedure is shown below. G00 command Reference mark ZRFn Feedrate FL feedrate Time Rapid traverse rate Fig. 4.9.1 (a) Time chart for reference position establishment (G00) The specifications for the steps o...

  • Page 566

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 538 - FL feedrate Rapid traverse rate X-axis Y-axis Time Z-axis ← Operation 1 → ← Operation 2 → Fig. 4.9.1 (b) When the reference position is established for all axes (3) When some axes require the reference position establishment op...

  • Page 567

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 539 - - Absolute command and incremental command After the reference position has been established, positioning to a specified end point is performed. This operation is explained below. (1) When an absolute command is specified Movement to ...

  • Page 568

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 540 - Difference between the machine coordinate system at power-on and the machine coordinate system after the reference position is established (α, β) Machine coordinate system before the reference position is established (inaccurate coordin...

  • Page 569

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 541 - Since the reference position is not established, reference position establishment operation is performed again when the next G00 command is specified. Even when the CNC detects an illegal reference mark interval, it does not issue the alar...

  • Page 570

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 542 - 4.9.2 Reference Position Establishment by Jog Feed Explanation - Activation condition If the following conditions are satisfied, reference position establishment operation is performed automatically: <1> For an axis for which no ...

  • Page 571

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 543 - Reference markZRFn Feedrate FL feedrate TimeJOG feedrateJOG +Jn(-Jn) Fig. 4.9.2 (a) Time chart for reference position establishment (jog feed) - Interruption by a feed axis direction selection signal If feed axis direction selection s...

  • Page 572

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 544 - Caution - PMC axis control The reference position establishment operation is not performed in rapid traverse (axis control command 00h) or continuous feed (axis control command 06h) under PMC axis control. - Rapid traverse operation oth...

  • Page 573

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 545 - # 1 OPTx Position detector 0 : A separate pulse coder is not used. 1 : A separate pulse coder is used. NOTE Set “1” when a distance coded linear scale is used. # 2 DCLx As a separate position detector, the linear scale with ...

  • Page 574

    4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 546 - 4.10 REFERENCE POSITION SIGNAL OUTPUT FUNCTION Overview If, after the establishment of the reference position on each axis, the coordinates in the machine coordinate system match the reference position, this function outputs a signal as t...

  • Page 575

    B-63943EN-1/02 4.REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT - 547 - 3 The machine coordinates on the third axis match the second reference position. : : : : [Output condition] This signal becomes "1" only when, after the establishment of the reference position on each axis, the coordinate...

  • Page 576

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 548 - 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

  • Page 577

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 549 - 5.1 CYCLE START/FEED HOLD Overview - Start of automatic operation (cycle start) When automatic operation start signal ST is set to 1 then 0 while the CNC is in memory (MEM) mode, DNC operation mode (RMT), or manual data input (MDI) mode, the CNC ent...

  • Page 578

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 550 - - Halt of automatic operation (feed hold) When the feed hold signal *SP is set to 0 during automatic operation, the CNC enters the feed hold state and stops operation. At the same time, cycle start lamp signal STL is set to 0 and feed hold lamp sig...

  • Page 579

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 551 - Signal Cycle start signal ST<Gn007#2> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Starts automatic operation. [Operation] When signal ST is set to 1 then 0 in memory (MEM) mode, DNC operation mode (RMT) or manual data input (MDI) mode, the CN...

  • Page 580

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 552 - Feed hold lamp signal SPL<Fn000#4> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC that feed hold state is entered. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 or 0, according to the state of the CNC, as listed in Table 5.1 (a). Si...

  • Page 581

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 553 - Alarm and message - Self-diagnosis information During automatic operation, the machine may sometimes show no movement while no alarm is detected. In that case, the CNC may be performing processing or waiting for the occurrence of an event. The stat...

  • Page 582

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 554 - 5.2 RESET AND REWIND Overview The CNC is reset and enters the reset state in the following cases: 1. When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0 2. When the external reset signal (ERS) is set to 1 3. When the reset and rewind signal (RRW) is se...

  • Page 583

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 555 - The following parameters are also used to select how to handle processing for CNC data when the CNC is reset. - Bit 7 (MCL) of parameter No. 3203 Whether programs created in MDI mode are erased or stored - Bit 6 (CCV) of parameter No. 6001 Whether cus...

  • Page 584

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 556 - When the resetting signal output time, set with parameter No. 3017, has elapsed after the above conditions have been released and the CNC is reset Rewinding signal RWD<Fn000#0> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC that t...

  • Page 585

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 557 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3203 MCL [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 7 MCL Whether a program prepared in the MDI mode is cleared by reset 0: Not deleted 1: Deleted #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3402 CLR [Input...

  • Page 586

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 558 - 5.3 TESTING A PROGRAM Overview Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed. It checks whether the created program can operate the machine as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine or viewing the po...

  • Page 587

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 559 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn044 MLK Gn108 MLK8MLK7MLK6MLK5MLK4MLK3 MLK2 MLK1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn004 M MLK Note NOTE 1 Automatic operation in the machine lock state (M, S, T, and B commands) Machine lock ap...

  • Page 588

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 560 - 5.3.2 Dry Run Overview Dry run is valid only for automatic operation. The tool is moved at a constant feedrate(*1) regardless of the feedrate specified in the program. This function is used, for example, to check the movement of the tool without a wo...

  • Page 589

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 561 - Dry run check signal MDRN<Fn002#7> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC of the state of the dry run signal. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following case: - When dry run signal DRN is set to 1 This s...

  • Page 590

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 562 - 1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] Re...

  • Page 591

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 563 - 5.3.3 Single Block Overview Single block operation is valid only for automatic operation. When the single block signal (SBK) is set to 1 during automatic operation, the CNC enters the automatic operation stop state after executing the current block....

  • Page 592

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 564 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6000 SBV SBM [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 5 SBM Custom macro statement 0: Not stop the single block 1: Stops the single block If you want to disable the single blocks in custom...

  • Page 593

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 565 - 5.4 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF Overview Whether the distance by which the tool is moved by manual operation (such as jog feed or manual handle feed) is reflected in the absolute coordinate system can be selected. - When manual absolute turns on When ma...

  • Page 594

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 566 - Signal Manual absolute signal *ABSM<Gn006#2> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Turns the manual absolute function on or off. [Operation] When this signal is set to 0, turns on the manual absolute function. When this signal is set to...

  • Page 595

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 567 - 5.5 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/ADDITION OF OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP Overview When a slash followed by a number (/n, where n = 1 to 9) is specified at the head of a block, and optional block skip signals BDT1 to BDT9 are set to 1 during automatic operation, the i...

  • Page 596

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 568 - 2. When BDTn is set to 1 while the CNC is reading a block containing /n, the block is not ignored. BDTn "1""0"Reading by CNC → . . . ; /n N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 . . . .Not ignored 3. When BDTn, currently set to 1, is set to 0 w...

  • Page 597

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 569 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn044 BDT1 Gn045 BDT9BDT8BDT7BDT6BDT5BDT4 BDT3 BDT2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn004 MBDT1 Fn005 MBDT9MBDT8MBDT7MBDT6MBDT5MBDT4 MBDT3 MBDT2 Note NOTE 1 This function is ignored when programs ...

  • Page 598

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 570 - 5.6 PROGRAM RESTART Overview When the tool is broken during automatic operation, or when a machining operation interrupted by a holiday is to be restarted after the holiday, you can restart machining from a desired block by specifying the sequence nu...

  • Page 599

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 571 - Limitation - P type Restart In the following conditions, P type restart cannot be performed: • Automatic operation has not been performed since power-on. • Automatic operation has not been performed since emergency stop was released. • Automati...

  • Page 600

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 572 - - Reference position return Unless an absolute position detector (absolute pulse coder) is provided, be sure to perform reference position return after power-up, then perform restart operation. - Program restart signal When program restart signal S...

  • Page 601

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 573 - Signal Program restart signal SRN<Gn006#0> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects program restart. [Operation] When the program restart signal is set to "1" to search for the sequence number of the block to be restarted,...

  • Page 602

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 574 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7300 MOUMOA [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 6 MOA In program restart operation, before movement to a machining restart point: 0: The last M, S, T, and B codes are output. 1: All M ...

  • Page 603

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 575 - Number Message Description PS0095 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (EXT OFS CHG) P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the automatic operation was interrupted, the external workpiece offset amount changed.) Perform the correct operation a...

  • Page 604

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 576 - Caution CAUTION 1 Keep the following in mind when restarting a program including macro variables. - Common variable When the program is restarted, the previous values are inherited as common variables without being preset automatically. Before rest...

  • Page 605

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 577 - 5.7 TOOL RETRACT AND RECOVER Overview The tool can be retracted from a workpiece to replace the tool, if damaged during machining, or to check the status of machining. Then, the tool can be returned to restart machining efficiently. : Position at whi...

  • Page 606

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 578 - - Basic procedure for tool retract and recover (1) When tool retraction signal TRESC, which is an input signal from the PMC, is set to "1" during automatic operation, in the automatic operation stopped state, or in the automatic operation h...

  • Page 607

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 579 - (2) Change the mode to the manual mode, and move the tool by a manual operation (jog feed, incremental feed, manual handle feed, or manual numerical command) for a purpose such as the purpose of changing the tool. This operation is called manual retr...

  • Page 608

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 580 - (4) When a cycle start is directed at the retract position, the tool first moves to a position at which tool retraction signal TRESC was set to "1". This operation is called re-positioning. As re-positioning starts, tool retraction/return ...

  • Page 609

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 581 - Tool retraction mode signal TRACT<Fn092#3> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal reports that tool retraction mode is set. When the control unit is reset while the signal is 1, the signal is turned to 0, and tool retraction m...

  • Page 610

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 582 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7040 TRC RPS TRS TRI [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 TRI The G10.6 command for tool retract and return is: 0: Assumed to be an absolute or incremental command according to the abso...

  • Page 611

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 583 - Warning WARNING The retraction axes and retraction distances specified with G10.6 need to be changed in appropriate blocks depending on the figure to be machined. An incorrectly specified retraction distance may damage a workpiece, the machine, or t...

  • Page 612

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 584 - 5.8 EXACT STOP/EXACT STOP MODE/TAPPING MODE/CUTTING MODE Overview NC commands can be used to control a feedrate in continuous cutting feed blocks as described below. - Exact stop (G09) The tool is decelerated in a block specifying G09, and an in-po...

  • Page 613

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 585 - Reference item Manual name Item name USER’S MANUAL (B-63944EN) Exact stop (G09,G61) Cutting mode (G64) Tapping mode (G63)

  • Page 614

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 586 - 5.9 RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING Overview When rigid tapping is stopped, either as a result of an emergency stop or a reset, the tap may cut into the workpiece. The tap can subsequently be drawn out by using a PMC signal. This function automatically ...

  • Page 615

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 587 - (4) Resume Once rigid tapping retraction has been stopped, it can be resumed by performing the same operation as that used for starting rigid tapping retraction. If rigid tapping retraction has been completed, however, the start operation does not re...

  • Page 616

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 588 - - Time chart for stopping tapping retraction Tapping retraction start signal RTNTSpindle enable signal ENBRigid tapping signal RGTAPSpindle excitationRetract movementWhen tapping retraction is stopped, spindle enable signal is set to 0, in the same w...

  • Page 617

    B-63943EN-1/02 5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION - 589 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn062 RTNT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn066 RTPT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5200 DOV [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 DOV Override during extraction...

  • Page 618

    5.AUTOMATIC OPERATION B-63943EN-1/02 - 590 - Caution CAUTION 1 If rigid tapping is stopped as a result of an emergency stop, the position on the tapping axis (Z-axis) is maintained but the spindle position is lost. In such a case, therefore, the positional relationship between the spindle and t...

  • Page 619

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 591 - 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION

  • Page 620

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 592 - 6.1 POSITIONING Overview The G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece system specified with an absolute or an incremental command at a rapid traverse rate. In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point is programmed. ...

  • Page 621

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 593 - 1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range]...

  • Page 622

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 594 - 6.2 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING General For accurate positioning without play of the machine (backlash), final positioning from one direction is available. Start position End position Temporary stop Start position Overrun Fig.6.2 (a) Direction p...

  • Page 623

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 595 - - Overview of operation • In the case of positioning of non-linear interpolation type (bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 = 0) As shown below, single direction positioning is performed independently along each axis. Programmed end pointProgramm...

  • Page 624

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 596 - # 1 PDI In the G60 mode, at a temporary stop position, an in-position check is: 0: Not made. (Only the end of acceleration/deceleration is awaited.) 1: Made. 5440 Overrun distance and direction of unidirectional positioning (G60) [Input ty...

  • Page 625

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 597 - • When specifying single direction positioning on a machine that uses angular axis control, first position the angular axis then specify the positioning of the Cartesian axis. If the reverse specification order is used, or the angular axis and C...

  • Page 626

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 598 - 6.3 LINEAR INTERPOLATION Overview Tools can move along a line. A tools move along a line to the specified position at the feedrate specified in F. The feedrate specified in F is effective until a new value is specified. It need not be specified fo...

  • Page 627

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 599 - Parameter 1411 Cutting feedrate NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (input unit) [Minimu...

  • Page 628

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 600 - Reference item Manual name Item name USER’S MANUAL (B-63944EN) Liniear interpolation (G01)

  • Page 629

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 601 - 6.4 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION Overview The command below can move a tool along a circular arc in the defined plane. "Clockwise"(G02) and "counterclockwise"(G03) on the XpYp plane (ZpXp plane or YpZp plane) are defined when the XpY...

  • Page 630

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 602 - In this case, one arc is less than 180°, and the other is more than 180° are considered. Specify an arc more than 180° with a negative radius value commanded. If Xp, Yp, and Zp are all omitted, if the end point is located at the same position as...

  • Page 631

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 603 - Parameter 1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to 7 To determine a plane for circular interpolation, cutter compensation, and so forth (G17: Xp-Yp plan...

  • Page 632

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 604 - 3410 Tolerance of arc radius [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 When a circular ...

  • Page 633

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 605 - Note NOTE 1 For T series, the U, V and W axes (parallel with the basic axis) can be used with G-code system B and C. 2 If I, J, K, and R addresses are specified simultaneously, the arc specified by address R takes precedence and the other are ignor...

  • Page 634

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 606 - 6.5 THREADING 6.5.1 Threading Overview Tool movement can be synchronized with spindle rotation when cutting threads. The spindle speed is continuously read through the position coder attached to the spindle. Then, it is converted to a cutting fee...

  • Page 635

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 607 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1401 TDR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 5 TDR Dry run during threading or tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84, rigid tapping) 0: Enabled 1: Disabled #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1...

  • Page 636

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 608 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G36 3405 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 3 G36 For a G code used with the automatic tool compensation function: 0: G36/G37 is used. 1: G37.1/G37.2 is used. NOTE If it is neces...

  • Page 637

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 609 - 1626 Acceleration/deceleration time constant in threading cycles for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 Set a time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpo...

  • Page 638

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 610 - NOTE Specify a radius value at all times. Finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive turning canned cycle G76 5141 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend o...

  • Page 639

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 611 - Warning WARNING During threading, stopping feed without stopping the spindle is dangerous because the cutting depth will abruptly increase. Feed hold is, therefore, disabled during threading. If attempted during threading, feed stops in the same ...

  • Page 640

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 612 - 6.5.2 Threading Cycle Retract (Canned Cycle) T Overview When the "threading cycle retract" option function is provided, if feed hold is performed during threading (operation 2), the tool immediately retracts while performing chamfering ...

  • Page 641

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 613 - For the feedrate for retraction after chamfering, the rapid traverse override can be disabled by setting 1 to bit 4 (ROC) of parameter No.1403. NOTE During retraction, the tool does not stop at cutting feedrate override of 0%, regardless of the...

  • Page 642

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 614 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 CFR 1611 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 CFR For retraction after threading in the threading cycles G92 and G76: 0: The type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation f...

  • Page 643

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 615 - Cutting angle in thread cutting cycles G92 and G76 5131 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] Degree [Valid data range] 1 to 89 This parameter sets a thread cutting angle in a thread cutting cycle (G92/G76). When...

  • Page 644

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 616 - 6.5.3 Threading Cycle Retract (Multiple Repetitive Grinding Canned Cycle) T Overview When the "threading cycle retract" option function is provided, if feed hold is performed during threading in multiple repetitive threading cycle (G76)...

  • Page 645

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 617 - NOTE During retraction, the tool does not stop at cutting feedrate override of 0%, regardless of the setting of bit 4 (RF0) of parameter No.1401. CAUTION Feed hold cannot be performed during retracting. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ...

  • Page 646

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 618 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 CFR 1611 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 CFR For retraction after threading in the threading cycles G92 and G76: 0: The type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation f...

  • Page 647

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 619 - Cutting value (chamfering value) in thread cutting cycles G92 and G76 5130 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] 0.1 [Valid data range] 0 to 127 This parameter sets a cutting value (chamfering value) in the threa...

  • Page 648

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 620 - 6.5.4 Variable Lead Threading Overview Specifying an increment or a decrement value for a lead per screw revolution enables variable-lead thread cutting to be performed. NOTE The "thread cutting cycle retract" is not effective for G3...

  • Page 649

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 621 - 6.5.5 Continuous Threading Overview Threading blocks can be programmed successively to eliminate a discontinuity due to a discontinuous movement in machining by adjacent blocks. Since the system is controlled in such a manner that the synchronism...

  • Page 650

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 622 - 6.5.6 Circular threading Overview Using the G35 and G36 commands, a circular thread, having the specified lead in the direction of the major axis, can be machined. LL: Lead Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G36 3405 [Input ...

  • Page 651

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 623 - Alarm and message Number Message Description PS5058 G35/G36 FORMAT ERROR A command for switching the major axis has been specified for circular threading. Alternatively, a command for setting the length of the major axis to 0 has been specified for...

  • Page 652

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 624 - 6.6 HELICAL INTERPOLATION Overview Helical interpolation which moved helically is enabled by specifying up to two other axes which move synchronously with the circular interpolation by circular commands. A tangential velocity of an arc in a specif...

  • Page 653

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 625 - ZYXThe feedrate along the tool path is specified.Tool path Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 HTG 1403 HTG [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 5 HTG The feedrate for helical interpolation/helical involute i...

  • Page 654

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 626 - 6.7 INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION Overview Involute curve machining can be performed by using involute interpolation. Cutter compensation can be performed. Involute interpolation eliminates the need for approximating an involute curve with minute segment...

  • Page 655

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 627 - - Involute curve An involute curve on the X-Y plane is defined as follows ; X (θ) = R [cos θ + (θ - θO) sin θ] + XO Y (θ) = R [sin θ - (θ - θO) cos θ] + YO where, XO, YO : Coordinates of the center of a base circle R : Base circle radius...

  • Page 656

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 628 - If R is not specified, or R ≤ 0, alarm PS0241 or PS0242 is issued. - Choosing from two types of involute curves When only a start point and I, J, and K data are given, two types of involute curves can be created. One type of involute curve exte...

  • Page 657

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 629 - - Specifiable G codes The following G codes can be specified in involute interpolation mode: G04: Dwell G10: Programmable data input G17: X-Y plane selection G18: Z-X plane selection G19: Y-Z plane selection G65: Macro call G66: Macro modal...

  • Page 658

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 630 - - Automatic speed control for involute interpolation This function automatically overrides the programmed feedrate in two different ways during involute interpolation. With this function, a favorable cutting surface can be formed with high precis...

  • Page 659

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 631 - Clamping the override The lower limit of override is specified in parameter No. 5620 so that the override for inward offset by cutter compensation or the override in the vicinity of the basic circle will not bring the speed of the tool center to...

  • Page 660

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 632 - 6.7.1 Involute Interpolation on Linear Axis and Rotary Axis Overview By performing involute interpolation in the polar coordinate interpolation mode, involute cutting can be carried out. Cutting is performed along an involute curve drawn in the pl...

  • Page 661

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 633 - 1732 Minimum allowable feedrate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular interpolation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data]...

  • Page 662

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 634 - NOTE During involute interpolation, the minimum allowable feedrate of "clamping of acceleration near a basic circle" in involute interpolation automatic feedrate control is used. 5610 Limit of initial permissible error during involute ...

  • Page 663

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 635 - Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0241 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G02.2/G03.2 The end point of an involute curve on the currently selected plane, or the center coordinate instruction I, J or K of the corresponding basic circle, or basic circle ...

  • Page 664

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 636 - 6.8 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION Overview Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour control in converting a command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate system to the movement of a linear axis (movement of a tool) and t...

  • Page 665

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 637 - Parameter 1430 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Va...

  • Page 666

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 638 - 5463 Automatic override tolerance ratio for polar coordinate interpolation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100 Typical setting: 90% (treated as 90% when set to 0) Set the tolerance r...

  • Page 667

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 639 - Reference item Manual name Item name USER’S MANUAL (B-63944EN) Polar coordinate interpolation

  • Page 668

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 640 - 6.9 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION 6.9.1 Cylindrical Interpolation Overview The cylindrical interpolation function performs linear interpolation or arc interpolation with another axis by converting the travel distance of a rotation axis specified in d...

  • Page 669

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 641 - 6.9.2 Cylindrical Interpolation Cutting Point Compensation Overview The conventional cylindrical interpolation function controls the movement of the tool center so that the tool axis moves along a specified path on the cylindrical surface to alway...

  • Page 670

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 642 - 1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to 7 To determine a plane for circular interpolation, cutter compensation, and so forth (G17: Xp-Yp plane, G18: Zp...

  • Page 671

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 643 - - Parameters required for cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19530 CYS CYA [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 5 CYA Specifies whether to perform cylindrical interpolation ...

  • Page 672

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 644 - 19534 Limit for changing cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation in a single block [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of t...

  • Page 673

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 645 - 19535 Limit of travel distance moved with the cylindrical interpolation cutting point compensation in the previous block unchanged. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data]...

  • Page 674

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 646 - 6.10 POLYGON TURNING T Polygonal turning means machining a workpiece to a polygonal figure by rotating the workpiece and tool at a certain ratio. WorkpieceWorkpieceTool Fig. 6.10 (a) Polygonal turning By changing conditions which are rotation ...

  • Page 675

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 647 - 6.10.1 Polygon Turning Overview A CNC controlled axis (servo axis) is assigned to the tool rotary axis. This rotary axis of tool is called Y-axis in the following description. As the workpiece axis (spindle), either a serial spindle or analog s...

  • Page 676

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 648 - NOTE • For the Y-axis engaged in polygonal turning, jog feed and handle feed are disabled. • For the Y-axis not engaged in polygonal turning, a move command can be specified as in the case of other controlled axes. • The Y-axis engaged in po...

  • Page 677

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 649 - YXA(0,0)PtoPoBAngular speedαA ; Workpiece radiusB ; Tool radiusAngularspeed βWorkpieceToolα ; Workpiece angular speedβ ; Tool angular speedPo (A, 0)Pto (A-B, 0) (0, 0)αtβtAPStart pointBPt (Xt, Yt) In this case, the tool nose position Pt (X...

  • Page 678

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 650 - If three tools are set at every 120°, the machining figure will be a hexagon as shown below. WARNING For the maximum rotation speed of the tool, see the instruction manual supplied with the machine. Do not specify a spindle speed higher tha...

  • Page 679

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 651 - - Examples of parameter setting The following descriptions exemplify typical parameter setting for polygonal turning using a serial pulse coder (with a million pulse capability). (1) Tool rotation axis setting This example uses the CNC's fourth a...

  • Page 680

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 652 - Therefore, if the maximum servo motor speed is 1000 [min-1], and the servo motor is directly connected to the servo motor: Upper limit to the tool rotation axis speed = 1000 × 1 = 1000 [min-1] This means the parameters must be set as follows: ...

  • Page 681

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 653 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn063 PSYN Diagnosis screen 478 Speed of the tool rotating axis during polygon turning (1/min) This indication is the speed of the tool rotating axis during polygon turning. Parameter #7 #6 #5 ...

  • Page 682

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 654 - 7610 Control axis number of tool rotation axis for polygon turning NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to number...

  • Page 683

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 655 - NOTE If the speed of the tool rotation axis exceeds the set maximum allowable speed during polygon turning, the synchronization between the spindle and tool rotation axis is lost, and operation stops with alarm PS5018. Alarm and message Number Me...

  • Page 684

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 656 - 6.10.2 Polygon Turning with Two Spindles Overview When two or more serial spindles are used, the workpiece rotation axis (master axis) and tool rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis) are synchronized at a certain speed ratio. With this funct...

  • Page 685

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 657 - - Release command This command releases the polygon synchronization mode. This mode is released also when: <1> Reset and emergency stop (Setting bit 0 (RPL) of parameter No.7603 to 1 prevents polygon synchronization mode from being release...

  • Page 686

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 658 - after checking the signal state of the polygon spindle speed arrival signal for polygon turning with two spindles PSAR<Fn063.2>=1 or take sufficient wait time in the program. Each time any of the following changes is made during polygon sync...

  • Page 687

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 659 - - Example of polygonal turning with two spindles This example of polygonal turning with two spindles produces a square using single-edged cutting tools (for roughing and finishing). . Mxy; Txxyy; G00 X100. ...

  • Page 688

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 660 - Diagnosis screen For polygonal turning with two spindles, the following information is displayed on the diagnosis display screen. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 470 SC0 LGE SCF PSC PEN PSU SPL Polygonal turning with two spindles Indication of inform...

  • Page 689

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 661 - SC0 Actual speed command is 0 during spindle-spindle polygon synchronization mode. NOTE Signal SC0 is not a value specified by the program. It is set to 1 under any of the following conditions: 1. When the S command value is adjusted according ...

  • Page 690

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 662 - NOTE 1 SCU becomes 1 also when the specified spindle speed is 0 (DGN 470#7 = 1). In this case, however, alarm PS5018 is not issued (because the command is 0). When DGN 470#7 = 0 and DGN 471#0 = 1, alarm PS5018 occurs. Normally this does not occur w...

  • Page 691

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 663 - NPQ In a G51.2, R is specified when P and Q have not been specified at all, or none of P, Q, and R has been specified. Indication of values specified during the spindle-spindle polygon synchronization mode 474 Rotation ratio for the master axis...

  • Page 692

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 664 - Spindle screen During the spindle-spindle polygon synchronization mode, information for the spindle synchronization control mode is displayed. The following information is displayed on the spindle screen. "Positional deviation" indicates...

  • Page 693

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 665 - Polygon synchronization under way signal PSYN<Fn063#7> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs the PMC that the system is in the polygon synchronization mode. [Output condition] The polygon synchronization mode command (G51.2) se...

  • Page 694

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 666 - synchronization axis does not reach the acceptable level specified in parameter No. 7631. Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn038 *PLSST #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn063 PSYN PSAR PSE2 PSE1

  • Page 695

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 667 - PMC sequence The following shows the signal status time chart when the polygon synchronization mode is on and off. Signal status time chart when the polygon synchronization mode is onPolygon sync axisrotation controlG51.2 commandPhase matchingSte...

  • Page 696

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 668 - Signal status time chart when the polygon synchronization mode is offPolygon sync axisrotation controlG50.2 commandPolygon sync ONPolygon sync OFFMaster axis rotationsignalPolygon master axis notarrival signalPolygon sync axis notarrival signalPSA...

  • Page 697

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 669 - In a PMC sequence, activation of the master axis and polygon synchronization axis must be turned on when the polygon synchronization under way signal PSYN<Fn063.7> changes from 0 to 1. In addition, while the polygon synchronization under way...

  • Page 698

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 670 - - Sequences common to methods A and B During the polygon synchronization mode, observe the follow rules to create a PMC sequence regardless of whether method A or method B is used. (1) The rotation direction of the master axis during the polygon ...

  • Page 699

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 671 - (3) During the spindle polygon synchronization mode, the polygon synchronization axis cannot be rotated independently of the master axis. Since the spindle orientation function (ORCMA <Gn070.6> and ORCMB<Gn074.6>) cannot also be used, ...

  • Page 700

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 672 - 7621 Maximum allowable speed for the tool rotation axis for polygon turning NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] min-...

  • Page 701

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 673 - 7640 Master axis in spindle-spindle polygon turning [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled axes (Within a path) This parameter sets the master axis in spindle-spindle polygon tu...

  • Page 702

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 674 - 7641 Polygon synchronous axis in spindle-spindle polygon turning [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled axes (Within a path) This parameter sets the polygon synchronous (slave) a...

  • Page 703

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 675 - 7642 Master axis in spindle-spindle polygon turning (spindle number common to the system) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled axes (Common to the system) This parameter sets t...

  • Page 704

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 676 - 7643 Polygon synchronous axis in spindle-spindle polygon turning [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled axes (Common to the system) This parameter sets the polygon synchronous (s...

  • Page 705

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 677 - Number Message Description PS0314 ILLEGAL SETTING OF POLYGONAL AXIS An axis was specified invalidly in polygon turning. For polygon turning: A tool rotation axis is not specified. (Parameter No. 7610) For polygon turning between spindles: Valid spi...

  • Page 706

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 678 - CAUTION 5 During the polygon synchronization mode, no command cannot be executed for the polygon synchronization axis. During the polygon synchronization mode, the spindle orientation function cannot be used for either the master axis and polygon...

  • Page 707

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 679 - 6.11 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL M Overview When a tool with a rotation axis (C-axis) is moved in the XY plane during cutting, the normal direction control function can control the tool so that the C-axis is always perpendicular to the tool path (F...

  • Page 708

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 680 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ROSx ROTx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation ax...

  • Page 709

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 681 - 5482 Limit value used to determine whether to ignore the rotation insertion of the normal direction controlled axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment syste...

  • Page 710

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 682 - N1 Tool center path N2 Travel distance Programmed path For straight line When the travel distance of N2 in the figure on the left does not exceed the setting, block N2 is machined with the tool being normal to block N1. N3Diameter Programmed path ...

  • Page 711

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 683 - (3)(2)(5)(4)(1) WorkpieceProgrammed path Path after cutter compensation Tool(6) NOTE When this parameter is set to 1, no interference check is made in cutter compensation C. 1430 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis [Input type] Parameter...

  • Page 712

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 684 - 6.12 EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION M Overview Exponential interpolation exponentially changes the rotation of a workpiece with respect to movement on the rotary axis. Furthermore, exponential interpolation performs linear interpolation with respect ...

  • Page 713

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 685 - 5642 Rotation axis number subject exponential interpolation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes This parameter sets the ordinal number, among the controlled axes, for the rotatio...

  • Page 714

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 686 - 6.13 SMOOTH INTERPOLATION M Overview Either of two types of machining can be selected, depending on the program command. - For those portions where the accuracy of the figure is critical, such as at corners, machining is performed exactly as sp...

  • Page 715

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 687 - 6.14 HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION Overview In helical interpolation, when pulses are distributed with one of the circular interpolation axes set to a hypothetical axis, sine interpolation is enable. When one of the circular interpolation axes i...

  • Page 716

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 688 - 6.15 HELICAL INTERPOLATION B Overview The helical interpolation B function differs from the helical interpolation function just in that circular interpolation and a movement on four axes outside the specified plane can be simultaneously performed....

  • Page 717

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 689 - Reference item Manual name Item name Helical interpolation B USER’S MANUAL (B-63944EN) Helical interpolation

  • Page 718

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 690 - 6.16 SPIRAL INTERPOLATION, CONICAL INTERPOLATION Overview Spiral interpolation is enabled by specifying the circular interpolation command together with a desired number of revolutions or a desired increment (decrement) for the radius per revoluti...

  • Page 719

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 691 - Parameter 3471 Allowable difference between the specified end position and the end position obtained from the increase/decrease and frequency in spiral interpolation or conic interpolation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Un...

  • Page 720

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 692 - Number Message Description PS5124 CAN NOT COMMAND SPIRAL A spiral interpolation or conical interpolation was specified in any of the following modes: 1) Scaling 2) Polar coordinate interpolation 3) In cutter compensation C mode, the center is set a...

  • Page 721

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 693 - 6.17 NURBS INTERPOLATION M Overview Many computer-aided design (CAD) systems used to design metal dies for automobiles and airplanes utilize non-uniform rational B-spline (NURBS) to express a sculptured surface or curve for the metal dies. This ...

  • Page 722

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 694 - NURBS interpolation must be specified in high-precision contour control mode (between G05 P10000 and G05 P0). The CNC executes NURBS interpolation while smoothly accelerating or decelerating the movement so that the acceleration on each axis will n...

  • Page 723

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 695 - 6.18 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G28, G30, G53) Overview When positioning operation of linear interpolation type is specified (parameter LRP (No. 1401#1) = 1), the following operations can also be set as operations of linear interpolation type by settin...

  • Page 724

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 696 - Note NOTE Automatic reference position return operation of low-speed type (G28) If reference position return operation is not performed for a specified axis even once after the power is turned on in automatic reference position return operation (...

  • Page 725

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 697 - 6.19 THREE-DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION M Overview By specifying an intermediate point and end point for an arc, circular interpolation can be performed in three-dimensional space. As shown below, three points, namely, a start point (curren...

  • Page 726

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 698 - Number Message Description PS5433 MANUAL INTERVENTION IN G02.4/G03.4 (ABS ON) In three-dimensional circular interpolation mode (G02.4/G03.4), manual intervention was made when the manual absolute switch was on.

  • Page 727

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 699 - 6.20 NANO SMOOTHING Overview When a desired sculptured surface is approximated by minute segments, the nano smoothing function generates a smooth curve inferred from the programmed segments and performs necessary interpolation. The nano smoothing ...

  • Page 728

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 700 - • Constant surface speed control cancel • Cutting mode • Coordinate system rotation/three-dimensional coordinate conversion cancel • Polar coordinate cancel • Normal-direction control cancel • Polar coordinate interpolation cancel • P...

  • Page 729

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 701 - Nanointerpolation is performed for the curve inferred from the corrected insertion points, so the resultant cutting surface becomes smooth. Programmed pointInsertion pointCorrected insertion pointInferred curveTolerance - Specifying the toleranc...

  • Page 730

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 702 - If the value specified in the parameter is 0, no decision is made at the corner on the basis of the difference in angle. Very minute blocks created for some reasons such as a calculation error of CAM can be ignored, and a smooth connection can be m...

  • Page 731

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 703 - - Interrupt-type custom macro No interrupt-type custom macro can be used in the nano smoothing mode. If the nano smoothing mode is specified while an interrupt-type custom macro is enabled or if an interrupt-type custom macro is enabled in the na...

  • Page 732

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 704 - - Restrictions on resumption of automatic operation (1) Resuming a program Curve interpolation is performed for corrected insertion points not for programmed points in the nano smoothing mode. Accordingly, when a sequence number is specified to ...

  • Page 733

    B-63943EN-1/02 6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION - 705 - 8487 Angle at which smooth interpolation or Nano smoothing is turned off [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 0 ...

  • Page 734

    6.INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 706 - 19582 Minimum amount of travel of a block that makes a decision based on an angular difference between blocks for nano smoothing [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit) [Minimum unit of da...

  • Page 735

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 707 - 7 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL

  • Page 736

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 708 - 7.1 FEEDRATE CONTROL The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feed functions are available: 1. Rapid traverse When the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves at a rapid...

  • Page 737

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 709 - NOTE 1 The rapid traverse in automatic operation includes all rapid traverses in canned cycle positioning, automatic reference point return, etc., as well as the move command G00. The manual rapid traverse also includ...

  • Page 738

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 710 - 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system o...

  • Page 739

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 711 - 7.1.2 Cutting Feedrate Clamp Overview An upper limit can be set on the cutting feedrate along each axis (parameter No. 1430). If an actual cutting feedrate (with an override applied) exceeds a specified upper limit,...

  • Page 740

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 712 - 7.1.3 Feed Per Minute Overview - Feed per minute After specifying G94 (G98 for lathe system) (in the feed per minute mode), the amount of feed of the tool per minute is specified by setting a number after F. G94 (G...

  • Page 741

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 713 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 FPM 3402 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 FPM At power-on time or in the cleared state: 0: G99 or G95 mode (feed per revolution) is set...

  • Page 742

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 714 - 7.1.4 Feed Per Revolution/Manual Feed Per Revolution Overview - Feed per revolution After specifying G95 (G99 for lathe system) (in the feed per revolution mode), the amount of feed of the tool per spindle revoluti...

  • Page 743

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 715 - 1423 Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed) for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the...

  • Page 744

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 716 - 7.1.5 One-digit F Code Feed (M series) Overview - One-digit F code feed When a one-digit number from 1 to 9 is specified after F, the feedrate set for that number in a parameter (Nos. 1451 to 1459) is used. When F...

  • Page 745

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 717 - the upper limit of the feedrate for an one-digit F code feed command, and set it in parameter 1460 or 1461. Fmax1: Upper limit of the feedrate for F1 to F4 (parameter 1460) Fmax2: Upper limit of the feedrate for F5 to...

  • Page 746

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 718 - 7.1.6 Inverse Time Feed M Overview Feedrate of the tool can be specified by the move distance of the block and inverse time (FRN). - Linear interpolation (G01) FRN=1/Time (min) = Speed/Distance Speed: mm/ min (met...

  • Page 747

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 719 - 7.1.7 Override 7.1.7.1 Rapid traverse override Overview An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to the rapid traverse rate. F0 is set by a parameter (No. 1421). The 1% step rapid traverse o...

  • Page 748

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 720 - - 0.1% step rapid traverse override selection signal With the 0.1% step rapid traverse override selection signal FHROV, a 1% step rapid traverse override or 0.1% step rapid traverse override can be selected for use. ...

  • Page 749

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 721 - 1% step rapid traverse override signals *HROV0 to *HROV6<Gn096#0 to #6> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Applies override to the rapid traverse rate in the range of 0% to 100% in steps of 1%. [Operati...

  • Page 750

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 722 - Parameter 1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the ...

  • Page 751

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 723 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8001 OVE [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 2 OVE Signals related to dry run and override used in PMC axis control 0: Same signals as those used for the CNC 1...

  • Page 752

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 724 - 7.1.7.2 Feedrate override Overview A programmed feedrate can be reduced or increased by a percentage (%) selected by the override dial. This feature is used to check a program. For example, when a feedrate of 100 mm/...

  • Page 753

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 725 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1401 RF0 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 RF0 When cutt...

  • Page 754

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 726 - 7.1.7.3 Second feedrate override Overview These signals override the cutting feedrate after the cutting feedrate has been overridden by first override *FV0 to *FV7. A percentage from 0 to 254 % can be selected in ste...

  • Page 755

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 727 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3002 IOV [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 IOV Override-related signal logic is: 0: Used without modification (A signal of negative logic is used...

  • Page 756

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 728 - 7.1.7.4 Override cancel Overview The override cancel signal fixes the feedrate override to 100%. Signal Override cancel signal OVC<Gn006#4> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Feedrate override is fix...

  • Page 757

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 729 - 7.1.8 Automatic Corner Override The movement of a tool in an inner corner or an inner arc is automatically decelerated during cutter compensation, so that the load on the tool is reduced, and a surface obtained by cu...

  • Page 758

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 730 - Programmed path LeabLsCutter center path An override is applied to the range from point a to point b. Fig. 7.1.8 (b) Overriding range (straight line - straight line) An arc-shaped path is overridden if the start p...

  • Page 759

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 731 - Limitation - Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation The inner corner override function is disabled during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. - Start-up, G41, G42 The inner corner override funct...

  • Page 760

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 732 - Parameter 1710 Minimum deceleration ratio (MDR) for inner circular cutting feedrate change by automatic corner override [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to...

  • Page 761

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 733 - 1712 Override value for inner corner override [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100 Set an inner corner override value in automatic corner overriding. 1...

  • Page 762

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 734 - 7.1.9 External Deceleration Overview The control axis is externally decelerated. The feedrate is decelerated by the external deceleration signals from the machine. The deceleration rate is set by the parameters. The ...

  • Page 763

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 735 - 5 ….. External deceleration setting 5 is selected. x : + : The feed is decelerated in the plus (+) direction. - : The feed is decelerated in the minus (-) direction. [Operation] When a signal becomes "0&qu...

  • Page 764

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 736 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1005 EDMxEDPx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 4 EDPx In cutting feed, an external deceleration signal in the + direction for each axis is: 0: Inval...

  • Page 765

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 737 - 1426 External deceleration rate of cutting feed [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system...

  • Page 766

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 738 - 1441 External deceleration rate setting 2 for each axis in rapid traverse [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depe...

  • Page 767

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 739 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 12750 EX5 EX4 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 EX4 External deceleration function setting 4 is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. # 1 EX5 External deceleration...

  • Page 768

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 740 - 12754 External deceleration rate setting 5 in cutting feed [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the incre...

  • Page 769

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 741 - 7.1.10 Feed Stop Function Overview During axis motion, the feed stop function checks a position deviation amount at all times. When the amount exceeds the "feed stop position deviation amount" set by the pa...

  • Page 770

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 742 - 7.1.11 AI CONTOUR CONTROL I AND AI CONTOUR CONTROL II Overview The AI contour control I and AI nano contour control II functions are provided for high-speed, high-precision machining. This function enables suppressi...

  • Page 771

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 743 - NOTE 1 Always specify G08 and G05 in an independent block. 2 G05 can be specified only for AI contour control II. 3 The AI contour control mode is also canceled by a reset. 4 Valid functions are limited depending on t...

  • Page 772

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 744 - 7.1.11.1 Look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Acceleration/deceleration types There are two types of look-ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, the linear acceleration/decelerati...

  • Page 773

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 745 - Program: N1 G01 G91 X20. F6000 Move on the X-axis. G04 X0.01 N2 Y20. Move on the Y-axis. G04 X0.01 N3 X20. Y20. Move in the XY direction (at 45 degrees). The acceleration in N3 is 1414 mm/sec2. At this point, the ac...

  • Page 774

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 746 - - Deceleration Deceleration starts in advance so that the feedrate programmed for a block is attained at the beginning of the block. Deceleration can be performed over several blocks. FeedrateTimeDecelerationstart po...

  • Page 775

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 747 - In such a case, set bit 3 (BCG) of parameter No. 7055 to 1. Then, the internal acceleration and vector time constant of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation are changed to make the acceleration/deceleration...

  • Page 776

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 748 - 7.1.11.2 Automatic feedrate control function In AI contour control mode, the feedrate is automatically controlled by the reading-ahead of blocks. The feedrate is determined using the following conditions. If the spe...

  • Page 777

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 749 - - Speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis at a corner By using the speed control based on the feedrate difference on each axis at a corner, if a feedrate change occurs on an axis on each axis at a...

  • Page 778

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 750 - In this case, the deceleration feedrate differs if the travel direction differs, even if the shape is the same. Deceleration to500 mm/minDeceleration to354 mm/min(Example)If parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 0 and...

  • Page 779

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 751 - - Speed control with acceleration in circular interpolation When high-speed cutting is performed in circular interpolation, helical interpolation, or spiral interpolation, the actual tool path has an error with respe...

  • Page 780

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 752 - - Speed control with the acceleration on each axis When consecutive small lines are used to form a curve, as in the example shown in the figure below, the feedrate differences on each axis at the individual corners a...

  • Page 781

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 753 - X-axisfeedrateN1N2YXN3N4N6N7N8Y-axisfeedrateTangentfeedrateN1N5N9N1N5N9N9N5 The method of determining the feedrate with the acceleration differs depending on the setting of parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500). If "...

  • Page 782

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 754 - If "1" is set, the feedrate is determined with not only the condition that the permissible acceleration on each axis is not exceeded but also the condition that the deceleration feedrate is constant regardl...

  • Page 783

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 755 - - Smooth speed control In speed control with acceleration, the smooth speed control function recognizes the entire figure from preceding and following blocks including blocks read ahead to make a smooth feedrate dete...

  • Page 784

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 756 - Smooth speed control obtains the acceleration by using the figure recognized from the preceding and following blocks including blocks read ahead, so smooth speed control is enabled even in parts in which the accelerat...

  • Page 785

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 757 - The descent angle θ during descent on the Z-axis (angle formed by the XY plane and the tool center path) is as shown in the figure. The descent angle is divided into four areas, and the override values for the indi...

  • Page 786

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 758 - CAUTION 1 The speed control with the cutting feed is effective only when the tool is parallel with the Z-axis. Thus, it may not be possible to apply this function, depending on the structure of the machine used. 2 I...

  • Page 787

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 759 - - Another example of determining the feedrate If a specified feedrate exceeds the upper feedrate limit of AI contour control (in parameter No. 8465), the feedrate is clamped at the upper feedrate. The upper feedrat...

  • Page 788

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 760 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1602 LS2 BS2 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 3 BS2 In the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode: 0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration or l...

  • Page 789

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 761 - 1732 Minimum allowable feedrate for the deceleration function based on acceleration in circular interpolation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machin...

  • Page 790

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 762 - NOTE During involute interpolation, the minimum allowable feedrate of "clamping of acceleration near a basic circle" in involute interpolation automatic feedrate control is used. 1737 Maximum allowable ac...

  • Page 791

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 763 - 1763 FL rate for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation for each axis in the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation mode [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of dat...

  • Page 792

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 764 - 1772 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 200 Set an acceleratio...

  • Page 793

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 765 - 3241 Character blinking in the AI contour control I mode (first character) to 3247 Character blinking in the AI contour control I mode (seventh character) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Vali...

  • Page 794

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 766 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8451 NOF ZAG [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path # 4 ZAG The deceleration function based on cutting load in AI contour control (deceleration based on Z-axis fall an...

  • Page 795

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 767 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8459 OVRB [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 3 OVRB For deceleration based on a feedrate difference or acceleration rate in AI contour control, override is: 0:...

  • Page 796

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 768 - exceeded, and also to ensure that a constant deceleration rate is applied to the same figure regardless of the direction of movement. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19503 ZOL HPF [Input type] Parameter input [Da...

  • Page 797

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 769 - Limitation - Conditions for temporarily canceling the AI contour control mode If one of the commands listed below is issued in the AI contour control mode, the AI contour control mode is canceled temporarily. If the ...

  • Page 798

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 770 - 7.2 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL 7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration 7.2.1.1 Automatic acceleration/deceleration Overview To prevent a mechanical shock, acceleration/deceleration is automatically applied...

  • Page 799

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 771 - CNCcommandPulsedistribution(interpolation)Rate after interpolationRate after acceleration/decelerationServo motorAcceleration/decelerationcontrolServocontrolAcceleration/decelerationcontrolServocontrol Parameter #...

  • Page 800

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 772 - 1620 Time constant T or T1 used for linear acceleration/deceleration or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] msec...

  • Page 801

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 773 - 1621 Time constant T2 used for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 1000 Specify ti...

  • Page 802

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 774 - 1625 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data...

  • Page 803

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 775 - 7.2.1.2 Rapid traverse block overlap Overview If rapid traverse blocks continue or the block next to a rapid traverse block does not move, the next block can be executed when the feedrate of each axis of a rapid trav...

  • Page 804

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 776 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn053 ROVLP Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1601 RTO [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 RTO Block overlap in rapid traverse 0: B...

  • Page 805

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 777 - 7.2.2 Rapid Traverse Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration Overview Rapid traverse bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration smoothly increases or decreases the rapid traverse rate, reducing the stress and strain imposed...

  • Page 806

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 778 - <Rapid traverse linear acceleration/deceleration>SpeedRapid traverse rateTimeT : Time constant for linearacceleration/decelerationTT<Rapid traverse bell shaped acceleration/deceleration>SpeedRapidtraverse...

  • Page 807

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 779 - Parameter 1620 Time constant T or T1 used for linear acceleration/deceleration or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of...

  • Page 808

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 780 - 1621 Time constant T2 used for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 1000 Specify ti...

  • Page 809

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 781 - 7.2.3 Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation Overview If linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is enabled (bit 0 of parameter No. 1610, CTL), acceleration/ d...

  • Page 810

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 782 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1610 JGLx CTLx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run 0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration ...

  • Page 811

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 783 - Note NOTE If the optional function for linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is not provided, exponential acceleration/deceleration is always selected, irrespective of the setting. 1 I...

  • Page 812

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 784 - 7.2.4 Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation Overview The bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation provides smooth acceleration and deceleration to reduce...

  • Page 813

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 785 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1610 JGLx CTBx CTLx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run 0: Exponential acceleration/decelerat...

  • Page 814

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 786 - Note NOTE 1 If bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation during cutting feed is enabled, bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is executed during cutting feed and during a dry run. Bell-shaped accelera...

  • Page 815

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 787 - 7.2.5 Optimum Torque Acceleration/Deceleration Overview This function enables acceleration/deceleration in accordance with the torque characteristics of the motor and the characteristics of the machines due to its f...

  • Page 816

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 788 - Explanation Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration selects the acceleration pattern set with parameters on the basis of the axial movement direction and the acceleration/deceleration state, determines the accelerati...

  • Page 817

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 789 - - Setting acceleration pattern data AccelerationSpeedFbFaAaP1P2P3P4P5AbAcceleration patternP0 Fig. 7.2.5 (c) Setting acceleration pattern Set the speed and the acceleration at each of the acceleration setting point...

  • Page 818

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 790 - The speed at P0 is 0, and the speed at P5 is the rapid traverse rate specified with parameter (No. 1420). The speeds at P1 to P4 are to be set into speed parameters Nos. 19541 to 19544 as ratio to the rapid traverse ...

  • Page 819

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 791 - 02040608010001000200030004000Speed(min-1)Torque(Nm) Fig. 7.2.5 (e) Torque for Acc/Dec with consideration of friction Let the torque be x (Nm), the inertia be y(Kgm2), and the ball screw pitch p(mm), then the acceler...

  • Page 820

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 792 - Table 7.2.5 (c) Example of setting parameters related to acceleration pattern Parameter No.SettingUnitRemarks Rapid traverse rate 1420 48000. mm/ min The ball screw pitch is assumed 16 mm, so that the rapid travers...

  • Page 821

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 793 - mm/min, the acceleration as calculated in accordance with the acceleration pattern is applied; from speeds from 2474 mm/min to 32000 mm/min, an acceleration of 7716 mm/sec2; and from speeds from 32000 mm/min to 48000 ...

  • Page 822

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 794 - Torque at rapid traverse: 79(Nm) Speed 3000(min-1) Minimum torque : 58(Nm) Speed 4000(min-1) (1) In case of plus move (up) and acceleration Because torque of Gravity and friction work against the output torque of ...

  • Page 823

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 795 - P0P1P201000200030004000500060007000080001600024000320004000048000Speed mm/minAcceleration mm/sec2P5 Fig. 7.2.5 (h) Acceleration pattern in case of + move and acceleration (2) In case of plus move (up) and decelerati...

  • Page 824

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 796 - P0P1P2020004000600080001000012000080001600024000320004000048000Speed mm/minAcceleration mm/sec2P5 Fig. 7.2.5 (j) Acceleration pattern in case of + move and deceleration (3) In case of minus move (down) and accelerati...

  • Page 825

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 797 - P0P1P2010002000300040005000600070008000900010000080001600024000320004000048000Speed mm/minAcceleration mm/sec2P5 Fig. 7.2.5 (l) Acceleration pattern in case of - move and acceleration (4) In case of minus move (down...

  • Page 826

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 798 - P0P1P20100020003000400050006000700080009000080001600024000320004000048000Speed mm/minAcceleration mm/sec2P5 Fig. 7.2.5 (n) Acceleration pattern in case of - move and deceleration Limitation - Linear type positioni...

  • Page 827

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 799 - - Tool center point control Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration is disabled in the tool center point control mode (except startup and cancellation). In this case, positioning is accelerated/decelerated with the...

  • Page 828

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 800 - 1672 Acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for linear rapid traverse, or acceleration change time of bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in optimum torque accelerati...

  • Page 829

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 801 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19501 FRP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 5 FRP Linear rapid traverse is: 0: Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation 1: Acceleration/deceleration bef...

  • Page 830

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 802 - Setting of restricted acceleration curve data FbFaA aP1P2P3P4P5A bP0A ccelerationSpeedR estrictedacceleration curve Set the speed and the acceleration at each of the acceleration setting points P0 to P5 for each condi...

  • Page 831

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 803 - 19545 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P0 during movement in + direction and acceleration) to 19550 Optimal torque acceleration/deceleration (acceleration at P5 during movement in + directio...

  • Page 832

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 804 - 7.2.6 Corner Control 7.2.6.1 In-position check Overview Whether the position of the servo motor is within a specified range is checked. If the in-position check function is enabled, the CNC checks the position durin...

  • Page 833

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 805 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1601 NCI [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 5 NCI An in-position check: 0: Confirms that the specified feedrate becomes 0 (the acceleration/decelera...

  • Page 834

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 806 - 7.2.6.2 In-position check independently of feed/rapid traverse Overview If separate in-position check for cutting feed and rapid traverse is executed, a small in-position check range can be specified between those cu...

  • Page 835

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 807 - # 5 CIN When CCI is set to 1, the dedicated parameter for specifying an in-position width for cutting feed is used: 0: Only when the next block specifies cutting feed. 1: Regardless of the next block. The table be...

  • Page 836

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 808 - Note NOTE If the parameter NCI (No. 1601#5) is set to 1, so that position check is not performed during deceleration, this function is invalid. The system starts execution of the next block as soon as deceleration ha...

  • Page 837

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 809 - 7.2.7 Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse Overview Feed-forward control can be performed even during rapid traverse. In this case, the servo position error is reduced, thus reducing the time required for positioning to wi...

  • Page 838

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 810 - 7.3 JERK CONTROL 7.3.1 Speed Control with Change of Acceleration on Each Axis Overview In portions in which acceleration changes largely, such as a portion where a programmed figure changes from a straight line to cu...

  • Page 839

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 811 - - Setting the permissible acceleration change amount The permissible acceleration change amount for each axis is set in parameter No. 19522. When 0 is set in this parameter for a certain axis, speed control with cha...

  • Page 840

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 812 - When a curve is specified using successive minute straight lines, programmed values are rounded to the least input increment before issued, so the machining profile is approximated with a broken line. The error due t...

  • Page 841

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 813 - Parameter 1788 Maximum allowable acceleration change rate in feedrate determination based on acceleration change for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/sec/sec, inch/se...

  • Page 842

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 814 - 7.3.2 Look-Ahead Smooth Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration before Interpolation Overview In look-ahead bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpo-lation performs smooth acceleration/deceleration by changi...

  • Page 843

    B-63943EN-1/02 7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL - 815 - Explanation - Setting the jerk change time The jerk change time is set in parameter No. 19524 by using the percentage to the acceleration change time. The actual jerk change time is represented by the percentage to t...

  • Page 844

    7.FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 816 - Parameter 1790 Ratio of change time of the rate of change of acceleration in smooth bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] % ...

  • Page 845

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 817 - 8 MULTI-PATH CONTROL

  • Page 846

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 818 - 8.1 MULTI-PATH CONTROL Overview The multipath control function is designed to enable 10 independent simultaneous machining with up to 10 paths (10-path control). This function is applicable to lathes and automatic lathes which perform cutting simulta...

  • Page 847

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 819 - - For a system with four paths Program directory forpath 1Program directory forpath 2Program directory forpath 3Path 1programanalysisPath 2programanalysisPath 3programanalysisPath 1positioncontrolPath 2positioncontrolPath 3positioncontrolPath 1 axisco...

  • Page 848

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 820 - - Machine control types and combined systems Machine control types are classified according to NC system controlled state, as given below. Machine control type Description Lathe system System that controls all paths as a lathe. Specifiable G codes are...

  • Page 849

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 821 - - Machine group If you have multiple paths, you can combine some of them into a group, so that, for example, you can share data in that group and that if an alarm is generated in a certain path, you can stop other paths in that group. A group that is...

  • Page 850

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 822 - - Controlled axes You can have up to 32 controlled axes available throughout the system. (That number is subject to restriction by the system software series.) You can specify which path each controlled axis is to be assigned, using parameter No. 981....

  • Page 851

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 823 - - Spindle You can have up to eight axes available throughout the entire system. (That number is subject to restriction by the system software series.) You can specify which path each spindle is to be assigned, using parameter No. 982. You can assign e...

  • Page 852

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 824 - Example - Example of a system configuration (3 path and loader path) - Configuration exampleFrontspindleC1Milling head 3 linear axes + 1X3Z3Y3B3Rear spindle 1 linear axis + 1C21st turret 3 linear axesX1Z1Y12nd turret 3 linear axesX2B2Y2Loader1 lin...

  • Page 853

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 825 - In the system configuration example shown in the figure above, paths 1 and 2 are of lathe systems, path 3 is of a machining center system, and path 4 is the loader control path in a lathe system. The machine control type is combined system. The param...

  • Page 854

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 826 - - DI/DO In a multi-path system, the interface signal address relations between the CNC and the PMCs are as shown in the figure. You can control all paths with a single PMC (Ladder program), or control each path with a PMC (Ladder program), using the m...

  • Page 855

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 827 - Specific Setting Example for the Previous Example X0000~Y0000~CNCPMCI/Odevicefor firstPMCPath 1Path 2Path 3First PMCSecond PMC(optional)Third PMC(optional)G0000~F0000~G1000~F1000~G2000~F2000~G3000~F3000~G4000~F4000~G5000~F5000~G6000~F6000~G7000~F7000~G...

  • Page 856

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 828 - Setting Examples for the Interface Between the NC and the PMCs Parameter No. Setting value Application 11920 100 F0000 to F0767/G0000 to G0767 of the 1st PMC 11921 101 F1000 to F1767/G1000 to G1767 of the 1st PMC 11922 102 F2000 to F2767/G2000 to G2767...

  • Page 857

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 829 - Hard copy execution request signal HCREQ<G067.7> Hard copy under execution signal HCEXE<F061.3> External key input function External key input mode select signal ENBKY<G066.1> Key code read signal EKSET<G066.7> Key code si...

  • Page 858

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 830 - 8.1.1 CNC Data Display, Setup, and Input/Output There are offsets and custom macro variables for each path. For the path selected from the display unit, you can perform data display, setup, and input/output using a medium such as a memory card. As fo...

  • Page 859

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 831 - - Path interference check If you machine a single workpiece on two tool posts at the same time, the portions of these tool posts may come close to each other exceedingly. If these two tool posts come into contact due to a program error or other setti...

  • Page 860

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 832 - - Path spindle control This function allows the spindle belonging to one path to follow the spindle command of another specific path. It allows you to specify that a path is to incorporate the position coder feedback data for any of the spindles belon...

  • Page 861

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 833 - 8.1.3 Cautions on Multi-path Control The functions specific to multi-path control are as listed below. - Parameter WARNING If you attempt to change parameters in MDI mode in a certain path, it is probable that other paths are in MEM or other modes...

  • Page 862

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 834 - - Assignment of signals CAUTION 1 When there are four or more paths Input signals by the X address for each path are assigned to up to three paths. Therefore, when there are four or more paths, the signals must be assigned by XSG (bit 2 of paramete...

  • Page 863

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 835 - 0981 Absolute path number to which each axis belongs NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 1 to 10 Set the path to which...

  • Page 864

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 836 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0984 LCP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 0 LCP Set whether the path is a loader control path. 0...

  • Page 865

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 837 - 3019 Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal and measurement position arrival signals are assigned NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Wor...

  • Page 866

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 838 - 3013 X address to which the deceleration signal for reference position return is assigned NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Valid data...

  • Page 867

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 839 - 3021 Address to which an axis signal is assigned NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to 7, 10 to 17, 20 to 27, ... ,...

  • Page 868

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 840 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8100 DSB IAL RST [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit machine group # 0 RST The pressing of the reset key on the MDI panel is: 0: Valid for all paths within the same machine group. 1: Valid only for the p...

  • Page 869

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 841 - 8.2 WAITING M CODES Overview Control based on M codes is used to cause one path to wait for the other during machining. When an M code for waiting is specified in a block for one path during automatic operation, the other path waits for the same M co...

  • Page 870

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 842 - - Waiting specified with binary values When bit 1 (MWP) of parameter No. 8103 is set to 0, the value specified at address P is assumed to be obtained using binary values. The following table lists the path numbers and corresponding binary values. P...

  • Page 871

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 843 - Binary value of path 1 1 (0000 0000 0000 0001) Binary value of path 3 4 (0000 0000 0000 0100) Binary value of path 5 16 (0000 0000 0001 0000) Binary value of path 7 64 (0000 0000 0100 0000) Binary value of path 9 256 (0000 0001 0000 0000) Sum 341 (000...

  • Page 872

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 844 - - Waiting for path 10 To make path 10 and another path wait for each other, specify a value of 0 for the combination. If a number begins with 0, 0 cannot be recognized. Specify 0 in the second or subsequent digit from the left. Incorrect example) P01...

  • Page 873

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 845 - Program example - When the value specified at P is obtained using binary values Assume that the waiting ignore signal for path 2 (bit 7 of G1063 for a system with three or more paths) is set to 1 and M101 to M103 (parameter No. 8110 = 101 and paramet...

  • Page 874

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 846 - - When the value specified at P is obtained using path numbers in combination Assume that the waiting ignore signal for path 2 (bit 7 of G1063 for a system with three or more paths) is set to 1 and M101 to M103 (parameter No. 8110 = 101 and parameter ...

  • Page 875

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 847 - Signal You can invalidate waiting by using the waiting invalidation signal. The waiting M code of a path for which the waiting invalidation signal is "1" is ignored by other paths, thereby invalidating waiting. You use this signal if you are...

  • Page 876

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 848 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8103 MWP MWT [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 0 MWT As the signal interface for the waiting M...

  • Page 877

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 849 - Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0160 MISMATCH WAITING M-CODE <1> When different M codes are specified for path 1 and path 2 as waiting M codes without a P command. <2> When the waiting M codes are not identical even though th...

  • Page 878

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 850 - 8.3 PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK T Overview When tool posts on individual paths machine the same workpiece simultaneously, the tool posts can approach each other very closely. If the tool posts interfere with each other due to a program error or any othe...

  • Page 879

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 851 - - Setting the positions for reference points of tool posts on individual paths X described below is the axis for which 1 (X-axis of the three basic axes) is set in parameter No. 1022 and Z is the axis for which 3 (Z-axis of the three basic axes) is se...

  • Page 880

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 852 - • Setting the relationship between the coordinate systems for a two-path interference check Set the relationship between the coordinate systems of the two tool posts using TY0 and TY1 (bits 0 and 1 of parameter No.8140), with tool post 1 used as the ...

  • Page 881

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 853 - (2) Setting the reference points for a multipath interference check When bit 7 (IFP) of parameter No. 8140 is set to 1, multipath specifications are used, with which a multipath interference check is made. When reference position return operation is co...

  • Page 882

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 854 - reference positions). When updating a value of parameter No. 8141 or 8143 for each path, always perform reference position return operation with all axes on all paths. Otherwise, the internally stored relational positions of the tool posts are not up...

  • Page 883

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 855 - For example, the parameter values are set as follows for each of the machine configurations in which the coordinate systems shown below are used. Tool post 2+X+Z+X+ZTool post 2Tool post 1+X+Z+X+Z+X+Z+X+Z+Z+X<1>Parameter No. 8158 for tool post 1 ...

  • Page 884

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 856 - Tool post 3Tool post 2Three-path machine configurationTool post 1Operation rangeof tool post 1Operation rangeof tool post 2Operation rangeof tool post 3Safety pocket fortool post 1 For example, when the operation range of tool post 1 on path 1 overlap...

  • Page 885

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 857 - • Setting the interference forbidden area (setting common to conventional and multipath specifications) An interference forbidden area is set using a combination of two rectangular areas. The examples are shown below. (Example 1) Area 1Area 2Are...

  • Page 886

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 858 - - Conditions for Making a Path Interference Check A path interference check is made when conditions listed below are satisfied. (1) Common conditions • Parameter IFE (No. 8140#4) for enabling the path interference check function is set to 0. •...

  • Page 887

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 859 - Signal - For a check for interference between two paths Path interference check in progress signal TICHK<F0064#6> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs whether a path interference check is in progress. [Output condition] This sign...

  • Page 888

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 860 - Path interference check in progress signal TICHK<Fn064#6> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies whether a path interference check is in progress. [Output condition] This signal goes to "1" when: - At least one of the path...

  • Page 889

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 861 - Signal address - For a 2-path interference check #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F0064 TIALMTICHK - For a multi-path interference check #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn406 ITF08ITF07ITF06ITF05ITF04ITF03 ITF02 ITF01 Gn407 ITF10 ITF09 #7 #6 #...

  • Page 890

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 862 - - Item for a 2-path interference check only NOTE Besides the common items, there is a note on a 2-path interference check only. If, during a path interference check, the tool posts of the two paths are judged to have interfered with each other, both...

  • Page 891

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 863 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 IPF ZCL IFE IFM IT0 TY1 TYO 8140 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit # 0 TY0 This parameter sets the coordinate system relationship between two tool posts based on the tool post of path 1. # 1 T...

  • Page 892

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 864 - # 5 ZCL Specifies whether interference along the Z axis is checked while checking interference between paths. 0: Checked. 1: Not checked (Only interference along the X axis is checked.) # 7 IPF In inter-path interference checking: 0: The inter...

  • Page 893

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 865 - In the example above, the same machine group contains tool posts for four paths. In the ZX plane coordinate system with its origin placed at the reference position of tool post 1 of path 1 in the same machine group, the position of the reference posit...

  • Page 894

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 866 - Distance along the X axis between the reference positions of tool posts 1 and 2 8151 Distance along the Z axis between the reference positions of tool posts 1 and 2 8152 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real [Unit of data] mm, inch (...

  • Page 895

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 867 - Coordinate system pattern with the reference position based on the tool post of path 1 in the same machine group 8158 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 3 This parameter is used for checking the interferen...

  • Page 896

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 868 - WARNING WARNING After setting parameters for the interference check function, tool figure data (contact prohibited area), etc., be sure to enter manual mode (parameter settings must be such that an interference check is enabled even in manual mode), ...

  • Page 897

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 869 - 8.4 BALANCE CUTTING T Overview When a thin workpiece is to be machined as shown below, a precision machining can be achieved by machining each side of the workpiece with a tool simultaneously; this function can prevent the workpiece from warpage that...

  • Page 898

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 870 - NOTE 1 Balance cutting is not performed in dry run or machine lock state. G68 or G69 specified for one tool post is synchronized with G68 or G69 specified for the other tool post, however. 2 In the balance cut mode, G68 specified for one tool post is ...

  • Page 899

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 871 - - Balance cut specified with binary values When bit 1 (MWP) of parameter No. 8103 is set to 0, the value specified at address P is assumed to be obtained using binary values. The following table lists the path numbers and corresponding binary values...

  • Page 900

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 872 - Binary value of path 1 1 (0000 0000 0000 0001) Binary value of path 3 4 (0000 0000 0000 0100) Binary value of path 5 16 (0000 0000 0001 0000) Binary value of path 7 64 (0000 0000 0100 0000) Binary value of path 9 256 (0000 0001 0000 0000) Sum 341 (000...

  • Page 901

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 873 - - Balance cutting with path 10 For balance cutting with path 10, specify a value of 0 for the combination. If a number begins with 0, 0 cannot be recognized. Specify 0 in the second or subsequent digit from the left. Incorrect example) P013579 Correc...

  • Page 902

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 874 - Program example - When the value specified at P is obtained using binary values Programs O100, O200, and O300 for individual paths are executed as follows: O0300;........G68 P5; ..................... <2>G01 X Z F ;..G69;..................

  • Page 903

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 875 - - When the value specified at P is obtained using path numbers in combination Programs O100, O200, and O300 for individual paths are executed as follows: O0300;........G68 P13; ................... <2>G01 X Z F ;..G69;.....................

  • Page 904

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 876 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8103 MWP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 1 MWP To specify a P command for the waiting M co...

  • Page 905

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 877 - Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0163 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G68/G69 G68 and G69 are not independently commanded in balance cut.An illegal value is commanded in a balance cut combination (address P). Reference item Manual name Item name US...

  • Page 906

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 878 - 8.5 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL Overview Multi-path control, which has multiple independent control paths built in, is used for such purposes as controlling multiple turrets of a complex lathe. The axes (such as X1-and Z1-axes) belongi...

  • Page 907

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 879 - - Synchronous control - Synchronization of an axis in one path with an axis in the other path (Example) Synchronization of the Z1-axis (master) with the Z2-axis (slave) WorkpieceZ2 (synchronized withthe Z1-axis)Z1Turret 1X1Machining is performed by a ...

  • Page 908

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 880 - - Composite control - Interchanging move commands for an axis in one path with those for an axis in the other path. (Example) Interchanging commands between the X1- and X2-axes → Control both X2- and Z1-axes by commands in a path 1 program Control...

  • Page 909

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 881 - 8.5.1 Synchronous Control An axis in one path can be synchronized with another axis in the same path or an axis in another path. This is done by issuing the same move commands for one axis (synchronous master axis) to another axis (synchronous slave a...

  • Page 910

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 882 - - Examples of applications The following operations can be performed by using the synchronization functions together with the parking function, which causes move commands for an axis to be ignored and keeps the axis at a rest. (1) Moving an axis in on...

  • Page 911

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 883 - Example 3) Synchronizing the B1-axis (slave) (tail stock axis) with the Z1-axis (master) Workpiece 1B1 (synchronized with the Z1-axis)Z1Turret 1X1Tail stock (2) Placing the movement along the synchronous master axis in the stopped state using a parki...

  • Page 912

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 884 - Slave axis parking Turret 1X1Z1Turret 2X2The X1- and Z1-axes are moved by commands ina path 1 program (by synchronizing the Z2-axis(slave) with the Z1-axis (master)). At this point, theZ2-axis (slave) is kept in a parking state. Because the coordina...

  • Page 913

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 885 - path is subjected to both synchronization with an axis in the same path and synchronization with an axis in the other path simultaneously, the lowest-numbered slave axis in the two paths is moved to the reference position. A return to the second (thir...

  • Page 914

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 886 - original workpiece coordinate system for the master axis automatically. Note that the workpiece coordinates of a salve axis can be automatically set through appropriate parameter setting at the end of synchronous control only. - Setting and commands...

  • Page 915

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 887 - Note NOTE 1 If more than one slave axis is synchronized with one master axis, the master axis is set with the workpiece coordinate system that corresponds to the current position of the first slave axis that is synchronized with the master axis. 2 A co...

  • Page 916

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 888 - 8.5.2 Composite Control Move commands can be interchanged between an axis in one path and an axis in the other path. In other words, when a machining program is executed for one path, actual machining can be performed with an axis in the other path. C...

  • Page 917

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 889 - - Examples of applications Suppose that a machine has the X1- and Z1-axes belonging to path 1 and the X2- and Z2-axes belonging to path 2 and that a workpiece moves along the Z1- and Z2-axes as directed by move commands. The following examples interch...

  • Page 918

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 890 - (2) Composite control Turret 1Turret 2Workpiece 2Workpiece 1X2X1Z1Z2Machining is performed by a path 1 program.Machining is performed by a path 2 program. During composite control, the X2- and Z1-axes are moved by a path 1 program, and the workpiece co...

  • Page 919

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 891 - Note, however, that during Cs axis composite control, a manual reference position return is allowed. If, after the establishment of a reference position and before a switch to composite control, you want to enter the state in which no reference positi...

  • Page 920

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 892 - These signals become "0" under the following condition: - The corresponding axis is not under synchronous, composite, or superimposed control. CAUTION Whether each axis is under synchronous or composite control does not always match whethe...

  • Page 921

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 893 - These signals become "0" under the following condition: - The corresponding axes are released from synchronous control or from parking. Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn122 PK8 PK7 PK6 PK5 PK4 PK3 PK2 PK1 Gn128 MIX8MIX7MIX6MIX5...

  • Page 922

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 894 - # 6 SPE The synchronization deviation is: 0: The difference between the positioning deviation of the master axis and that of the slave axis. 1: The difference between the positioning deviation of the master axis and that of the slave axis plus the ...

  • Page 923

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 895 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8162 MUMxMCDxMPSxMPMx PKUx SERx SMRx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 SMRx Synchronous mirror-image control is: 0: Not applied. (The master and slave axes move in the same direction.) 1: Applied....

  • Page 924

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 896 - # 4 MPMx When composite control is started, the workpiece coordinate system is: 0: Not set automatically. 1: Set automatically. NOTE When the workpiece coordinate system is automatically set at the start of composite control, it is calculated fro...

  • Page 925

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 897 - MCDz MCDx 0 0Z1X1Z2X2MCDz MCDx 0 1Z1X1Z2MCDz MCDx 1 0X2MCDz MCDx 1 1Z1X1Z2X2X2Z1X1Z2 # 7 MUMx In composite control, a move command for the axis: 0: Can be specified. 1: Cannot be specified. NOTE Upon the execution o...

  • Page 926

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 898 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8163 NUMxMMIxSMIxSCDxSCMxSPSx SPMx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 1 SPMx When synchronous control is started, automatic workpiece coordinate system setting for the master axis is 0: Not Performed...

  • Page 927

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 899 - # 5 SMIx In synchronous control, the manual handle interruption amount for the master axis or the mirror image mode is: 0: Reflected in the slave axis. 1: Not reflected in the slave axis. When this bit (SMIx) is set to 0 Manual handle interruption...

  • Page 928

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 900 - NOTE MWSx is enabled when bit 4 (MPMx) of parameter No.8162 is set to 1. # 1 MWEx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting, performed when composite control is canceled, a workpiece shift and position offset are: 0: Not considered. 1: Con...

  • Page 929

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 901 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8166 MIX [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 1 MIX For composite control: 0: An interface for three path...

  • Page 930

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 902 - # 4 SWMx In automatic workpiece coordinate system setting at the start of synchronous control, a workpiece shift is: 0: Not considered. 1: Considered. NOTE SWMx is enabled when bit 1 (SPMx) of parameter No.8163 is set to 1. # 5 SWSx In autom...

  • Page 931

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 903 - # 1 MSO When one of the following events occurs in synchronous control or composite control: - The emergency stop signal is turned off. - The servo-off signal is turned on. - A servo alarm is issued. 0: The synchronous or composite control mode...

  • Page 932

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 904 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8169 MDMx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 MDMx As machine coordinates in composite control: 0: Coordinates for the local path are displayed. 1: Coordinates for the other path in composite c...

  • Page 933

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 905 - 8184 Coordinates of the reference point of an axis on the coordinate system of another axis under composite control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on ...

  • Page 934

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 906 - X1 = (Value specified for the X-axis of path 1) ± (Machine coordinate of X2) Plus when parameter MCDx (bit 6 of No.8162) of path 1 is set to 0 Minus when parameter MCDx (bit 6 of No.8162) of path 1 is set to 1 X2 = (Value specified for the X-axis of...

  • Page 935

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 907 - Alarm and message If any of the following alarms occurs, synchronous or congestion control will be canceled for all axes. - P/S alarm Number Message Description PS0350 PARAMETER OF THE INDEX OF THE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AXIS SET ERROR. An illegal synch...

  • Page 936

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 908 - - D/S alarm Number Message Description DS1933 NEED REF RETURN(SYNC:MIX:OVL) The relation between a machine coordinate of an axis in synchronization, composition, or superposition control, and the absolute, or relative coordinate was displaced. Perform...

  • Page 937

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 909 - CAUTION 7 Acceleration/deceleration control, pitch error compensation, backlash compensation, and stored stroke check are performed independently, regardless of synchronous or composite control. 8 The following servo software functions cannot be used ...

  • Page 938

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 910 - - Items related to synchronous control only CAUTION 1 In synchronous control, you cannot issue a move command for the synchronous axis on the synchronous slave. 2 The axes under synchronous control must match in acceleration/deceleration time constan...

  • Page 939

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 911 - Limitation - Limitations on synchronous control and composite control Function In synchronous control In composite control Acceleration/deceleration control The synchronous slave axis is subject to acceleration/deceleration of the same type as the syn...

  • Page 940

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 912 - Function In synchronous control In composite control Program restart Not possible with a program containing synchronous control. Not possible with a program containing composite control.Cs contour control Synchronous control possible (5). Composite con...

  • Page 941

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 913 - *1: By setting parameter NMR (No. 8161#0) to 1, you can prohibit the composite control axis from release from the synchronous or composite control state even if the axis enters the servo off state. By setting parameter NSR (No. 8161#7) to 1, you can p...

  • Page 942

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 914 - Examples of Use - Examples of independent control and of synchronous control on the Z1 and Z2 axes (1) Machine configuration (a) Independent control Separate machining operationsare performed in path 1 (X1-Z1)and in path 2 (X2-Z2)Z1Spindle S1Turret 1X...

  • Page 943

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 915 - 8181z of path 2, in the range of 100 to 1000. (The setting differs with each machine.) - During synchronization, the difference between the Z1 (master) axis and the Z2 (slave) axis in positional deviation is displayed as No. 3502z on the diagnosis scr...

  • Page 944

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 916 - - Examples of independent control and interpolation on the X1 and Z2 axes (1) Machine configuration (a) Independent control Separate machining operationsare performed in path 1 (X1-Z1)and in path 2 (X2-Z2)Z1Spindle S1Turret 1X1Turret 2X2Z2Spindle S2 (...

  • Page 945

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 917 - - Do not perform synchronous error detection because the X2 (master) axis is parked. - During synchronization, the difference between the X2 (master) and X1 (slave) axes in positional deviation is displayed as No. 3502x on the diagnosis screen of path ...

  • Page 946

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 918 - (4) Note NOTE During synchronous control on the X axis, no move command can be issued from path 1 to the X1 (slave) axis, but movement along the Z1 axis is possible. If using composite control (1) Parameter settings - To perform composite control ...

  • Page 947

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 919 - (3) Program example Path 1 Path 2 N1000 . . . N2000 . . . Independent machining of each path N1010 Z0 ; N2010 Z20. ; Move each workpiece to position N2020 X120. ; Move along the X2 axis to a non-interference position N1...

  • Page 948

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 920 - (4) Note NOTE - At the start and end of composite control, you do not necessarily perform automatic setup of the coordinate system. If you do not perform automatic setting, the program will set an appropriate one internally. - During composite control...

  • Page 949

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 921 - - Examples of independent control and of interpolation on X1-Z2 and X2-Z1 (1) Machine configuration (a) Independent control Workpiece 1 and turret 1are controlled withprogram of path 1Z1X1Spindle S1Z2X2Spindle S2Workpiece 2 and turret 2are controlled ...

  • Page 950

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 922 - (2) Parameter settings - To perform composite control by letting the X1 and X2 axes interchange, set parameter No. 8183x of path 2 to "101". - Because the direction of the coordinates on the X1 axis is opposite from that of the coordinates on...

  • Page 951

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 923 - (4) Program example Path 1 Path 2 N1000 . . . N2000 . . . Independent machining of each path N1010 M200 P12 ; N2010 M200 P12 ; Waiting N2020 M55 ; Start composite control on the X1 and X2 axes N1030 M201 P12 ; N2030 M201 P12 ; W...

  • Page 952

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 924 - • You can set only a single set of axes subject to synchronous or composite control. If you require multiple sets, use the programmable parameter input function (G10) to change the parameter settings in the program. Before changing parameters, make...

  • Page 953

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 925 - Synchronous or composite control cannot be started, either, if the axis on which synchronous or composite control is to start is either of the following states: - Servo off - Overtravel 2. An attempt to raise a synchronous or composite start signal r...

  • Page 954

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 926 - 4. During synchronous control or composite control, an alarm occurs. (1) A move command is issued for a synchronous slave axis. (Alarm (PS0351)) -> No move command can be issued for a synchronous slave axis, whether it be automatic or manual. (2) ...

  • Page 955

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 927 - the actual movement of the machine may not fully match. 7. The travel distance is not correct during synchronous or composite control. (1) The master and slave axes differ in diameter/radius specification or inch/millimeter setting. -> In synchron...

  • Page 956

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 928 - 8.5.3 Hypothetical Cs Axis Control Overview This function allows you to add a hypothetical Cs axis to a path to which no serial spindle is actually connected. Usually, performing composite control on Cs axes in multi-path control requires that both of...

  • Page 957

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 929 - Example of control in which a hypothetical Cs axis and composite control are combined 1) Control in which a Cs contour control axis (a single serial spindle) is used in two path [Machining pattern] Usually, machining is performed in path 1, using X1-...

  • Page 958

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 930 - Parameter setting Parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number) Parameter No. 1014#7 (Hypothetical Cs axis setting) 1st axis Path 1, axis 1, X11 0 2nd axisPath 1, axis 2, Z12 0 3rd axis Path 1, axis 3, C1-1 0 4th axis Path 2, axis 1, X23 0 5th axis Path 2,...

  • Page 959

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 931 - 2) Control in which Cs contour control axes (two serial spindle) are used in two paths [Machining pattern] Usually, machining is performed in path 1, using X1-Z1-C1, and in path 2, using X2-Z2-C2. By performing composite control on B1-C2, you can ope...

  • Page 960

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 932 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1014 CDMx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 7 CDMx The Cs contour control axis is: 0: No...

  • Page 961

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 933 - Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0197 C-AXIS COMMANDED IN SPINDLE MODE The program specified a movement along the Cs-axis when the Cs contour control switching signal was off. SP0752 SPINDLE MODE CHANGE ERROR This alarm is generated if th...

  • Page 962

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 934 - 8.6 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL Overview The superimposed control function adds the amount of movement of an axis (superimposed control master axis) in one path to an axis (superimposed control slave axis) on the other path for which ordinary move commands a...

  • Page 963

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 935 - - Superimposed control The move command for any axis is superimposed on an axis of another path. (Example) Superimpose the movement along the Z1 (master) axis on the Z2 (slave) axis. WorkpieceZ2Z1Turret 1X1Machining is performed by a path 1program.Tu...

  • Page 964

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 936 - - Programming Both before and after the M codes for a start and a cancellation of superimposed control, specify a waiting M code. Master axis path Slave axis path : : M100P12; M100P12; Waiting M220; Start of superimposed control M101P12; M1...

  • Page 965

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 937 - - Feedrate Because the amount of movement of the master axis is added to that of the slave axis, the resulting speed of the slave axis may become much larger than a normal speed. - Differences between superimposed control and ordinary synchronous c...

  • Page 966

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 938 - Superimposed control master axis confirmation signals OVMO1 to OVMO8<Fn344> [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals notify whether the corresponding axes are superimposed control master axes. [Output condition] These signals be...

  • Page 967

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 939 - NOTE After updating the value of this parameter, perform a manual reference position return operation for both tool posts. Otherwise, the internally stored positional relationships of the two tool posts are not updated to the newly set parameter value...

  • Page 968

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 940 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8168 MPA [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit # 0 MPA If an alarm concerning synchronous control, composite control, or superimposed control is issued: 0: All paths of the machine group to which the ala...

  • Page 969

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 941 - Alarm and message If any of the following alarms occurs, superimposed control will be released for all axes. - P/S alarm Number Message Description PS0360 PARAMETER OF THE INDEX OF THE SUPERPOS CONTROL AXIS SET ERROR. An illegal superposition control...

  • Page 970

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 942 - CAUTION 5 Before starting superimposed control, make sure that the axes subject to it has undergone a reference position return after the power was turned on or that a reference position has been established with an absolute pulse coder. 6 If an emerg...

  • Page 971

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 943 - NOTE 1 You can place more than one axis under superimposed control at the same time. You cannot, however, place an axis subject to synchronous or composite control under superimposed control. 2 Superimposed control cannot be performed on a linear axis...

  • Page 972

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 944 - - Reading of coordinates in superimposed control In superimposed control, the reading of custom macro system variable positional information or of current coordinates from the PMC window is as follows: Positional information type In superimposed cont...

  • Page 973

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 945 - (1) In a positional deviation check, regardless of the states of these signals, parameter No. 1828 is used if move command pulses are sent to the motor (regardless of whether the axis is the master or slave) as the limit, and parameter No. 1829 if none...

  • Page 974

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 946 - (2) Parameter setting - To superimpose the move command for the Z1 (master) axis on that of the Z2 (slave) axis, set parameter No. 8186z of path 2 to "102". - Because the plus directions of the Z1 (master) and Z2 (slave) axes are opposite fro...

  • Page 975

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 947 - NOTE Input the speed of spindle S1 (feedback pulses from the position coder) to both paths 1 and 2. Troubleshooting 1. Unable to start superimposed control. (No alarm occurs.) (1) The correct superimposed control options have not been set up. -> ...

  • Page 976

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 948 - (3) The tool is moving along the axis that you want to control. (Alarms (PS0361)) → At the start of superimposed control, the tool must be stopped on the axis subject to that control. That the tool is stopped on an axis means that the speed specifie...

  • Page 977

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 949 - 7. Alarm (DS1933) occurs. -> In superimposed control, alarm (DS1933) occurs if at least one path enters one of the following states: - Emergency stop - Servo off - Servo alarm After canceling the emergency stop, after canceling servo off, or afte...

  • Page 978

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 950 - 8.7 PATH SPINDLE CONTROL Overview This function allows a workpiece attached to one spindle to be machined simultaneously with two tool posts and each of two workpieces attached to each of two spindles to be machined simultaneously with each of two too...

  • Page 979

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 951 - feed per revolution can be performed using the feedback pulses from the position coder attached on the spindle belonging to any path. NOTE 1 The spindle speed is changed by spindle commands from multiple paths because path spindle command selection si...

  • Page 980

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 952 - Each signal type is applicable to the following spindle configurations. Signal typeControlling the spindle belonging to path 1 from path 1 or 2 Controlling the spindle belonging to path 1 or 2 from path 1 or 2 Controlling the spindle belonging to any ...

  • Page 981

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 953 - Selecting the feedback pulses from a position coder The simultaneous use of multispindle control enables feed per revolution using the feedback pulses from the position coder on any spindle belonging to each path. Use signals (combination of position...

  • Page 982

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 954 - Signal There are three signal types, which are selected with appropriate parameter settings. Parameter MPM (No.3703#2( Parameter 2P2 (No.3703#0 Signal type 0 0 Signal type A 0 1 Signal type B 1 0/1 Signal type C - Signal type A Path spindle command s...

  • Page 983

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 955 - Path spindle command confirmation signal COSP <Fn064#5> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies which path the spindle command last specified came from. [Output condition] This signal becomes "1" under the foll...

  • Page 984

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 956 - - Signal type B Path spindle command selection signal SLSPA<Gn063#2>,SLSPB<Gn063#3> [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal specifies the path of the program commands to be effective to the spindles belonging to paths 1 and ...

  • Page 985

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 957 - Path spindle command confirmation signal COSP<Fn064#5> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies which path the spindle command last specified came from. [Output condition] This signal becomes "1" under the follo...

  • Page 986

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 958 - - Signal type C Path spindle command selection signal SignalSLSPA<Gn063.2>,SLSPB<Gn063#3>,SLSPC<Gn403#0>,SLSPD<Gn403#1> [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals specify the paths of the program commands to be ef...

  • Page 987

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 959 - Path spindle feedback selection signal SLPCA<Gn064.2>,SLPCB<Gn064#3>,SLPCC<Gn403#4>,SLPCD<Gn403#5> [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals specify the paths to which the spindles to which position coder feedback...

  • Page 988

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 960 - Path spindle command confirmation signal COSP1<Fn063#3>,COSP2<Fn063#4>,COSP3<Fn404#0>,COSP4<Fn404#1> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies which path the spindle command last specified came from. [Outp...

  • Page 989

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 961 - Spindle commandfor path mPath mSpindle PCfor path m1st spindle (pathm)SpindlecommandSpindlefeedbackPath spindlecommand selectionsignal 1 to m 2Path spindlecommand selectionsignal 1 to m 2Spindle commandfor path 1Path 1Spindle PCfor path 11st spindle (p...

  • Page 990

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 962 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3702 EMS [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 1 EMS The multi-spindle control function is: 0: Used. 1: Not used. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3703 MPP MPM 2P2 [Input type] Parame...

  • Page 991

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 963 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3706 PCS [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 3 PCS When a multi-path system is used, and multi-spindle control is enabled with each path, as the position coder signals (PC2SLC<Gn0028.7>, P...

  • Page 992

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 964 - 3781 P code for selecting the spindle in multi-spindle control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word spindle [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 If bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1, set the P code to select each spindle under multi-...

  • Page 993

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 965 - Note NOTE Signals used to operate the spindle control unit are not influenced by path spindle command selection signals; process them with an PMC Ladder program, if required. (Example: SFRA<G070.5> is always a forward rotation command to the f...

  • Page 994

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 966 - 8.8 MEMORY COMMON TO PATHS Overview In a multipath system, this function enables data within the specified range to be accessed as data common to all paths. The data includes tool compensation memory and custom macro common variables. Explanation -...

  • Page 995

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 967 - - Custom macro common variables All or part of custom macro common variables #100 to #149 (or #199) and #500 to #599 (or #999) can be used as common data by setting parameters Nos. 6036 (#100 to #149 (, #199, or #499)) and 6037 (#500 to #599 (or #999...

  • Page 996

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 968 - compensation numbers more than the number of compensation values usable for each path are specified, an alarm is issued. For example, 64 tool compensation sets are used, 20 sets may be allocated to path 1, 30 sets to path 2, and 14 sets to path 3. All ...

  • Page 997

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 969 - 6036 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #100 to #199 (#499) ) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0...

  • Page 998

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 970 - NOTE 1 To use up to #999, the option for adding custom macro common variables is required. 2 When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is not used. Reference item Manual name Item name USER’S MANUAL (B-63944EN) Memory common to p...

  • Page 999

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 971 - 8.9 PATH SINGLE BLOCK CHECK FUNCTION Overview In multi-path control, each of the paths has single block command signals, so that their respective automatic operation programs can be brought to a single block stop. Even if, however, the single block c...

  • Page 1000

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 972 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8100 DSB [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit machine group # 6 DSB The inter-path single block check function is: 0: Disabled. When a single block stop occurs with a path, no single block sto...

  • Page 1001

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 973 - 8.10 PATH SELECTION/DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH NAMES Overview Path selection specifies whether operations performed using the MDI panel are for each path. The operations, as used here, include displaying and setting data items (such as tool compensation...

  • Page 1002

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 974 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8100 IAL RST [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit machine group # 0 RST The pressing of the reset key on the MDI panel is: 0: Valid for all paths within the same machine group. 1: Valid only fo...

  • Page 1003

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 975 - 3141 Path name (1st character) 3142 Path name (2nd character) 3143 Path name (3rd character) 3144 Path name (4th character) 3145 Path name (5th character) 3146 Path name (6th character) 3147 Path name (7th character) [Input type] Paramet...

  • Page 1004

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 976 - 8.11 LOADER CONTROL FUNCTION Overview The loader control function is part of the multipath control function, and is used to control the target of a non-machining operation (peripheral device such as a loader). To use loader control, specify the path ...

  • Page 1005

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 977 - - Emergency stop NOTE In a loader path as well, the X address emergency stop signal follows the settings of the machine group. That is, the signal address is one of X8.4, X8.0, and X8.2 in accordance with the machine group, as in a normal path. To u...

  • Page 1006

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 978 - - Path selection With the setting of LSL, bit 0 of parameter No. 8104, you can select between the following two path selection methods: • Type A Make a selection with a path selection signal (HEAD (G063.0), HEAD2 (G062.7) , or HEAD3,4 (G408.1,2)). ...

  • Page 1007

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 979 - Example) For a 4-path system in which the first and fourth are normal paths and the second and third are loader paths • When the loader control selection signal is "0", pressing and holding down "SHIFT" and then pressing "HE...

  • Page 1008

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 980 - Signal Path selection signals (tool post selection signals) HEAD<G063.0>,HEAD2,<G062.7>HEAD3,4<G408.1,2> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Used to specify the path used with the MDI panel. [Operation] Operations from the M...

  • Page 1009

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 981 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G062 HEAD2 G063 HEAD G251 LCBS G408 HEAD4 HEAD3 Parameter The following describes those parameters that must be set especially for loader paths. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0984...

  • Page 1010

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 982 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3402 FPM [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 FPM At power-on time or in the cleared state: 0: G99 or G95 mode (feed per revolution) is set. 1: G98 or G94 mode (feed per minute) is set. NOTE ...

  • Page 1011

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 983 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8104 LSL [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 0 LSL A loader path screen is selected by: 0: Path selectio...

  • Page 1012

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 984 - Differences in specifications from the Series16i/18i/21i - PMC For the loader control of the Series16i/18i/21i, a loader-only PMC is mounted on the loader control board, but is not mounted on this CNC. To create a similar configuration, use a multipa...

  • Page 1013

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 985 - Specification list The functions that can be used with a loader path are as follows: A : Standard B : Option C : Function included in another option - : Not Available Item Specifications Milling path Lathe pathControlled axis Maximum number of loader ...

  • Page 1014

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 986 - Item Specifications Milling path Lathe pathManual reference position return A A Reference position setting without DOG A A Reference point setting with mechanical stopper B B Reference position shift A A 1-unit / each path B B Manual handle fe...

  • Page 1015

    B-63943EN-1/02 8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL - 987 - Item Specifications Milling path Lathe path 9 B B Max. programmable dimension ±9 digit (R,I,J and K is ±12digit) A A Program file name 32 characters A A Sequence number N8 digit A A Absolute/incremental programming Combined use in the same block ...

  • Page 1016

    8.MULTI-PATH CONTROL B-63943EN-1/02 - 988 - Item Specifications Milling path Lathe pathEditing operation 64Kbyte A A 128Kbyte B B 256Kbyte B B 512Kbyte B B 1Mbyte B B 2Mbyte B B 4Mbyte B B Part program storage size (Specify total of part program storage size of each path) 8Mbyte B B 63 ...

  • Page 1017

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 989 - 9 5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION

  • Page 1018

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 990 - 9.1 TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL FOR 5-AXIS MACHINING Overview On a 5-axis machine having two rotation axes that turn a tool or table, this function performs tool length compensation constantly, even in the middle of a block, and exerts control s...

  • Page 1019

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 991 - X'Y'Z'BAX'Y'Z'Tool center point pathY'X'Z' Fig. 9.1 (b) Path of the tool center point

  • Page 1020

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 992 - When a coordinate system fixed on the table is used as the programming coordinate system, programming can be performed without worrying about the rotation of the table because the programming coordinate system does not move with respect to the ...

  • Page 1021

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 993 - Example)Machine configuration: The A-axis is the rotation axis for controlling the tool.The B-axis is the rotation axis for controlling the table.Program: Created using the programming coordinate system.X'Y'Z'Workpiece coordinatesystem used wh...

  • Page 1022

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 994 - <2> Table rotation type machine<3> Mixed type machine<1> Tool rotation type machineXCBZYBCXZYBYXZC Fig. 9.1 (d) Three types of 5-axis machine

  • Page 1023

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 995 - There are two types, as described below, one of which is used depending on how the direction of the tool axis is specified. (1) Type 1 The block end point of the rotation axes is specified (e.g. A, B, C). The CNC performs tool length compensa...

  • Page 1024

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 996 - About Parameters (1) Machine configuration When parameters are set, it is important to determine the target machine configuration for parameter setting. The following explains machine configuration. - Master and slave When there are two ro...

  • Page 1025

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 997 - - When the rotation axes of the table do not intersect Explained below is a mechanism in which the table rotation centers do not intersect. In the mechanism shown in the following example, the master and slave do not intersect each other. (Fi...

  • Page 1026

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 998 - - When the first rotation axis of the tool and the tool axis do not intersect Explained below is a mechanism in which the tool axis (spindle rotation center axis) and the first rotation axis of the tool do not intersect. When both the master a...

  • Page 1027

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 999 - - Tool length offset value and setting in parameter No. 19666 A sum of the tool length offset value (to be set on the offset setting screen) and the setting in parameter No. 19666 (including the positive or negative sign) is assumed to be the ...

  • Page 1028

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1000 - CAUTION In a machine having a rotating tool, if the intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the tool rotation axis (parameter Nos. 19709 to 19714) is not 0, the point indicated as the controlled point in the above figure is not...

  • Page 1029

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1001 - (2) Examples of setting parameters There are many parameters related to this function. Therefore, it is recommended that parameters for a target machine be set based on some examples. Those examples are given below. <1> Example of set...

  • Page 1030

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1002 - Parameter No. Setting example Description 19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting 19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift 19666 2.0 Tool holder offset value 19667 X0 Y0 Z0 Controlled-point shift vector 19680 2 Mechanical unit ty...

  • Page 1031

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1003 - <2> Example of setting parameters for a table rotation type machine Shown below is an example of setting parameters for a table rotation type machine. Rotation axis A is a table rotation axis (master) on the X-axis. Rotation axis B is a...

  • Page 1032

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1004 - Parameter No. Setting example Description 19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting 19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift 19666 2.0 Tool holder offset value 19667 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 Controlled-point shift vector 19680 12 Mechanical ...

  • Page 1033

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1005 - <3> Example of setting parameters for a mixed-type machine In the machine explained in this example, the first aixs is X, the second axis is Y, the third axis is Z, the fourth axis is A, the fifth axis is B, and the sixth axis is C. Sho...

  • Page 1034

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1006 - Parameter No. Setting example Description 19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting 19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift 19666 2.0 Tool holder offset value 19667 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 Controlled-point shift vector 19680 21 Mechanical ...

  • Page 1035

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1007 - Parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1403 HTG [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 5 HTG The feedrate of helical interpolation, helical involute interpolation, or three-dimensional circular interpolation is: 0: ...

  • Page 1036

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1008 - # 7 HEL In type 2 of tool center point control for 5-axis machining, when the tool is tilted in the advancing direction by the Q command, a helical interpolation block is executed as follows: 0: The tool is tilted in a direction tangent to...

  • Page 1037

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1009 - NOTE When the machine has no rotation axis for rotating the tool (when parameter No. 19680 is set to 12 to specify the table rotation type), the controlled point is not shifted regardless of the setting of this parameter. 19666 Tool holder...

  • Page 1038

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1010 - 19680 Mechanical unit type [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 21 Specify the type of the mechanical unit. PRM19680 Mechanical unit type Controlled rotation axis Master and slave 0 Mechanism having ...

  • Page 1039

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1011 - 19681 Controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis. For a hypothetical a...

  • Page 1040

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1012 - 19683 Inclination angle when the first rotation axis is an inclined axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] The increment system of the reference axis is to be followed. [Vali...

  • Page 1041

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1013 - 19685 Rotation angle when the first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data ra...

  • Page 1042

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1014 - 19688 Inclination angle when the second rotation axis is inclined [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 ...

  • Page 1043

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1015 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19696 RFC WKP IA2 IA1 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 IA1 0: The first rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis. 1: The first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis. If IA1 is 1, set...

  • Page 1044

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1016 - 19697 Reference tool axis direction [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 3 Set the tool axis direction in the machine coordinate system when the rotation axes for controlling the tool are all at 0 deg...

  • Page 1045

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1017 - 19698 Angle when the reference tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RA) 19699 Angle when the reference tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RB) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree ...

  • Page 1046

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1018 - 19700 Rotary table position (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19701 Rotary table position (Y-axis of the basic three axes) 19702 Rotary table position (Z-axis of the basic three axes) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path ...

  • Page 1047

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1019 - 19703 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19704 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (Y-axis of the basic three ax...

  • Page 1048

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1020 - 19709 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19710 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis (Y-axis of the basic three axes) 19711 Intersecti...

  • Page 1049

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1021 - 19712 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19713 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (Y-axis of the basic three axes...

  • Page 1050

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1022 - 19741 Upper limit of the movement range of the first rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9...

  • Page 1051

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1023 - 19744 Lower limit of the movement range of the second rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] ...

  • Page 1052

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1024 - 19751 Limit of the deviation from the path (for rapid traverse) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid...

  • Page 1053

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1025 - Limitation - Manual intervention When manual intervention is made for a rotation axis while the manual absolute switch is off, the compensation vector is calculated using the position present before the manual intervention. Example: When a m...

  • Page 1054

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1026 - - Three-dimensional cutter compensation When three-dimensional cutter compensation and tool center point control are performed at the same time, set WKP of parameter No. 19696 to 1 to specify values in the workpiece coordinate system. In thi...

  • Page 1055

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1027 - - Specifiable G codes The G codes that can be specified in the tool center point control mode are listed below. Specifying a G code other than these codes results in alarm PS5421. - Positioning (G00) - Linear interpolation (G01) - Circular in...

  • Page 1056

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1028 - - Modal G codes that allow specification of tool center point control Tool center point control can be specified in the modal G code states listed below. In a modal state other than the following modal G codes, specifying tool center point co...

  • Page 1057

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1029 - Alarm and message No. Message Description PS5420 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN G43.4/G43.5 A parameter related to tool center point control is illegal. PS5421 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G43.4/G43.5An illegal command was specified in tool center point control. ...

  • Page 1058

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1030 - 9.2 MANUAL FEED FOR 5-AXIS MACHINING Overview This function enables the use of the following functions. • Manual feed for 5-axis machining - Tool axis direction handle feed/tool axis direction JOG feed/tool axis direction incremental feed ...

  • Page 1059

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1031 - 9.2.1 Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed/Tool Axis Direction JOG Feed/Tool Axis Direction Incremental Feed Overview In the tool axis direction handle feed, tool axis direction JOG feed, and tool axis direction incremental feed, the tool or tabl...

  • Page 1060

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1032 - 9.2.1.1 Tool axis direction handle feed The tool axis direction handle feed is enabled when the following four conditions are satisfied: <1> Handle mode is selected. <2> The tool axis direction feed mode signal (ALNGH) is set to...

  • Page 1061

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1033 - 9.2.1.2 Tool axis direction JOG feed/tool axis direction incremental feed The tool axis direction JOG feed or tool axis direction incremental feed is enabled when the following three conditions are satisfied: <1> JOG mode or incrementa...

  • Page 1062

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1034 - 9.2.2 Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Handle Feed/Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction JOG Feed/Tool Axis Right-Angle Direction Incremental Feed Overview In the tool axis right-angle direction handle feed, tool axis direction JOG feed, or tool axi...

  • Page 1063

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1035 - (Example) When the tool rotation axes are B-axis and C-axis and the tool axisdirection is the Z-axis directionCBZYXTool axis right-angle direction 2Tool axis directionBCTool axis right-angle direction 1YXZBC ・Latitude and longitude directi...

  • Page 1064

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1036 - If 0 is set in parameter No. 12321, the normal axis direction is set to the reference tool axis direction (parameter No. 19697). If a value other than 0 to 3 is specified in parameter No. 12321, alarm PS5459 is issued. Tool axisright-angl...

  • Page 1065

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1037 - 9.2.2.1 Tool axis right-angle direction handle feed The tool axis right-angle direction handle feed is enabled when the following four conditions are satisfied: <1> Handle mode is selected. <2> The tool axis right-angle directio...

  • Page 1066

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1038 - 9.2.2.2 Tool axis right-angle direction JOG feed/tool axis right-angle direction incremental feed The tool axis right-angle direction JOG feed or tool axis right-angle direction incremental feed is enabled when the following three conditions ...

  • Page 1067

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1039 - 9.2.3 Tool Tip Center Rotation Handle Feed/Tool Tip Center Rotation JOG Feed/Tool Tip Center Rotation Incremental Feed Overview In the tool tip center rotation handle feed, tool tip center rotation JOG feed, and tool tip center rotation incre...

  • Page 1068

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1040 - 9.2.3.1 Tool tip center rotation handle feed The tool tip center rotation handle feed is enabled when the following four conditions are satisfied: <1> Handle mode is selected. <2> The tool tip center rotation feed mode signal (RN...

  • Page 1069

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1041 - 9.2.3.2 Tool tip center rotation JOG feed/tool tip center rotation incremental feed The tool tip center rotation JOG feed or tool tip center rotation incremental feed is enabled when the following three conditions are satisfied: <1> JO...

  • Page 1070

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1042 - 9.2.3.3 Selection of the tool length offset value The tool length in manual feed for 5-axis machining is determined as explained below. (Table9.2.3.3 (a)) If bit 2 (LOD) of parameter No. 19746 is set to 0, the value set in parameter No. 1231...

  • Page 1071

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1043 - 9.2.4 Table Vertical Direction Handle Feed/Table Vertical Direction JOG Feed/Table Vertical Direction Incremental Feed Overview In the table vertical direction handle feed, table vertical direction JOG feed, and table vertical direction incre...

  • Page 1072

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1044 - 9.2.4.1 Table vertical direction handle feed The table vertical direction handle feed is enabled when the following four conditions are satisfied: <1> Handle mode is selected. <2> Both the tool axis direction feed mode signal (AL...

  • Page 1073

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1045 - 9.2.4.2 Table vertical direction JOG feed/table vertical direction incremental feed The table vertical direction JOG feed or table vertical direction incremental feed is enabled when the following three conditions are satisfied: <1> JO...

  • Page 1074

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1046 - 9.2.5 Table Horizontal Direction Handle Feed/Table Horizontal Direction JOG Feed/Table Horizontal Direction Incremental Feed Overview In the table horizontal direction handle feed, table horizontal direction JOG feed, and table horizontal dir...

  • Page 1075

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1047 - (Example) When the table rotation axis is the B-axis, and the table vertical directionis the Z-axis directionBZYXTable horizontal direction 2Table horizontal direction 1XYZBBTable vertical direction - Latitude and longitude directions When b...

  • Page 1076

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1048 - If 0 is set in parameter No. 12321, the normal axis direction is set to the tool axis direction. If a value other than 0 to 3 is specified in parameter No. 12321, alarm PS5459 is issued. Table-based vertical direction: T Table-based horizont...

  • Page 1077

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1049 - 9.2.5.1 Table horizontal direction handle feed The table horizontal direction handle feed is enabled when the following four conditions are satisfied: <1> Handle mode is selected. <2> Both the tool axis right-angle direction feed...

  • Page 1078

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1050 - 9.2.5.2 Table horizontal direction JOG feed/table horizontal direction incremental feed The table horizontal direction JOG feed or table horizontal direction incremental feed is enabled when the following three conditions are satisfied: <1...

  • Page 1079

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1051 - Signals Tool axis direction feed mode signal ALNGH <Gn023#7> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects the tool axis direction handle feed mode, tool axis direction jog feed mode, tool axis direction incremental feed mode, table...

  • Page 1080

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1052 - Tool tip center rotation feed mode signal RNDH <Gn298#2> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects the tool tip center rotation handle feed mode, tool tip center rotation jog feed mode, or tool tip center rotation incremental fe...

  • Page 1081

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1053 - Table base signal TB_BASE <Gn298#0> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects the table vertical direction mode and table horizontal direction mode. [Operation] - If this signal is set to 0: The tool axis direction handle f...

  • Page 1082

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1054 - Parameters 12310 Status of the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the first manual handle pulse generator for tool axis direction handle feed/interrupt or table vertical direction handle feed/interrupt [Input type] Parameter inpu...

  • Page 1083

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1055 - 12311 Status of the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the first manual handle pulse generator to move the tool in the first-axis direction in tool axis right-angle direction handle feed/interrupt or table horizontal direction hand...

  • Page 1084

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1056 - 12313 Status of the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the first manual handle pulse generator to perform rotation of the first rotation axis in tool tip center rotation handle feed/interrupt [Input type] Parameter input [Data t...

  • Page 1085

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1057 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 12320 JFR FLL TWD [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 TWD The directions of 5-axis machining manual feed (other than tool tip center rotation feed) when the tilted working plane command...

  • Page 1086

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1058 - 12321 Normal axis direction [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 3 For longitude or latitude direction feed in the 5-axis machining manual feed mode, this parameter sets the axis parallel to the norma...

  • Page 1087

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1059 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 13113 CFD CLR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 CLR The indication of the amount of movement by manual feed for 5-axis machining is: 0: Not cleared by a reset. 1: Cleared by a reset....

  • Page 1088

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1060 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19665 SVC SPR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 SPR The controlled point is shifted by: 0: Automatic calculation. 1: Using parameter No. 19667. SVC (bit 5 of parameter No. 19665) ...

  • Page 1089

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1061 - 19666 Tool holder offset value [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum u...

  • Page 1090

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1062 - 19680 Mechanical unit type [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 21 Specify the type of the mechanical unit. PRM19680 Mechanical unit type Controlled rotation axis Master and slave 0 Mechanism having ...

  • Page 1091

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1063 - 19681 Controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis. For a hypothetical a...

  • Page 1092

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1064 - 19683 Inclination angle when the first rotation axis is an inclined axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] The increment system of the reference axis is to be followed. [Vali...

  • Page 1093

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1065 - 19685 Rotation angle when the first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data ra...

  • Page 1094

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1066 - 19688 Inclination angle when the second rotation axis is inclined [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 ...

  • Page 1095

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1067 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19696 IA2 IA1 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 IA1 0: The first rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis. 1: The first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis. If IA1 is 1, set 0 as...

  • Page 1096

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1068 - 19697 Reference tool axis direction [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 3 Set the tool axis direction in the machine coordinate system when the rotation axes for controlling the tool are all at 0 deg...

  • Page 1097

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1069 - 19698 Angle when the reference tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RA) 19699 Angle when the reference tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RB) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree ...

  • Page 1098

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1070 - 19700 Rotary table position (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19701 Rotary table position (Y-axis of the basic three axes) 19702 Rotary table position (Z-axis of the basic three axes) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path ...

  • Page 1099

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1071 - 19703 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19704 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (Y-axis of the basic three ax...

  • Page 1100

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1072 - 19709 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19710 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis (Y-axis of the basic three axes) 19711 Intersecti...

  • Page 1101

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1073 - 19712 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19713 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (Y-axis of the basic three axes...

  • Page 1102

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1074 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19746 LOZ LOD [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 2 LOD As the tool length for 5-axis machining manual feed: 0: The value of parameter No. 12318 is used. 1: The tool length currently use...

  • Page 1103

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1075 - 9.3 TILTED PLANE MACHINING COMMAND Overview Programming for creating holes, pockets, and other figures in a datum plane tilted with respect to the workpiece would be easy if commands can be specified in a coordinate system fixed to this plane...

  • Page 1104

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1076 - XYZThe tool axis direction is the+Z-axis direction.The tool axis direction is the+Y-axis direction.The tool axis direction is the +X-axis direction. Fig. 9.3 (b) Tool axis direction

  • Page 1105

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1077 - This function regards the direction normal to the machining plane as the +Z-axis direction of the feature coordinate system. After the G53.1 command, the tool is controlled so that it remains perpendicular to the machining plane. Coordinate ...

  • Page 1106

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1078 - This function is applicable to the following machine configurations. (See Fig. 9.3 (d).) <1> Tool rotation type machine controlled with two tool rotation axes <2> Table rotation type machine controlled with two table rotation ax...

  • Page 1107

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1079 - About parameters (1) Machine configuration When parameters are set, it is important to determine the target machine configuration for parameter setting. The following explains the machine configuration. - Master and slave When there are two...

  • Page 1108

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1080 - - When the rotation axes of the table do not intersect Explained below is a mechanism in which the table rotation centers do not intersect. In the mechanism shown in the following example, the master and slave do not intersect each other. (F...

  • Page 1109

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1081 - - When the first rotation axis of the tool and the tool axis do not intersect Explained below is a mechanism in which the tool axis (spindle rotation center axis) and the first rotation axis of the tool do not intersect. When both the master ...

  • Page 1110

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1082 - (2) Examples of setting parameters There are many parameters related to this function. Therefore, it is recommended that parameters for a target machine be set based on some examples. These examples are given below. <1> Example of se...

  • Page 1111

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1083 - Parameter No. Setting example Description 19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting 19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift 19666 2.0 Tool holder offset value 19667 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 Controlled-point shift vector 19680 21 Mechanical ...

  • Page 1112

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1084 - <2> Example of setting parameters for a tool rotation type machine Shown below is an example of setting parameters for a tool rotation type machine. Rotation axis C is a tool rotation axis (master) on the Z-axis. Rotation axis B is a to...

  • Page 1113

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1085 - Parameter No. Setting example Description 19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting 19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift 19666 2.0 Tool holder offset value 19667 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 Controlled-point shift vector 19680 2 Mechanical u...

  • Page 1114

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1086 - <3> Example of setting parameters for a table rotation type machine Shown below is an example of setting parameters for a table rotation type machine. Rotation axis A is a table rotation axis (master) on the X-axis. Rotation axis B is a...

  • Page 1115

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1087 - Parameter No. Setting example Description 19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting 19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift 19666 2.0 Tool holder offset value 19667 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 Controlled-point shift vector 19680 12 Mechanical ...

  • Page 1116

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1088 - Parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19665 SVC SPR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 SPR The controlled point is shifted by: 0: Automatic calculation. 1: Using parameter No. 19667. SVC (bit 5 of parameter ...

  • Page 1117

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1089 - 19666 Tool holder offset value [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum u...

  • Page 1118

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1090 - 19680 Mechanical unit type [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 21 Specify the type of the mechanical unit. PRM19680 Mechanical unit type Controlled rotation axis Master and slave 0 Mechanism having...

  • Page 1119

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1091 - 19681 Controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis. For a hypothetical ...

  • Page 1120

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1092 - 19684 Rotation direction of the first rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 1 Set the direction in which the first rotation axis rotates as a mechanical motion when a positive move comman...

  • Page 1121

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1093 - 19687 Axis direction of the second rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 6 Set the axis direction of the second rotation axis. 1: On X-axis 2: On Y-axis 3: On Z-axis 4: On axis tilted...

  • Page 1122

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1094 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19696 IA2 IA1 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 IA1 0: The first rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis. 1: The first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis. If IA1 is 1, set 0 as...

  • Page 1123

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1095 - 19697 Reference tool axis direction [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 3 Set the tool axis direction in the machine coordinate system when the rotation axes for controlling the tool are all at 0 deg...

  • Page 1124

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1096 - 19700 Rotary table position (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19701 Rotary table position (Y-axis of the basic three axes) 19702 Rotary table position (Z-axis of the basic three axes) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path ...

  • Page 1125

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1097 - 19703 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19704 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (Y-axis of the basic three ax...

  • Page 1126

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1098 - 19709 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19710 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis (Y-axis of the basic three axes) 19711 Intersecti...

  • Page 1127

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1099 - 19712 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19713 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (Y-axis of the basic three axes...

  • Page 1128

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1100 - Basic restrictions - Basic restrictions The restrictions imposed on three-dimensional coordinate conversion also apply to the tilted working plane command. The following presents the restrictions to bear in mind in particular: - Increment ...

  • Page 1129

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1101 - - Relationships with other modal commands G41, G42, and G40 (cutter compensation), G43, G49 (tool length compensation), G51.1 and G50.1 (programmable mirror image), and canned cycle commands must have nesting relationships with G68.2. In othe...

  • Page 1130

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1102 - T - Coordinate system rotation cancel or 3-dimensional coordinate conversion mode off (G69.1) - Feed per minute (G98 (G94)) - Feed per revolution (G99 (G94)) - Modal G codes that allow specification of a tilted working plane command A tilted...

  • Page 1131

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1103 - 9.4 INCLINED ROTATION AXIS CONTROL Overview The conventional inclined working plane command/5-axis machining tool center point control function can be used only for those machines whose tool rotation axis or table rotation axis is parallel to...

  • Page 1132

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1104 - An example of a tool rotation type machine is explained below. (See Fig. 9.4 (b).) The machine shown in Fig. 9.4 (b) has rotation axis B (master) that turns around the Y-axis and rotation axis C (slave) whose Y-axis is inclined at an angle of...

  • Page 1133

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1105 - An example of a table rotation type machine is explained below. (See Fig. 9.4 (c).) The machine shown in Fig. 9.4 (c) has rotation axis B (master) whose Y-axis is inclined at an angle of -45 degrees on the Y-Z plane and rotation axis C (slav...

  • Page 1134

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1106 - An example of a mixed-type machine is explained below. (See Fig. 9.4 (d).) The machine shown in Fig. 9.4 (d) has table rotation axis B whose Y-axis is inclined at an angle of -45 degrees on the Y-Z plane and tool rotation axis C that turns a...

  • Page 1135

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1107 - About parameters (1) Examples of setting parameters There are many parameters related to this function. Therefore, it is recommended that parameters for a target machine be set based on some examples. These examples are given below. <1&g...

  • Page 1136

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1108 - Parameter No. Setting example Description 19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting 19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift 19666 5.000 Tool holder offset value 19667 X0 Y0 Z0 Controlled-point shift vector 19680 2 Mechanical unit ...

  • Page 1137

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1109 - <2> Example of setting parameters for a table rotation type machine In the machine explained in this example, the first axis is X, the second axis is Y, the third axis is Z, the fourth axis is A, the fifth axis is B, and the sixth axis ...

  • Page 1138

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1110 - Parameter No. Setting example Description 19680 12 Mechanical unit type 19681 5(B) Controlled axis number for the first rotation axis 19682 5 Axis direction of the first rotation axis 19683 -45.000 Inclination angle of the first rotation axis ...

  • Page 1139

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1111 - <3> Example of setting parameters for a mixed-type machine In the machine explained in this example, the first axis is X, the second axis is Y, the third axis is Z, the fourth axis is A, the fifth axis is B, and the sixth axis is C. Sho...

  • Page 1140

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1112 - Parameter No. Setting example Description 19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting 19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift 19666 5.000 Tool holder offset value 19667 X0 Y0 Z0 Controlled-point shift vector 19680 21 Mechanical unit...

  • Page 1141

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1113 - Parameters - Parameters dedicated to inclined rotation axis control 19682 Axis direction of the first rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 6 Specify the axis direction of the first rota...

  • Page 1142

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1114 - 19683 Inclination angle when the first rotation axis is an inclined axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] The increment system of the reference axis is to be followed. [Vali...

  • Page 1143

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1115 - 19688 Inclination angle when the second rotation axis is an inclined axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data r...

  • Page 1144

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1116 - Limitation During inclined rotation axis control, the operations of tool center point control for 5-axis machining and the tilted working plane command are the same as the operations performed when inclined rotation axis control is not used. F...

  • Page 1145

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1117 - 9.5 CUTTER COMPENSATION FOR 5-AXIS MACHINING Overview For machines having multiple rotation axes for freely controlling the orientation of a tool axis, this function calculates a tool vector from the positions of these rotation axes. The fun...

  • Page 1146

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1118 - - Machine configuration This function is applicable to the following machine configurations: <1> Tool rotation type machine controlled with two tool rotation axes <2> Table rotation type machine controlled with two table rotation...

  • Page 1147

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1119 - 9.5.1 Cutter Compensation in Tool Rotation Type Machine Overview In a 5-axis machine having two tool rotation axes as shown in the figure below, this function can perform cutter compensation. Shown below is a 5-axis machine that has tool rota...

  • Page 1148

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1120 - 9.5.1.1 Tool side offset Overview This type of cutter compensation performs three-dimensional compensation in a plane (compensation plane) perpendicular to the tool vector. Compensation planeYZXTool vectorCutter compensationamountTool center...

  • Page 1149

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1121 - 9.5.1.3 Tool tip position (cutting point) command Overview For machines having a rotation axis for rotating a tool, this function performs three-dimensional cutter compensation at the tool tip position if a programmed point is specified with ...

  • Page 1150

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1122 - Explanation - Operation explanation This function calculates a vector at the tool tip position for the three-dimensional cutter compensation function as described below. (1) Convert the programmed coordinates from a programmed point (pivot p...

  • Page 1151

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1123 - - Operation example For a machine configuration in which the tool axis direction is along the Z-axis and the rotation axes are the B and C axes (Fig. 9.5.1.3 (b)) LC: Parameter (No. 19632) specifying the distance from the programmed point (p...

  • Page 1152

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1124 - CAUTION 1 This function is disabled for leading edge offset. 2 With a command for a rotation axis only, this function does not calculate a cutter compensation vector. 3 This function cannot be used in the three-dimensional coordinate conver...

  • Page 1153

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1125 - 9.5.1.4 Examples of setting parameters In the machine explained in this example, the first axis is X, the second axis is Y, the third axis is Z, the fourth axis is A, the fifth axis is B, and the sixth axis is C. Shown below is an example of ...

  • Page 1154

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1126 - Parameter No. Setting example Description 19680 2 Mechanical unit type 19681 6(C) Controlled axis number for the first rotation axis 19682 3(Z) Axis direction of the first rotation axis 19684 0 Rotation direction of the first rotation axis 196...

  • Page 1155

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1127 - 9.5.2 Cutter Compensation in Table Rotation Type Machine Overview Cutter compensation can be performed for a 5-axis machine having a rotary table as shown in the figure below. Shown below is a 5-axis machine that has table rotation axis A on ...

  • Page 1156

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1128 - Examples of setting parameters In the machine explained in this example, the first axis is X, the second axis is Y, the third axis is Z, the fourth axis is A, the fifth axis is B, and the sixth axis is C. Shown below is an example of setting p...

  • Page 1157

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1129 - Parameter No. Setting example Description 19680 12 Mechanical unit type 19681 4(A) Controlled axis number for the first rotation axis 19682 1(X) Axis direction of the first rotation axis 19684 1 Rotation direction of the first rotation axis 19...

  • Page 1158

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1130 - 9.5.3 Cutter Compensation in Mixed-Type Machine Overview This function can perform cutter compensation for 5-axis machining in a 5-axis machine having a rotary table and a tool axis as shown in the figure below. Shown below is a 5-axis machin...

  • Page 1159

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1131 - Examples of setting parameters In the machine explained in this example, the first axis is X, the second axis is Y, the third axis is Z, the fourth axis is A, the fifth axis is B, and the sixth axis is C. Shown below is an example of setting p...

  • Page 1160

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1132 - Parameter No. Setting example Description 19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting 19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift 19666 2.0 Tool holder offset value 19667 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 Controlled-point shift vector 19680 21 Mechanical ...

  • Page 1161

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1133 - 9.5.4 Restrictions 9.5.4.1 Restrictions common to machine configurations - Interference check In the mode for cutter compensation for 5-axis machining, interference checks are made using a specified position in the workpiece coordinate syst...

  • Page 1162

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1134 - - Unavailable commands In the mode for cutter compensation for 5-axis machining, the functions listed below cannot be specified. Specifying any of these functions results in an alarm. - Hypothetical axis interpolation -G07 - Circular interp...

  • Page 1163

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1135 - - Unavailable functions If the following function is specified in the three-dimensional cutter compensation mode, a warning message is issued: - MDI interruption If one of the following functions is specified in the three-dimensional cutter ...

  • Page 1164

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1136 - 9.5.4.2 Restriction on tool rotation type - Unavailable commands (leading edge offset) In the G41.3 mode, the following commands cannot be specified: - G functions of group 01 other than G00 and G01 - Use with tool center point control If ...

  • Page 1165

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1137 - 9.5.4.3 Restriction on machine configurations having table rotation axes (table rotation type and mixed-type) - Unavailable commands For machines having table rotation axes, the following commands cannot be specified during cutter compensati...

  • Page 1166

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1138 - If the setting of the programming coordinate system differs between cutter compensation for 5-axis machining and tool center point control for 5-axis machining, specifying both functions together results in alarm PS5460. (See the following ta...

  • Page 1167

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1139 - compensation for 5-axis machining, the Q command specified earlier becomes valid. Deceleration at a corner Under cutter compensation for 5-axis machining, the controlled point may move along a curve even if a straight-line command is issue...

  • Page 1168

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1140 - Modal G codes that allow specification of cutter compensation for 5-axis machining When the table coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system, cutter compensation for 5-axis machining can be specified in the modal G code s...

  • Page 1169

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1141 - 9.5.5 Parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19605 NIC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 5 NIC After the compensation plane is changed in three-dimensional cutter compensation, interference checks are: 0: Made....

  • Page 1170

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1142 - # 5 PRI Among multiple end point candidates that exist when a movement is made on a rotation axis by a command such as I, J, and K when a slanted surface machining command is specified under tool tip point control for 5-axis machining (typ...

  • Page 1171

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1143 - For example, let the included angle between VT and VM be θ (0≤θ≤180) and the angle set in this parameter be ∆θ. Then, θ is determined as follows: If 0≤θ≤∆θ: θ=0° If (180−∆θ)≤θ≤180: θ=180° If (90−∆θ)...

  • Page 1172

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1144 - α degreesVaVb 19636 Angle used to determine whether to execute the interference check/avoidance function of cutter compensation for 5-axis machining [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] deg [Minimum unit of d...

  • Page 1173

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1145 - 19680 Mechanical unit type [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 21 Specify the type of the mechanical unit. PRM19680 Mechanical unit type Controlled rotation axis Master and slave 0 Mechanism having ...

  • Page 1174

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1146 - 19681 Controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis. For a hypothetical a...

  • Page 1175

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1147 - 19683 Inclination angle when the first rotation axis is an inclined axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] The increment system of the reference axis is to be followed. [Vali...

  • Page 1176

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1148 - 19685 Rotation angle when the first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data ra...

  • Page 1177

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1149 - 19688 Inclination angle when the second rotation axis is inclined [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 ...

  • Page 1178

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1150 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19696 WKP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 5 WKP For a 5-axis machine having a table rotation axis, as the programming coordinate system for tool tip point control for 5-axis machinin...

  • Page 1179

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1151 - 19697 Reference tool axis direction [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 3 Set the tool axis direction in the machine coordinate system when the rotation axes for controlling the tool are all at 0 deg...

  • Page 1180

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1152 - 19698 Angle when the reference tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RA) 19699 Angle when the reference tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RB) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree ...

  • Page 1181

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1153 - 19700 Rotary table position (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19701 Rotary table position (Y-axis of the basic three axes) 19702 Rotary table position (Z-axis of the basic three axes) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path ...

  • Page 1182

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1154 - 19703 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19704 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotation axes of the table (Y-axis of the basic three ax...

  • Page 1183

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1155 - 19709 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19710 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and tool rotation axis (Y-axis of the basic three axes) 19711 Intersecti...

  • Page 1184

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1156 - 19712 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (X-axis of the basic three axes) 19713 Intersection offset vector between the second and first rotation axes of the tool (Y-axis of the basic three axes...

  • Page 1185

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1157 - 19741 Upper limit of the movement range of the first rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9...

  • Page 1186

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1158 - 19744 Lower limit of the movement range of the second rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] ...

  • Page 1187

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1159 - 9.5.6 Alarm and Message No. Message Description PS0033 NO INTERSECTION AT CUTTER COMPENSATION The intersection cannot be obtained by the intersection calculation in cutter or tool-nose radius compensation. Correct the program. PS0034 NO CIRC...

  • Page 1188

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1160 - No. Message Description PS5460 ILLEGAL USE OF TRC FOR 5-AXIS MACHINE - In the cutter compensation mode for 5-axis machining (except the tool side offset function for a tool rotation type machine), a move command other than G00/G01 is specified...

  • Page 1189

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1161 - 9.6 TOOL DIRECTION THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION Overview In a 5-axis machine having two rotation axes, this function allows you to compensate the tool for expansion or shrinkage due to heat in the tool directions specified with the rotat...

  • Page 1190

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1162 - 4 Upon completion of reading, the CNC sets the thermal displacement compensation reading completion signal, THREND, to "1". 5 When the thermal displacement compensation reading completion signal, THREND, is set to "1", set ...

  • Page 1191

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1163 - For negative thermal displacement compensation, this function compensates the tool for "shrinkage". As thermal displacement compensation data, therefore, set a positive value if the tool has expanded due to thermal expansion in relat...

  • Page 1192

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1164 - (2) If the data is negative (the tool has "shrunk") Machine coordinatesystem +X+Z ε εzD εx D: Thermal displacement compensation data ε: Thermal displacement compensation εx: X-direction thermal displacement compen...

  • Page 1193

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1165 - Note NOTE 1 Thermal displacement compensation is not canceled with a reset. 2 Thermal displacement compensation is invalidated when the power is turned off. 3 All the Detection units for the axes for which compensation with this function is en...

  • Page 1194

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1166 - Diagnosis screen 705 Thermal displacement compensation for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] -32768 to +32767 Displays the compensation for each axis subject to tool direction thermal displa...

  • Page 1195

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1167 - Thermal displacement compensation strobe signal THSTB<Gn356#1> [Classification] Input signal [Function] When this signal becomes "1", thermal displacement compensation data is read. Thermal displacement compensation check si...

  • Page 1196

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1168 - Parameter 19680 Mechanical unit type [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 21 Specify the type of the mechanical unit. Parameter No. 19680 Mechanical unit type Controlled rotation axis Master and slave...

  • Page 1197

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1169 - 19681 Controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Set the controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis. For a hypothetical a...

  • Page 1198

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1170 - 19683 Inclination angle when the first rotation axis is an inclined axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] The increment system of the reference axis is to be followed. [Vali...

  • Page 1199

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1171 - 19685 Rotation angle when the first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data ra...

  • Page 1200

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1172 - 19688 Inclination angle when the second rotation axis is inclined [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 ...

  • Page 1201

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1173 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19696 IA2 IA1 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 IA1 0: The first rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis. 1: The first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis. If IA1 is 1, set 0 as...

  • Page 1202

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1174 - 19697 Reference tool axis direction [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 3 Set the tool axis direction in the machine coordinate system when the rotation axes for controlling the tool are all at 0 deg...

  • Page 1203

    B-63943EN-1/02 9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION - 1175 - 19698 Angle when the reference tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RA) 19699 Angle when the reference tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RB) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] Degree ...

  • Page 1204

    9.5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1176 - Alarm and message Number Message Description DS1931 MACHINE PARAMETER INCORRECT One of parameters Nos. 19665 to 19667 and Nos.19680 to 19744 used to configure the machine contains an error.DS1932 DI.THML SIGNAL ON One of the parameters used to...

  • Page 1205

    B-63943EN-1/02 10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 1177 - 10 AUXILIARY FUNCTION

  • Page 1206

    10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1178 - 10.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION Overview - Auxiliary function (M code) When an M code address is programmed, a code signal and a strobe signal are sent to the machine. The machine uses these signals to turn on or off its functions. U...

  • Page 1207

    B-63943EN-1/02 10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 1179 - When the second auxiliary function with a decimal point is specified, alarm PS0007 is issued. When the second auxiliary function is specified with a negative value, alarm PS0006 is issued. 2. When a command with a decimal point or a negative comma...

  • Page 1208

    10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1180 - Table 10.1 (a) Magnifications for an output value when the second auxiliary function with a decimal point is specified for desktop calculator decimal point input Setting unit Parameter AUX = 0 Parameter AUX = 1 Reference axis: IS-A100× 100×Referen...

  • Page 1209

    B-63943EN-1/02 10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 1181 - Each function uses different program addresses and different signals, but they all input and output signals in the same way, as described below. (A sample procedure for the auxiliary function is described below. The procedures for the spindle functi...

  • Page 1210

    10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1182 - Example 1 Single auxiliary function specified in a block <1> <2> <3> <5> <6> <7> <8> <9>(*2)TMFTFINM command (independent)MxxxCode signalsM00 to M31Strobe signalsMFPMC side ac...

  • Page 1211

    B-63943EN-1/02 10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 1183 - Signal End signal FIN<Gn004#3> [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal reports the completion of a auxiliary function, spindle function, tool function, 2nd auxiliary function, or external operation function. [Operation] For th...

  • Page 1212

    10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1184 - Decode M signals DM00<Fn009#7>,DM01<Fn009#6>,DM02<Fn009#5>,DM30<Fn009#4> [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals report particular auxiliary functions are specified. The auxiliary functions in a command progr...

  • Page 1213

    B-63943EN-1/02 10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 1185 - Spindle function code signals S00 to S31<Fn022 to Fn025> Spindle function strobe signal SF<Fn007#2> [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals report that spindle functions have been specified. [Output condition] For the o...

  • Page 1214

    10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1186 - Fn024 S23 S22 S21 S20 S19 S18 S17 S16 Fn025 S31 S30 S29 S28 S27 S26 S25 S24 Fn026 T07 T06 T05 T04 T03 T02 T01 T00 Fn027 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T09 T08 Fn028 T23 T22 T21 T20 T19 T18 T17 T16 Fn029 T31 T30 T29 T28 T27 T26 T25 T24 Fn030 B07...

  • Page 1215

    B-63943EN-1/02 10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 1187 - 3011 Acceptable width of M, S, T, and B function completion signal (FIN) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the minimum signal width of the valid M, S, T, and B function com...

  • Page 1216

    10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1188 - 3033 Allowable number of digits for the B code (second auxiliary function) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to 8 Set the allowable number of digits for the second auxiliary function. When 0 is set, the allo...

  • Page 1217

    B-63943EN-1/02 10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 1189 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3405 AUX [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 AUX When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input format or with a decimal point, the multiplication...

  • Page 1218

    10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1190 - 3421 Range specification 1 of M codes that do not perform buffering (lower limit) 3422 Range specification 1 of M codes that do not perform buffering (upper limit) 3423 Range specification 2 of M codes that do not perform buffering (lower limit) 3...

  • Page 1219

    B-63943EN-1/02 10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 1191 - 3436 Range specification 1 of second auxiliary function codes that do not perform buffering (lower limit) 3437 Range specification 1 of second auxiliary function codes that do not perform buffering (upper limit) 3438 Range specification 2 of sec...

  • Page 1220

    10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1192 - # 7 BDX When ASCII code is called using the same address as the address for the second auxiliary function (specified by parameter No. 3460), this parameter prevents the argument unit used when the option for the second auxiliary function is selec...

  • Page 1221

    B-63943EN-1/02 10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 1193 - Note NOTE 1 When a move command and auxiliary function are specified in the same block, the commands are executed in one of the following two ways: (1) Simultaneous execution of the move command and auxiliary function commands. (2) Executing auxilia...

  • Page 1222

    10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1194 - 10.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK Overview Inhibits execution of a specified M, S, T and B function. That is, code signals and strobe signals are not issued. This function is used to check a program. Signal Auxiliary function lock signal AFL<Gn005#6...

  • Page 1223

    B-63943EN-1/02 10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 1195 - Reference item Manual name Item name USER’S MANUAL (B-63944EN) Machine lock and auxiliary function lock

  • Page 1224

    10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1196 - 10.3 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK Overview So far, one block has been able to contain only one M code. However, this function allows up to three M codes to be contained in one block. Up to three M codes specified in a block are simultaneou...

  • Page 1225

    B-63943EN-1/02 10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 1197 - A time chart for this procedure is shown below: TFINTMFM command (MaaMbbMcc;)Code signalsM00 to M31Strobe signalMFPMC side operationEnd signalFINCode signalsM200 to M215Strobe signalMF2PMC side operationCode signalsM300 to M315Strobe signalMF3PMC sid...

  • Page 1226

    10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1198 - Caution CAUTION 1 M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, or M198 must not be specified together with another M code. 2 Some M codes other than M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, M99, and M198 cannot be specified together with other M codes; each of those M codes must...

  • Page 1227

    B-63943EN-1/02 10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 1199 - 10.4 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE Overview To accelerate M/S/T/B function execution, the high-speed M/S/T/B interface has simplified the transfer of the strobe and completion signals of the M/S/T/B functions. Whether to use the usual system or high-...

  • Page 1228

    10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1200 - MxxMyyNext blockCode signalsStrobe signal MFPMC side operationAuxiliary functioncompletion signal MFIN Fig. 10.4 (a) Timing chart of the high-speed system MxxMyyNext blockCode signalsStrobe signal MFPMC side operationCompletion signal FIN Fig. 10....

  • Page 1229

    B-63943EN-1/02 10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION - 1201 - Spindle function completion signal SFIN<Gn005#2> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Reports that the execution of a spindle speed function using the high-speed M/S/T/B interface is completed. [Operation] For the operation and procedure...

  • Page 1230

    10.AUXILIARY FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1202 - Note NOTE 1 The strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF are "0" when the power is turned on. 2 When the control unit is reset, MF, SF, TF, and BF are set to "0". Reference item Manual name Item name Auxiliary function, 2nd auxiliary fu...

  • Page 1231

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1203 - 11 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION

  • Page 1232

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1204 - 11.1 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT) Overview When up to five digits are specified after address S, code and strobe signals are sent out and used to control the spindle speed. The code signals are retained until another S code is issued. ...

  • Page 1233

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1205 - 11.2 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT Overview Spindle serial output is a spindle motor control interface. The spindle serial output can control up to eight serial spindles (up to four serial spindles per path). There are two types of spindle motor control...

  • Page 1234

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1206 - The table below lists the relationship between the spindles and functions. Serial spindle (*1) Spindle Function First spindleSecond spindle Third spindle Fourth spindle Threading/feed per revolution (synchronous feed) Available Available(*3) Avai...

  • Page 1235

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1207 - - Spindle numbers vs. spindle motors Logical spindle numbers are associated with spindle motors as follows: 1. Logical spindle numbers and amplifier numbers Logical spindle numbers indicate the order of spindles to be controlled (the logical ar...

  • Page 1236

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1208 - Example 1) When using one serial spindle in a single-path system Parameter First spindle Second spindle Third spindle Fourth spindleA/S (No.3716#0) 1 0 0 0 No.3717 1 0 0 0 Example 2) When using four serial spindles in a single-path system Para...

  • Page 1237

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1209 - All-spindle operation ready signal SRSRDY <F0034#7> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal posts that all spindles used are ready for operation. [Output condition] The signal is set to 1 when: All spindles used become read...

  • Page 1238

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1210 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F0034 SRSRDY #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn034 SRSP1R SRSP2R SRSP3R SRSP4R #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn264 SPWRN8 SPWRN7 SPWRN6 SPWRN5 SPWRN4 SPWRN3 SPWRN2 SPWRN1 Fn265 SPWRN9 - Seri...

  • Page 1239

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1211 - For second spindle #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn074 MRDYB ORCMBSFRBSRVBCTH1BCTH2B TLMHB TLMLB Gn075 RCHBRSLBINTGBSOCNB MCFNBSPSLB *ESPB ARSTB Gn076 RCHHGB MFNHGB INCMDB OVRIDB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB INDXB Gn077 MPOFB SLVB MORCM...

  • Page 1240

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1212 - For third spindle #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn204 MRDYC ORCMCSFRCSRVCCTH1CCTH2C TLMHC TLMLC Gn205 RCHCRSLCINTGCSOCNC MCFNCSPSLC *ESPC ARSTC Gn206 RCHHGC MFNHGC INCMDC OVRIDC DEFMDC NRROC ROTAC INDXC Gn207 MPOFC SLVC MORCMC...

  • Page 1241

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1213 - For fourth spindle #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn266 MRDYD ORCMDSFRDSRVDCTH1DCTH2D TLMHD TLMLD Gn267 RCHDRSLDINTGDSOCND MCFNDSPSLD *ESPD ARSTD Gn268 RCHHGD MFNHGD INCMDD OVRIDD DEFMDD NRROD ROTAD INDXD Gn269 MPOFD SLVD MORCM...

  • Page 1242

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1214 - Parameter - Settings for spindle motors and spindle numbers #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3716 A/Ss [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit spindle NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is c...

  • Page 1243

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1215 - NOTE This parameter is disabled when an extended spindle name is used. 3719 Subscript for display of a serial spindle (sub-spindle) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte spindle [Valid data range] 0 to 122 Set a subscript to be add...

  • Page 1244

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1216 - - Parameters for the serial spindle control unit Parameter Nos. 4000 to 4539: For serial spindles Although the above parameters are stored as CNC parameters, they are actually used by the spindle control unit of serial spindles. For details of ...

  • Page 1245

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1217 - Diagnosis display - Information about spindle control #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 400 SIC5 [Data type] Bit spindle SIC5 0: The spindle interface does not operate normally. 1: The spindle interface operates normally. 403 Spindle moto...

  • Page 1246

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1218 - - Indication of serial spindle load meter and speed meter 410 Spindle load meter indication (%) 411 Spindle motor speed indication (min-1) [Data type] Word spindle For correct indication of the load meter and motor speed, the following para...

  • Page 1247

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1219 - 11.3 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL Explanation This section explains the following in relation to spindle speed control: - Command flow in spindle speed control - Processing for gear change (M and T type gear selection methods) - Position coder feedb...

  • Page 1248

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1220 - - Command flow of spindle speed control The following chart summarizes spindle speed control. ← From the PMCOutput to the PMC(used for ladders)Switching in the machine← From the PMC← From the PMCMachining program, etc.↓- Processing for g...

  • Page 1249

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1221 - - S command The S command specifies the spindle speed entered from machining programs, etc. for the CNC. For constant surface speed control (during G96 mode), the CNC converts the specified surface speed to the spindle speed. M When the M type g...

  • Page 1250

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1222 - M For the machining center system, setting parameter GST (bit 1 of parameter No. 3705) enables the spindle motor to rotate at a constant speed. This function can be used for gear shifting because it maintains a constant speed of the gear change m...

  • Page 1251

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1223 - NOTE The M type gear selection method cannot be selected when one of the following functions is used: - Constant surface speed control - Multi-spindle function - Extended spindle name - Spindle control between paths T The lathe system can ...

  • Page 1252

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1224 - Upper limit ofspindle speed(Vc)Spindle motor speed command(Analog voltage command)(GR3O)GR2O(GR2O)GR1O(GR1O)Spindle speedcommand(S code input)10VABFor gear 2-stageCC×Vmax4095B×Vmax4095A×Vmax4095A×Vmin4095( ) for gear 3-stage Fig. 11.3 (a) S ...

  • Page 1253

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1225 - (ii) Gear change point during tapping cycle mode (G84, G74) In case of G84 (tapping cycle) or G74 (counter tapping cycle) the gear shift speed is changed by parameter SGT(No. 3705#3). In this case, gear shift is performed at the speed set by p...

  • Page 1254

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1226 - Spindle motor speed command(analog voltage output)GR3OGR2OGR1O10VVCVHVLABCSpindle speed command(S code input)A ×Vmin4095C ×Vmax4095B ×Vmaxh4095A ×Vmaxl4095VC:Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor.VH:Voltage...

  • Page 1255

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1227 - - Constant Vmaxh (Parameter No. 3752) related to the upper limit of spindle motor speed (min-1) with high-speed gears (medium-speed gear for 3-stage gear) Upper limit of spindle motor speed with high-speed gears Vmaxh = 4095 × Spindle motor sp...

  • Page 1256

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1228 - (ii) When Gear select signal change Gear selectsignalSFS code read0VTFINTMFTMFTo next blockFINVLSpindle speed commandVHGR3O/GR2O/GR1O In this case, the gear select signal is output; after elapse of the time constant set by parameter (TMF), the S...

  • Page 1257

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1229 - Assume that gear switching is two stage switching. If the spindle speed with the output voltage 10 V is 1000 min-1 for the low speed gear (G1) and 2000 min-1 for the high speed gear (G2), set these speeds by the parameter No. 3741, 3742. In this ...

  • Page 1258

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1230 - - Polarity of spindle speed command output The speed command output to the spindle motor is determined as described above, but the actual output polarity is determined by the CNC as follows: Parameter TCW (No.3706#7) Parameter CWM (No.3706#6) Ou...

  • Page 1259

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1231 - threading). Any number of pulses output from the position coder can be selected, and it is set in parameter No. 3720. When the gear ratio between the position coder and spindle is to be used, set the gear ratio for the position coder and spindle...

  • Page 1260

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1232 - Electrical specification of analog spindle interface The ENB1/2 signal on the analog spindle interface is an interface signal that is turned on and off under the same conditions as of the spindle enable signal at Fn001#4, and it can be used ev...

  • Page 1261

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1233 - gear select signal does not change and the command output is calculated and output to obtain the set speed at high gear. When the spindle motor speed is set by parameter GST (No. 3705#1)=1, the command output is output regardless of gear select s...

  • Page 1262

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1234 - Spindle speed arrival signal SAR<G029#4> [Classification] Input signal [Function] The SAR signal initiates cutting feed. In other words, if the signal is logical 0, cutting feed will not start. [Operation] Generally, this signal is used...

  • Page 1263

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1235 - The ENB signal can be used also for serial spindle control. Gear selection signals GR1O,GR2O,GR3O<F034#0 to #2> [Classification] Output signal [Function] The gear select signal specifies a gear stage to the PMC. [Output condition] For d...

  • Page 1264

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1236 - - Other signals Spindle speed function code signals S00 to S31<F022 to F025> (Output) Spindle speed function strobe signal SF<F007#2> (Output) See “SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTIONS” and “SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC” for these si...

  • Page 1265

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1237 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SFA EVS SGT SGB ESF 3705 SFA NSF SGT SGB GST ESF [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 ESF When the spindle control function (Spindle analog output or Spindle serial output) is us...

  • Page 1266

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1238 - # 4 EVS When the spindle control function (Spindle analog output or Spindle serial output) is used, S codes and SF are: 0: Not output for an S command. 1: Output for an S command. The output of S codes and SF for an S command in constant s...

  • Page 1267

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1239 - NOTE 1 M type The gear selection signal is not input. The CNC selects a gear based on the speed range of each gear set by a parameter beforehand according to S codes, and the selected gear is posted by outputting the gear selection signal. Mor...

  • Page 1268

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1240 - # 1 SAT Check of the spindle speed arrival signal at the start of executing the thread cutting block 0: The signal is checked only when SAR, #0 of parameter 3708, is set. 1: The signal is always checked irrespective of whether SAR is set. NO...

  • Page 1269

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1241 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3716 A/Ss [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit spindle NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 0 A/Ss Spindle motor type is : 0: Analog spi...

  • Page 1270

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1242 - 3720 Number of position coder pulses NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word spindle [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 1 t...

  • Page 1271

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1243 - 3731 Compensation value for the offset voltage of spindle speed analog output [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word spindle [Unit of data] Velo [Valid data range] -1024 to 1024 Set a compensation value for the offset voltage of spind...

  • Page 1272

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1244 - 3735 Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 4095 Set the minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor. Setting value = (Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor / Ma...

  • Page 1273

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1245 - 3741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 3742 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 3743 Maximum spindle speed for gear 3 3744 Maximum spindle speed for gear 4 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word spindle [Unit of data] min-1 [Vali...

  • Page 1274

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1246 - 3751 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 3752 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 4095 For gear switching method B, se...

  • Page 1275

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1247 - 3761 Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping 3762 Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 during tapping [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] min-1 [Valid data range]...

  • Page 1276

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1248 - 3772 Maximum spindle speed [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word spindle [Unit of data] min-1 [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed. When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum...

  • Page 1277

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1249 - 11.4 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC Overview The PMC can control the speed and polarity of each spindle motor, connected. The first to fourth spindles each have their own individual interfaces. By using a PMC ladder program, the user can cont...

  • Page 1278

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1250 - By using this expression, the spindle motor speed data can easily be obtained. - Specifying the output polarity for the spindle motor The PMC can specify the spindle motor output polarity when the following are executed: - Switching the contro...

  • Page 1279

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1251 - the data as the speed output command for the first spindle in the PMC control interface for the first spindle. To specify a rotation command for the second spindle, enter the gears to be used for the second spindle in GR1 and GR2 and obtain the ...

  • Page 1280

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1252 - - Details of the signals - Signal used to select the spindle motor speed command SINDx → The above signal is used to select whether the spindle motor speed is controlled by the CNC or PMC. "1" : The spindle motor is controlled accord...

  • Page 1281

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1253 - Twelve code signals corresponding to the S value R01O to R12O<Fn036#0 to Fn037#3> [Classification] Output signal [Function] The S value, specified in the CNC part program, is converted to the speed output of the spindle motor that is requ...

  • Page 1282

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1254 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SFA EVS ESF 3705 SFA NSF ESF [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 ESF When the spindle control function (Spindle analog output or Spindle serial output) is used, and the con...

  • Page 1283

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1255 - # 6 SFA The SF signal is output: 0: When gears are switched. 1: Irrespective of whether gears are switched. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3709 MSI [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 2 MSI In multi-spindle control...

  • Page 1284

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1256 - 11.5 EXTENDED SPINDLE NAME Overview Extended spindle names can consist of up to three characters beginning with ‘S’, which is the first spindle name character. Use of extended spindle names allows commands to be issued to a particular spind...

  • Page 1285

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1257 - 11.6 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL Overview When a surface speed (in m/min or feet/min) is specified with an S code (a numeric value following S), the spindle speed is controlled so that the surface speed is kept constant with respect to the ch...

  • Page 1286

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1258 - - Example of Spindle Analog Output Assume that gear switching is two stage switching. If the spindle speed with the output 10 V is 1000 min-1 for the low speed gear (G1) and 2000 min-1 for the high speed gear (G2), set these speeds to the parame...

  • Page 1287

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1259 - Spindle Serial Output The output to the spindle in spindle serial output is a digital data. Therefore assume the following relation for calculation: Spindle analog output (voltage) 10V = Spindle serial output (digital data) 4095. The above calc...

  • Page 1288

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1260 - Meanwhile, the feed-per-revolution speed is changed according to the changed spindle speed specification, and used for movement along the feed axis. However, the specified spindle speed is clamped to the upper limit to the spindle speed specifica...

  • Page 1289

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1261 - 3741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 3742 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 3743 Maximum spindle speed for gear 3 3744 Maximum spindle speed for gear 4 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word spindle [Unit of data] min-1 [Vali...

  • Page 1290

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1262 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 EVS ESF 3705 NSF ESF [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 ESF When the spindle control function (Spindle analog output or Spindle serial output) is used, and the constant surface sp...

  • Page 1291

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1263 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3706 GTT # 4 GTT Selection of a spindle gear selection method 0: Type M. 1: Type T. NOTE 1 M type The gear selection signal is not input. The CNC selects a gear based on the speed range of each ...

  • Page 1292

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1264 - The spindle speed is limited to the upper limit of spindle speed specified in parameter No. 3772, irrespective of the setting of this parameter. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3709 RSC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path ...

  • Page 1293

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1265 - CAUTION 1 When 0 is set in this parameter, the speed of the spindle is not clamped. 2 When spindle speed command control is applied using the PMC, this parameter has no effect, and the spindle speed is not clamped. Alarm and message Number ...

  • Page 1294

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1266 - 11.7 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT Overview The PMC can read actual spindle speed. Signal Actual spindle speed signals AR00 to AR15<Fn040,Fn041> : First spindle AR002 to AR152<Fn202,Fn203> : Second spindle AR003 to AR153<Fn206,Fn...

  • Page 1295

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1267 - 11.8 SPINDLE POSITIONING Overview This function positions the spindle using the spindle motor and position coder. The function has a coarser least command increment compared with the Cs contour control function and has no interpolation capabilit...

  • Page 1296

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1268 - - Control block diagram Spindle speedcontrolSpindleam plifierSpindle m otorSpindleG ear ratio n : mErrorcounterG ear ratio 1 : 2nPositioncoder The spindle positioning function is enabled only when the number of pulses of the position coder is 4...

  • Page 1297

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1269 - - Selecting a spindle positioning axis As the target axis for spindle positioning, any axis address can be set in parameter No. 1020. When setting the servo axis number of a spindle positioning axis (in parameter No. 1023), add a minus sign (-) ...

  • Page 1298

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1270 - Orientation speed When an analog spindle is used, a movement is made at the rapid traverse rate used for reference position return, which is set in parameter No. 1428, until the orientation enable speed is attained, and after the one-rotation ...

  • Page 1299

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1271 - Program origin The position at which the orientation is completed is regarded as the program origin. The program origin can be changed by coordinate system setting (G92 (T series G code B, C/M series) or G50 (T series G code A)) or automatic ...

  • Page 1300

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1272 - Optional angle positioning The position at any angle is specified by using an axis address followed by a signed numeric value. The axis address must be specified in the G00 mode. (In the subsequent explanation, the axis address is assumed to ...

  • Page 1301

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1273 - G code system A for T series G code system B, C for T series M series Command method Address usedCommand of A-B on the above Figure Address used and G-code Command of A-B on the above Figure Absolute command Direct the end point position by the d...

  • Page 1302

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1274 - Diagnosis display 1544 Spindle positioning sequence status The spindle positioning sequence status is indicated. (For each spindle) 1) Sequence for switching to the spindle positioning mode Indication Description 00010003 Wait until SPSTPs is...

  • Page 1303

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1275 - 5207 Clamp/unclamp sequence status The clamp/unclamp sequence status is indicated. (For each controlled axis) 1) Sequence for switching to the spindle positioning mode Indication Description 00030001 Wait until SPSTPs is turned on (0->1) ...

  • Page 1304

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1276 - Signal Spindle unclamp signals SUCLPA<Fn038#1> : First spindle SUCLPB<Fn400#1> : Second spindle SUCLPC<Fn400#2> : Third spindle SUCLPD<Fn400#3> : Fourth spindle [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals ...

  • Page 1305

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1277 - Spindle stop complete signal SPSTPA<Gn028#6> : First spindle SPSTPB<Gn402#1> : Second spindle SPSTPC<Gn402#2> : Third spindle SPSTPD<Gn402#3> : Fourth spindle [Classification] Input signal [Function] After checking th...

  • Page 1306

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1278 - NOTE 1 With a machining system, GR1 and GR2 need not be input if the constant surface speed control option is not provided, and bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706 is 0. When the CNC outputs gear selection signals GR3O, GR2O, and GR1O to make a ge...

  • Page 1307

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1279 - - For first serial spindle #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn070 CTH1ACTH2A - For second serial spindle #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn074 CTH1BCTH2B - For third serial spindle #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn204 CTH1CCTH2C - For f...

  • Page 1308

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1280 - - Sequence (Time chart) Switching to the spindle positioning mode The operation of canceling the spindle rotation mode to enter the spindle positioning mode is performed by specifying an M code for switching to the spindle positioning mode. Set ...

  • Page 1309

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1281 - Timing chart for switching to spindle positioning mode M code command Strobe signal MFSpindle stop completesignals SPSTPsSpindle position controlSpindle positioning modesignals MSPOS Spindle enabledSpindle unclamp signals SUCLPsSpindle...

  • Page 1310

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1282 - CAUTION 1 Switching between the spindle rotation mode and spindle positioning mode must be performed on the machine side in response to M code commands issued from the CNC. When the spindle positioning mode is canceled, the spindle becomes re...

  • Page 1311

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1283 - (3) Canceling the spindle positioning mode and switching to the spindle rotation mode If specification A is selected, only the spindle positioning operation is performed in the spindle positioning mode. [Specification A: Bit 7 (IMB) of paramet...

  • Page 1312

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1284 - Timing chart for spindle positioning (specification A)M code command Strobe signal MFSpindle stop completesignals SPSTPsSpindle positioncontrolSpindle unclamp signals MSPOSSpindle enabledSpindle unclamp completionsignals SUCLPsReferen...

  • Page 1313

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1285 - [Specification B: Bit 7 (IMB) of parameter No. 4950 = 1 ] <1> Suppose that an M code is specified in a program. <2> Miscellaneous function code signal M00 to M31 is sent, and the miscellaneous function strobe signal MF is set to 1 ...

  • Page 1314

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1286 - Timing chart for spindle positioning (specification B)M code command Strobe signal MFSpindle stop completesignals SPSTPsSpindle position controlSpindle positioning modesignals MSPOSSpindle enabledSpindle unclamp signals SUCLPsSpindle un...

  • Page 1315

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1287 - Canceling spindle positioning To cancel the spindle positioning mode and enter the spindle rotation mode again, use an M code for canceling the spindle positioning mode. Set the M code in parameter No. 4961 in advance. <1> Suppose t...

  • Page 1316

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1288 - Timing chart for canceling spindle positioning mode M code command Strobe signal signals MF Spindle stop complete SPSTPs Spindle position control Spindle positioning mode signals MSPOS Spindle unclamp signals SUCLPs Spindle uncl...

  • Page 1317

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1289 - NOTE The state in which a reference position has not been established refers to the following state: - When an absolute position detector is not used and reference position return has not been performed even once after power-up - When an absolut...

  • Page 1318

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1290 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1013 ISEx ISDx ISCx ISAx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 0 ISA # 1 ISC # 2 ISD ...

  • Page 1319

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1291 - 1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes S...

  • Page 1320

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1292 - 1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data rang...

  • Page 1321

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1293 - 1820 Command multiplier for each axis (CMR) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 1 to 96 Set 2 for spindle positi...

  • Page 1322

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1294 - 1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in movement [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis. If...

  • Page 1323

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1295 - 1850 Grid shift and reference position shift for each axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Va...

  • Page 1324

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1296 - 3721 Number of gear teeth on the position coder side [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word spindle [Valid data range] 0 to 9999 Set the number of gear teeth on the position coder side on speed control (such as feed per revolution and...

  • Page 1325

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1297 - NOTE Set the gear ration between spindle and AC spindle motor when the spindle positioning is performed with serial spindle. For which gear is used, it depends on the clutch/gear signal (serial spindle) CTH1A, CTH1B. 4065 Position gain in ser...

  • Page 1326

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1298 - 4074 Reference position return speed on servo mode [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word spindle [Unit of data] min-1 The spindle speed set in this parameter is used for spindle orientation in a servo mode (such as spindle positionin...

  • Page 1327

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1299 - 1: Specification B In the case of half-fixed angle positioning based on M codes, three types of spindle positioning operations can occur: (1) The spindle rotation mode is cleared, then the mode is switched to the spindle positioning mode. (After ...

  • Page 1328

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1300 - 4961 M code releasing the spindle positioning mode [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word spindle [Valid data range] 6 to 97 Set an M code for canceling the spindle positioning mode on the spindle positioning axis. NOTE 1 Do not se...

  • Page 1329

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1301 - NOTE 1 Do not set an M code that duplicates other M codes used for spindle positioning. 2 Do not set an M code used with other functions (such as M00-05, 30, 98, and 99, and M codes for calling subprograms). 4963 Basic angle for half-fixed angl...

  • Page 1330

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1302 - 4970 Position gain [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word spindle [Unit of data] 0.01/sec [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 Set the position gain of the analog spindle in the spindle positioning mode. 4971 Position gain multiplier (firs...

  • Page 1331

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1303 - Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0136 SPOS AXIS - OTHER AXIS SAME TIME The spindle positioning axis and another axis are specified in the same block. PS0137 M-CODE & MOVE CMD IN SAME BLK.The spindle positioning axis and another ...

  • Page 1332

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1304 - Caution CAUTION 1 While the operations for spindle positioning (canceling the spindle rotation mode to enter the spindle positioning mode, positioning the spindle in the spindle positioning mode, and canceling the spindle positioning mode to ent...

  • Page 1333

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1305 - Note NOTE 1 M code commands related to spindle positioning must each be specified in an independent block. A block for specifying such an M code must not contain any other command. (An M command related to spindle positioning for another spindl...

  • Page 1334

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1306 - Reference item Manual name Item name Auxiliary function/2nd auxiliary function Spindle serial output/analog output CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-63943EN-1) Spindle speed control FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-65285EN) FANUC...

  • Page 1335

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1307 - 11.9 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL 11.9.1 Cs Contour Control Overview The Cs contour control function positions the serial spindle using the spindle motor in conjunction with a dedicated detector mounted on the spindle. This function can perform more accu...

  • Page 1336

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1308 - If bit 7 (CSS) of parameter No. 3704 is 1: Cs contour control can be performed for each spindle. As the servo axis number (parameter No. 1023) of the axis used as the Cs contour control axis, set the number of the target logical spindle for Cs co...

  • Page 1337

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1309 - - Setting axes for interpolation with a Cs contour control axis Up to five servo axes can be used for interpolation with a Cs contour control axis. Only linear interpolation is possible. Any servo axes can be selected for interpolation with th...

  • Page 1338

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1310 - remaining Cs contour control axes is set automatically for the other Cs contour control axes and servo axes. 3 Switching between spindle speed control and Cs contour control during automatic operation Switching is impossible during automatic oper...

  • Page 1339

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1311 - position return is performed by using G00, the spindle can be positioned at any specified position. (ii) G28 command After the serial spindle is put in the Cs contour control mode, issuing the G28 command stops the spindle motor, then moves the ...

  • Page 1340

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1312 - Signal Cs contour control change signal CON<Gn027#7> [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal specifies that the first spindle be switched between the spindle speed control and Cs contour control modes. This signal is valid wh...

  • Page 1341

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1313 - - Time Chart Spindle speed controlCs contour controlSpindle speed controlCONGear change andoperation of spindlemotor must becompletedFSCSLSwitching internal controlSwitching internal control NOTE 1 Any mechanical gear change needed and inputs f...

  • Page 1342

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1314 - Clutch/Gear signal (Serial spindle) CTH1A,CTH2A<Gn070#3,Gn070#2> : First spindle CTH1B,CTH2B<Gn074#3,Gn074#2> : Second spindle CTH1C,CTH2C<Gn204#3,Gn204#2> : Third spindle CTH1D,CTH2D<Gn266#3,Gn266#2> : Fourth spindle R...

  • Page 1343

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1315 - Signals on manual operation Feed axis and direction select signal +Jn, *Jn <G100, G102> (Input) Manual handle feed axis select signal HSnA, HSnB, HSnC, HSnD <G018, G019> (Input) (Refer to respective items in this manual) The Cs conto...

  • Page 1344

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1316 - - For fourth serial spindle #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn266 MRDYD SFRDSRVDCTH1DCTH2D TLMHD TLMLD Fn266 LDT2DLDT1D Parameter Major related parameters are described below. In addition to the parameters described below, axis speed, acce...

  • Page 1345

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1317 - 1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to 7 To determine a plane for circular interpolation, cutter compensation, and so forth (G17: Xp-Yp plane, G18: ...

  • Page 1346

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1318 - 1260 Amount of a shift per one rotation of a rotation axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] Degree [Minimum unit...

  • Page 1347

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1319 - 1620 Time constant T or T1 used for linear acceleration/deceleration or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 400...

  • Page 1348

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1320 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1814 ALGx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 7 ALGx The servo axis loop gain in the Cs contour control mode is: 0: Not matched with the Cs contour control loop gain. 1: Matched with the Cs...

  • Page 1349

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1321 - NOTE If there is a servo axis that is subject to interpolation with the Cs contouring control axis, set parameters No. 3900 to No. 3944 to match the loop gain of the Cs contouring control axis to that of the servo axis in the Cs contour control ...

  • Page 1350

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1322 - The dual check safety function checks the positioning deviation with the CNC CPU and servo DSP at all times. Only when the servo DSP detects, during safety monitoring (with the safety monitor signal SEV/SEP set to 1), that the positioning deviati...

  • Page 1351

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1323 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3704 CSS [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 7 CSS On the each spindle, Cs contour control is...

  • Page 1352

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1324 - 3717 Motor number to each spindle NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte spindle [Valid data range] 0 to Maximum number of controlled axes ...

  • Page 1353

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1325 - 3910 Number of servo axis for interpolation with Cs contour control axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to number of controlled axes Set the number of the servo axis to be used for interpolation with ...

  • Page 1354

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1326 - 3921 Loop gain for servo axis for interpolation with Cs contour control axis (HIGH gear) 3922 Loop gain for servo axis for interpolation with Cs contour control axis (MEDIUM HIGH gear) 3923 Loop gain for servo axis for interpolation with Cs ...

  • Page 1355

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1327 - 3931 Loop gain for servo axis for interpolation with Cs contour control axis (HIGH gear) 3932 Loop gain for servo axis for interpolation with Cs contour control axis (MEDIUM HIGH gear) 3933 Loop gain for servo axis for interpolation with Cs ...

  • Page 1356

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1328 - 3941 Loop gain for servo axis for interpolation with Cs contour control axis (HIGH gear) 3942 Loop gain for servo axis for interpolation with Cs contour control axis (MEDIUM HIGH gear) 3943 Loop gain for servo axis for interpolation with Cs ...

  • Page 1357

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1329 - 4056 Gear ratio (HIGH gear) 4057 Gear ratio (MEDIUM HIGH gear) 4058 Gear ratio (MEDIUM LOW gear) 4059 Gear ratio (LOW gear) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Integral word spindle [Unit of data] Motor speed per spindle rotation ...

  • Page 1358

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1330 - 4135 Grid shift amount in Cs contour control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Integral 2-word spindle [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] Within ±1 rotation (For 1-micron detection, for example, -360000 to 360000) Set ...

  • Page 1359

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1331 - Caution CAUTION 1 The M codes to specify Cs contour control mode switching must be assigned to M codes not buffered. (Parameter Nos. 3411 to 3420) 2 Avoid changing spindle gears in Cs contour control mode. When a gear change is required, be su...

  • Page 1360

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1332 - 11.9.2 Cs Contour Control Torque Limit Skip Overview This function enables a torque limit skip for the Cs contour control axis. Explanation Torque limit command signal TLMH and load detection signal LDT1 for serial spindles are used to make a t...

  • Page 1361

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1333 - NOTE The torque limit override function by address Q (when bit 4 (TQO) of parameter No. 1802 is set to 1) is disabled for Cs contour control axes. PMC sequence programs must be created so that Cs contour control axes are always placed in the to...

  • Page 1362

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1334 - Signal address - For first serial spindle #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn070 TLMHA Fn045 TLMA LDT1A - For second serial spindle #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn074 TLMHB Fn049 TLMB LDT1B - For third serial spindl...

  • Page 1363

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1335 - 4026 Load detection level 1 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word spindle [Unit of data] 1% [Valid data range] 0to100 Set the detection range of the load detection signal (LDT1). When the motor output exceeds (setting data)% of the ...

  • Page 1364

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1336 - 11.9.3 Arbitrary Reference Position Setting Function Overview When bit 0 (CRF) of parameter No. 3700 is set to 1, any position can be set as the reference position by the first reference position return command (G28 or a manual reference positio...

  • Page 1365

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1337 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3700 CRF [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 CRF Reference position setting at an arbitrary position under Cs contour control is: 0: Not used. 1: Used. NOTE When this functio...

  • Page 1366

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1338 - 11.10 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL Overview In addition to the first spindle, the second to fourth spindles can be controlled using an S command from the CNC. Spindle commands are specified using a single S command as conventionally done. A spindle is...

  • Page 1367

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1339 - Basic control 2 (Common to TYPE-A, TYPE-B, and the method of making spindle selection by address P) Each spindle also has a spindle stop signal (*SSTP1 to *SSTP4 <Gn027#3-#5>, <Gn026#6>) to stop its rotation; an unused spindle can s...

  • Page 1368

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1340 - Multi-spindle control (TYPE-B) Select Type B control by setting parameter MSI No. 3709#2 to "1". Each spindle has its own SIND, SSIN and SGN signals. Each of these signals functions regardless of selection state of the spindle sele...

  • Page 1369

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1341 - Extended spindle name Usually, S is used as commands for spindles. If the conditions listed below are all satisfied, extended spindle names can be used. Extended spindle names can consist of up to three characters beginning with S as the fi...

  • Page 1370

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1342 - Restrictions More than one extended spindle name cannot be specified within the same block. Also, ‘S’ and an extended spindle name cannot be specified together within the same block. If they are specified together, P/S alarm No. 333 is i...

  • Page 1371

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1343 - NOTE Address S indicates a command for all spindles. When multiple spindles are used, and bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is 1, a particular spindle must be specified by using address P and so on. If spindle name S is set when extended spind...

  • Page 1372

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1344 - NOTE 2. When the first spindle is SA, the second spindle is S, and 1 is set for the first spindle and 2 is set for the second spindle in parameter No. 3781 If bit 2 (MPA) of parameter No. 3706 is 0 N10 M03; N20 SA100; → 100 is specified ...

  • Page 1373

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1345 - - Relationship with other optional functions Constant surface speed control The control function for keeping the surface speed constant can be used with any of the four spindles, if the spindle speed is within the range allowable for this fun...

  • Page 1374

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1346 - Signal Spindle Selection Signals SWS1,SWS2,SWS3,SWS4<Gn027#0,#1,#2>,<Gn026#3> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Controls whether S command specified to the NC is output to the spindle or not in multi-spindle. SWS1 1 : Outp...

  • Page 1375

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1347 - When the second, third, or fourth position coder is not installed, do not switch this signal. Always set "0" for first position coder. Spindle enable signals ENB<Fn001#4>,ENB2<Fn038#2>,ENB3<Fn038#3>,ENB4<Fn039#1>...

  • Page 1376

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1348 - S12-bit code signals R01O to R12O<Fn036#0 to Fn037#3>, R01O2 to R12O2<Fn200#0 to Fn201#3>, R01O3 to R12O3<Fn204#0 to Fn205#3>, R01O4 to R12O4<Fn270#0 to Fn271#3>, [Classification] Output signal [Function] If bit 3 (MRS...

  • Page 1377

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1349 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn026 *SSTP4 SWS4 PC4SLC PC3SLC Gn027 *SSTP3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1SWS3 SWS2 SWS1 Gn028 PC2SLC GR2 GR1 Gn029 *SSTP GR32GR31 GR22 GR21 Gn031 GR42GR41 Gn032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I ...

  • Page 1378

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1350 - Parameter Parameters related to the first spindle and first position coder are the same as those used conventionally. The following explains the parameters added in connection with this function and related parameters: #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 ...

  • Page 1379

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1351 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 MPA 3706 GTT MPA # 2 MPA If a spindle is to be selected using a P command (with bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 set to 1) in multi-spindle control, and a P command is not specified together with an ...

  • Page 1380

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1352 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3709 MRS MSI [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 2 MSI In multi-spindle control, the SIND signal is valid 0: Only when the first spindle is valid (SIND signal for the 2nd, 3rd spindle beco...

  • Page 1381

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1353 - 3738 Spindle name 2 of each spindle 3739 Spindle name 3 of each spindle [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte spindle [Valid data range] 48 to 57, 65 to 90 The command for a spindle is basically "S". When all conditions b...

  • Page 1382

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1354 - 3741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 3742 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 3743 Maximum spindle speed for gear 3 3744 Maximum spindle speed for gear 4 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word spindle [Unit of data] min-1 [Vali...

  • Page 1383

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1355 - 3772 Maximum spindle speed [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word spindle [Unit of data] min-1 [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed. When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum...

  • Page 1384

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1356 - 3781 P code for selecting the spindle in multi-spindle control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word spindle [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 If bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1, set the P code to select each spindle under ...

  • Page 1385

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1357 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3798 ESN [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit # 1 ESN When the multi-spindle function is enabled and bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1, a spindle is specified in a program by using: 0:...

  • Page 1386

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1358 - Note NOTE 1 The spindle orientation signal, spindle speed override signals, and spindle stop signal *SSTP only function for the selected signals. 2 The multi-spindle function allows multiple position coder interfaces to be used. But the number of...

  • Page 1387

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1359 - 11.11 RIGID TAPPING Overview In a tapping cycle (Machining center system: G84/G74, Lathe system: G84/G88), synchronous control is applied to the tapping operation of a tapping axis and the operation of the spindle. This capability eliminates the...

  • Page 1388

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1360 - CAUTION 2 When M-type gear selection is used for the machining center system, the maximum spindle speed for rigid tapping (specified with parameters No. 5241 to 5243) must also be set for parameter No. 5243 regardless of the number of gear steps...

  • Page 1389

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1361 - - Multi spindle control The relationships between rigid tapping and multi spindle control are described below. Without multi spindle control Rigid tapping can be performed with the first spindle only. With multi spindle control Rigid tap...

  • Page 1390

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1362 - 11.11.1 Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position Coder As shown in the figure below a gear ratio can be inserted between the spindle and spindle motor (n : m), and between the spindle and position coder (N : M). Spindle controlSpi...

  • Page 1391

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1363 - (2) Gear between spindle and position coder The position coder is used to detect the position of the spindle. The gear ratio between the spindle and position coder is set in parameter No. 5221 to No. 5224 and No. 5231 to No. 5234. When a position...

  • Page 1392

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1364 - (3) Rigid tapping and machines with multiple gears When performing rigid tapping on a machine that has multiple gears, note the points below. - M type gear selection method M The CNC determines whether gears need changing using the gear change ...

  • Page 1393

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1365 - Spindle speed range (normal machining) Gear Lower limit Upper limit Low-speed gear 1 revolution Maximum low-speed gear speed = Maximum spindle motor speed × L% = Low-speed gear ratio Medium speed gear Maximum low-speed gear speed ...

  • Page 1394

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1366 - (parameter No. 3761). The table above shows the maximum medium-speed gear speed during rigid tapping for medium-/high-speed gear change position E (parameter No. 3762). If the T type gear selection method is used, add the rigid tapping logic to t...

  • Page 1395

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1367 - 11.11.2 Rigid Tapping Specification - Feed rate In rigid tapping mode, the drilling axis is fed at a rate specified by F. The spindle speed is specified by S 360 [deg/min]. A detailed description of commands for feed per minute and feed per rev...

  • Page 1396

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1368 - - Manual feed When performing rigid tapping by using manual handle feed, see the description of the rigid tapping function based on the manual handle. Rigid tapping cannot be used with other types of manual feed. - Backlash compensation In rig...

  • Page 1397

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1369 - 11.11.3 Commands for Feed per Minute and Feed per Revolution In rigid tapping, commands for feed per minute and feed per revolution can be specified. Rigid tapping is classified into two types: rigid tapping in feed per minute mode and rigid tap...

  • Page 1398

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1370 - 11.11.4 Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation Linear acceleration/deceleration or bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration can be applied. When bit 2 (TDR) of parameter No. 5201 is set to 1, time constants for cutting and extraction can be...

  • Page 1399

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1371 - min-1msecBell-shaped acceleration/deceleration(constant acceleration type)T2T2T1Set time constants T1 and T2 in parameters.(Acceleration rate of linear portion <1> is constant fromsettings of maximum spindle speed and T1.)<1> NOTE 1...

  • Page 1400

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1372 - 11.11.5 Override Various types of overrides are disabled. However, the following overrides can be enabled by setting parameters: - Extraction override - Override signal (1) Extraction override For extraction override, a parameter-set fixed ove...

  • Page 1401

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1373 - The table below summarizes the setting of an extraction override value by parameter specification/program specification. DOV=1 Parameter setting Command OV3=1 OV3=0 DOV=0Within the range 100% to 200% Program specification Spindle speed for extrac...

  • Page 1402

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1374 - (2) Override signals When bit 4 (OVS) of parameter No. 5203 is set to 1, a cutting/extraction operation in rigid tapping can be overridden as described below. - Override is applied using the feedrate override signal. (When the second feedrate ov...

  • Page 1403

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1375 - 11.11.6 Reference Position Return When bit 0 (ORI) of parameter No. 5202 is set to 1, a spindle reference position return operation can be performed at the start of rigid tapping. When a movement is made to a R point in the rigid tapping mode, t...

  • Page 1404

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1376 - 11.11.7 FS15 Format Command M When bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No. 0001 is set to 1, rigid tapping can be specified in the FS15 command format. 1) : Sxxxx ; G84.2/G84.3 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ L_ ; : 2) : G84.2/G84.3 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ L_ Sxxxx ; ...

  • Page 1405

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1377 - L : Number of repeats S : Spindle speed The differences from the FS16 command format are as follows: - No G code can make a distinction between a front tapping cycle and side tapping cycle. A tapping axis is determined by plane selection (G17/G1...

  • Page 1406

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1378 - 11.11.8 Multi Spindle Control When multi spindle control is used, rigid tapping can be performed by selecting spindles from the first to fourth spindles. A spindle can be selected as described below by parameter setting. Lathe system Parameter ...

  • Page 1407

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1379 - 11.11.10 Display Data on the Diagnosis Screen For rigid tapping adjustment, the diagnosis screen displays information related to rigid tapping. - Display of command pulses and position deviation amounts - Spindle position deviation → Diagno...

  • Page 1408

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1380 - parameter No. 5214, no check is performed to detect whether the synchronization error range has been exceeded.) - Error difference display • Momentary error difference between the spindle and drilling axis → Diagnosis No.452 • Maximum er...

  • Page 1409

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1381 - The following figure shows the tapping axis as the Z axis. Z-axiserrorZZcZc =Speed60×1Gain×1Detection unit× 102 (Theoretical value)Ze = Z-axis error counts (measured value)SpindleerrorSeScSc =Speed × 36060×1Gain×1Detection unit× 102 (Theor...

  • Page 1410

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1382 - - Display of spindle position data Position coder signal pulse data from the spindle one-rotation signal is displayed. - Position coder signal pulse data of the first spindle → Diagnosis No.445 - Position coder signal pulse data of the second ...

  • Page 1411

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1383 - - Number of pulses distributed to the spindle 0451 SPINDLE MOTION PULSE Number of pulses distributed to the spindle during rigid tapping [Unit] Pulse - Error difference between the spindle and drilling axis (momentary value) 0452 RIGID E...

  • Page 1412

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1384 - - Spindle-converted move command difference during rigid tapping (maximum value) 0460 SYNC. PULSE (MAX) Maximum spindle-converted move during command difference between the spindle and the drilling axis during rigid tapping [Unit] Pulse - S...

  • Page 1413

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1385 - 11.11.11 Command Format T Command format for the lathe system The rigid tapping mode can be specified in one of two formats: FS16 format and FS15 format. A usable format can be selected by parameter setting. Parameter FCV (No.0001#1) F16 (No.51...

  • Page 1414

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1386 - F : Cutting feedrate L : Number of repeats M : M code for C-axis clamping - G88 : Side tapping cycle The second axis of a plane is a drilling axis, and the other axes are positioning axes. Plane selection Drilling axis G17 Xp-Yp plane Yp G18 ...

  • Page 1415

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1387 - G84(G88) X_C_(Z_C_) Z_(X_) R_ P_ F_ K_ M_; X_C_(Z_C_); X_C_(Z_C_); : G80; - Specifying M29 and G84 (G88) in the same block (However, the M code for C-axis clamping cannot be specified.) G84(G88) X_C_(Z_C_) Z_(X_) R_ P_ F_ K_ M29 S_; X_C_(Z_C...

  • Page 1416

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1388 - G84, G88 (Tapping cycle) CAUTION For cutting feed along the Z(X)-axis and override in extraction, see Subsection 11.11.6, "Override". NOTE G code system A does not include G98 (return to initial level) and G99 (return to R point lev...

  • Page 1417

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1389 - 11.11.12 Position Control Loop Gain Parameter Switching In rigid tapping, the position control loop gain of the drilling axis must match that of the spindle. Specifically, change the position control loop gain of the drilling axis at the followi...

  • Page 1418

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1390 - 11.11.13 Signal 11.11.13.1 Signals for the rigid tapping function Rigid tapping signal RGTAP<Gn061#0> [Classification] Input signal [Function] When M29 (miscellaneous function for preparation for rigid tapping) is specified, the PMC ent...

  • Page 1419

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1391 - 11.11.13.2 Signals related to S code output Spindle enable signal ENB<Fn001#4> [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals post whether the spindle output is 0. In rigid tapping mode, these signals are used to cancel rigid ta...

  • Page 1420

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1392 - NOTE 1 The timing charts, given later, give examples of gear switching by setting the parameters as follows: Machining center system : SFA=0,NSF=0 Lathe system : EVS=1 2 When the constant surface speed control function is being used, an S code (s...

  • Page 1421

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1393 - 11.11.13.3 Signals related to gear switching Gear selection signals (output) GR30,GR20,GR10<Fn034#2,#1,#0> M [Classification] Output signal [Operation] When M-type gear selection is being used, these signals are used in a PMC sequence fo...

  • Page 1422

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1394 - 11.11.13.4 Signals related to the addition of multi spindle control Spindle enable signals ENB<Fn001#4>,ENB2,ENB3<Fn038#2,#3>,ENB4<Fn039#1> [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals post whether the spindle outp...

  • Page 1423

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1395 - Spindle selection signals SWS1<Gn027#0>,SWS2<Gn027#1>, SWS3<Gn027#2>,SWS4<Gn026#3> Rigid tapping spindle selection signals RGTSP1<Gn061#4>,RGTSP2<Gn061#5>, RGTSP3<Gn061#6>,RGTSP4<Gn061#7> T [Class...

  • Page 1424

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1396 - NOTE 3 Similarly, when multiple signals from RGTSP1 to RGTSP4 are set to 1 simultaneously, the signals are checked in the order from RGTSP1 to RGTSP2 to RGTSP3 to RGTSP4, and the spindle corresponding to the signal that is first found to be set ...

  • Page 1425

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1397 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn026 *SSTP4 SWS4 PC4SLC PC3SLC Gn027 *SSPT3 *SSTP2 *SSTP1SWS3 SWS2 SWS1 Gn028 PC2SLC GR2 GR1 Gn029 *SSTP GR32GR31 GR22 GR21 Gn031 GR42GR41 Gn061 RGTSP4 RGTSP3 RGTSP2 RGTSP1 RGTAP...

  • Page 1426

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1398 - 11.11.13.5 Notes on interface with the PMC The following describes some notes in designing the interface with the PMC. - Rigid tapping mode management and ENB (ENB2,ENB3,ENB4) The PMC must manage rigid tapping mode as follows: rigid tapping m...

  • Page 1427

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1399 - - When rigid tapping mode is specified M29 (miscellaneous function for preparation for rigid tapping) and S_ specify rigid tapping mode. When M29 is accepted by the PMC, the following processing must be performed: • Stop the spindle when it i...

  • Page 1428

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1400 - - When T-type gear selection is used The spindle-speed function strobe signal SF <F007#2> and spindle-speed function code signals S00 to S31 <F022 to F025> are output to the PMC. (However, parameter setting is required to enable outp...

  • Page 1429

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1401 - 11.11.14 Timing Charts for Rigid Tapping Specification The timing chart for rigid tapping specification depends on the method used to specify rigid tapping mode, the gear selection method (M-type or T-type), and whether to perform gear switching...

  • Page 1430

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1402 - 11.11.14.1 When M29 is specified before G84/G74 - M type gear selection method M29RTAP Motion 1 Motion 2G84/G74ENBTo be masked to the motion 2Spindle outputSFGR1OGR2OGR3O*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationExcitati...

  • Page 1431

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1403 - M29RTAP Motion 1 Motion 2G84/G74ENBSpindle outputSFGR1OGR2OGR3O*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationGear changeExcitationSFRPositionloopTo be masked to the motion 2*Gearchangemotion Fig. 11.11.14 (b) When gear change is p...

  • Page 1432

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1404 - - T type gear selection method M29RTAP Motion 1 Motion 2G84/G74ENBSpindle outputSFS code outputGR1GR2SFRPositionloopTo be masked to the motion 2*SSTPSORRGTAPFINRotation250msor moreExcitation Fig. 11.11.14 (c) Gear ...

  • Page 1433

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1405 - M29RTAP Motion 1 Motion 2G84/G74ENBSpindle outputSFS code outputGR1GR2*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationGear changeExcitationSFRPositionloopTo be masked to the motion 2*Gearchangemotion Fig. 11.11.14 (d) When gear-...

  • Page 1434

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1406 - 11.11.14.2 M29 and G84/G74 are specified in the same block - M type gear selection M29RTAP Motion 1 Motion 2G84/G74ENBTo be masked to the motion 2Spindle outputSFGR1OGR2OGR3O*SSTPSOR250mso...

  • Page 1435

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1407 - M29RTAP Motion 1 Motion 2G84/G74ENBSpindle outputSFGR1OGR2OGR3O*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationGear changeExcitationSFRPositionloopTo be masked to the motion 2 Fig. 11.11.14 (f) When...

  • Page 1436

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1408 - - T type gear selection method M29RTAP Motion 1 Motion 2G84/G74ENBSpindle outputSFS code outputGR1GR2*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationExcitationSFRPositionloopTo be masked to the motion...

  • Page 1437

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1409 - M29RTAP Motion 1 Motion 2G84/G74ENBSpindle outputSFS code outputGR1GR2*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationGear changeExcitationSFRPositionloopTo be masked to the motion 2 Fig. 11.11.14 (h...

  • Page 1438

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1410 - 11.11.14.3 Specifying G84/G74 for rigid tapping by parameters - M type gear selection M29RTAP Motion 1 Motion 2G84/G74M29 is commandedinternally.ENBTo be masked to the motion 2Spindle o...

  • Page 1439

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1411 - M29RTAPG84/G74ENBSpindle outputSFGR1OGR2O250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationGear changeExcitationTo be masked to motion 2Positionloop Motion 1 Motion 2GR3O*SSTPSOR Fig. 11.11.14 (j) When gear c...

  • Page 1440

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1412 - - T type gear selection method M29RTAP Motiion 1 Motion 2G84/G74M29 is commandedinternally.ENBSpindle outputSFS code outputGR1GR2*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationExcitationSFRPositionl...

  • Page 1441

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1413 - PositionloopM29RTAP Motion 1 Motion 2G84/G74M29 is commandedinternally.ENBSpindle outputSFS code outputGR1GR2*SSTPSOR250msor moreRGTAPFINRotationGear changeExcitationSFRTo be masked to th...

  • Page 1442

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1414 - 11.11.14.4 When M29 is specified before G84/G88 NC commandMotion of servoaxisRTAPS code outputSFM code outputMFFIN*SSTPSORGR1/GR2SFR/SRVRGTAPENBSpindle outputSpindle rotationPosition loopM29G84/G88Motion 1Motion 2M29C axis clampSFR=1SRV=0SFR=0SR...

  • Page 1443

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1415 - NC commandMotion of servoaxisRTAPS code outputSFM code outputMFFIN*SSTPSORGR1/GR2SFR/SRVRGTAPENBSpindle outputSpindle rotationPositionloopM29Motion 1Motion 2G84/G88M29C axis clampGear selectSFR=1SRV=0SFR=0SRV=0Spindle stopGear change250msor moreT...

  • Page 1444

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1416 - 11.11.14.5 M29 and G84/G88 are specified in the same block NC commandMotion of servoaxisRTAPS code outputSFM code outputMFFIN*SSTPSORGR1/GR2SFR/SRVRGTAPENBSpindle outputSpindle rotationPosition loopG84/G88 M29Motion 1Motion 2M29SFR=1SRV=0SFR=0SR...

  • Page 1445

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1417 - NC commandMotion of servoaxisRTAPS code outputSFM code outputMFFIN*SSTPSORGR1/GR2SFR/SRVRGTAPENBSpindle outputSpindle rotationPosition loopG84/G88 M29Motion 1Motion 2M29Gear selectSFR=1SRV=0SFR=0SRV=0Spindle stopGear change250msor moreTo be maske...

  • Page 1446

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1418 - 11.11.14.6 Specifying G84/G88 for rigid tapping by parameters NC commandMotion of servoaxisRTAPS code outputSFM code outputMFFIN*SSTPSORGR1/GR2SFR/SRVRGTAPENBSpindle outputSpindle rotationPosition loopG84/G88Motion 1Motion 2M29 is commandedinter...

  • Page 1447

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1419 - NC commandMotion of servoaxisRTAPS code outputSFM code outputMFFIN*SSTPSORGR1/GR2SFR/SRVRGTAPENBSpindle outputSpindle rotationPositionloopMotion 1Motion 2G84/G88M29 is commandedinternally.C axis clampGear selectSFR=1SRV=0SFR=0SRV=0Spindle stopGea...

  • Page 1448

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1420 - 11.11.14.7 Timing of the M code for unclamping T After extraction from the hole bottom to the R point level (operation 5), the M code for unclamping is output. When FIN is returned, dwell or rapid traverse to the initial level (operation 6) star...

  • Page 1449

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1421 - NC command Servo axis operation RTAP SFR/SRV RGTAP ENBs Spindle output G80 or G code of group 01 Operation specified by cancellation block SFR=0SRV=0 CAUTION 1 If rigid tapping mode is canceled by a Group 01 G code, such as G00 or G01,...

  • Page 1450

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1422 - 11.11.15 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3702 EMS [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 1 EMS The multi-spindle control function is: 0: Used. 1: Not used. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3703 MPP [Input ty...

  • Page 1451

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1423 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SFA EVS SGT ESF 3705 SFA NSF SGT ESF [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 ESF When the spindle control function (Spindle analog output or Spindle serial output) is used, and the constan...

  • Page 1452

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1424 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3706 GTT [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 GTT Selection of a spindle gear selection method 0: Type M. 1: Type T. NOTE 1 M type The gear selection signal is not input. The...

  • Page 1453

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1425 - 3761 Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping 3762 Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 during tapping [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] min-1 [Valid data range]...

  • Page 1454

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1426 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 4000 RETSV [Data type] Bit spindle # 4 RETSV Reference position return direction in the servo mode (rigid tapping, etc.) 0: The spindle returns to the reference position counterclockwise (CCW). 1: The spind...

  • Page 1455

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1427 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SRS FHD PCP DOV SIG CRG G84 5200 FHD PCP DOV SIG CRG G84 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 G84 Method for specifying rigid tapping 0: An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is specif...

  • Page 1456

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1428 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5201 OV3 OVU TDR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 2 TDR Cutting time constant in rigid tapping 0: Uses a same parameter during cutting and extraction (Parameter Nos. 5261 through 5264) 1:...

  • Page 1457

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1429 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5203 RBL OVS RFF [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 2 RFF In rigid tapping, feed forward is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. # 4 OVS In rigid tapping, override by the feedrate override select...

  • Page 1458

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1430 - 5213 Return in peck rigid tapping cycle [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the drilling axis [Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 dig...

  • Page 1459

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1431 - 5221 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (first gear) 5222 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (second gear) 5223 Number of gear teeth on the spindle side in rigid tapping (third gear) Number of ...

  • Page 1460

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1432 - 5241 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (first gear) 5242 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (second gear) 5243 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (third gear) Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (fourth gear) 5244 [Inpu...

  • Page 1461

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1433 - 5271 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping extraction (first gear) 5272 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping extraction (second gear) 5273 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid ta...

  • Page 1462

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1434 - 5280 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (common to gears) 5281 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping (first gear) 5282 Position control loop gain for the spindl...

  • Page 1463

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1435 - 5300 Tapping axis in-position width in rigid tapping (first spindle) 5302 Tapping axis in-position width in rigid tapping (second spindle) 5304 Tapping axis in-position width in rigid tapping (third spindle) 5306 Tapping axis in-position w...

  • Page 1464

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1436 - 5311 Limit value of spindle positioning deviation during movement in rigid tapping [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word spindle [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter sets the limit value of...

  • Page 1465

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1437 - 5312 Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tapping (first spindle) 5352 Positional deviation limit imposed while the tapping axis is stopped in rigid tapping (second spindle) 5356 Positional deviation ...

  • Page 1466

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1438 - 5365 Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant in rigid tapping (first-stage gear) 5366 Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant in rigid tapping (second-stage gear) 5367 Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time consta...

  • Page 1467

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1439 - Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0200 ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND In the rigid tap, an S value was out of range or was not specified. The parameter (Nos. 5241 to 5243) setting is an S value which can be specified for the rigid tap. PS02...

  • Page 1468

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1440 - 11.11.16 Notes - Notes on spindles Caution CAUTION Adjust the spindle speed offset value accurately. Otherwise, the tool may stop, waiting to enter the in-position width in the following cases: - At the start of tapping - At the end of t...

  • Page 1469

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1441 - - Other cautions CAUTION 1 When the spindle orientation function is to be used at the same time The spindle orientation function positions the spindle by using sensors and the PMC, without being directly controlled by the CNC. The CNC has no ...

  • Page 1470

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1442 - CAUTION 4 Program restart The program cannot be restarted in a block placed in the rigid tapping mode. (The program cannot be restarted in blocks between an M29 command and G80 command.) 5 Specification of multiple M codes in one block Specify a...

  • Page 1471

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1443 - 4065 Position gain in the servo mode (HIGH) 4066 Position gain in the servo mode (MEDIUM HIGH) 4067 Position gain in the servo mode (MEDIUM LOW) 4068 Position gain in the servo mode (LOW) [Unit of data] 0.01sec-1 [Valid data range] 0 t...

  • Page 1472

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1444 - 11.12 INTERPOLATION TYPE RIGID TAPPING Overview In tapping, the feed amount along the Z-axis per spindle revolution must be equal to the thread pitch of a tapper. This means that the most desirable tapping satisfies the following condition at al...

  • Page 1473

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1445 - - Parameters used according to the number of gear stages (No.5221 to No.5224, No.5231 to No.5234, No.5241 to No.5244, No.5261 to No.5264, No.5271 to No.5274, No.5281 to No.5284, No.5286 to No.5289, No.5291 to No.5294, No.5321 to No.5324, No.5386...

  • Page 1474

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1446 - A reverse tapping cycle, like that supported by machining center system, is not available. For a multi path lathe, rigid tapping can be performed using a combination of the spindle and tapping axis selected in each path. Rigid tapping using a m...

  • Page 1475

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1447 - 11.12.1 Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position Coder As shown in the figure below a gear ratio can be inserted between the spindle and spindle motor (n : m). Spindle controlSpindle amplifierSpindle motorSpindle Error counter Gea...

  • Page 1476

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1448 - #3 for the third spindle, G029#4 and #5 for the fourth spindle) for the selected gear, and notify the CNC of them. Enter the clutch/gear selection signals CTH2 and CTH1 (G070#3 and #2 for the first spindle, G074#3 and #2 for the second spindle, ...

  • Page 1477

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1449 - The table below indicates the spindle speed range of each gear in rigid tapping. Spindle speed range (during rigid tapping) Gear Lower limit Upper limit Low- speed gear 1 revolution Maximum low-speed gear speed Basic spindle motor speed + ...

  • Page 1478

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1450 - 11.12.2 Interpolation Type Rigid Tapping Specification - Feedrate In interpolation type rigid tapping mode, the tapping axis is fed at a rate specified by F. The spindle speed is specified by S × 360(deg/min). A detailed description of feed pe...

  • Page 1479

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1451 - - Manual feed Interpolation type rigid tapping cannot be performed in the manual feed mode. - Orientation When the orientation function is used, the orientation stop position can be shifted within the range -360 to 360 deg (parameter No. 4135)...

  • Page 1480

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1452 - - Reset A reset performed in the interpolation type rigid tapping mode cancels the interpolation type rigid tapping mode (Cs contouring control mode) and places the spindle in the normal rotation control mode. However, bit 6 (CLR) of parameter ...

  • Page 1481

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1453 - 11.12.3 Commands for Feed per Minute and Feed per Revolution The same descriptions as for normal rigid tapping are applicable. See Subsection 11.11.4, "Commands for Feed per Minute and Feed per Revolution". 11.12.4 Acceleration/Decele...

  • Page 1482

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1454 - For acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for a Cs contouring control axis used in interpolation type rigid tapping, the maximum allowable acceleration rate that can be set is 100000 (deg/s2). A setting for acceleration/deceleration of u...

  • Page 1483

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1455 - 11.12.7 FS15 Format Command The same descriptions as for normal rigid tapping are applicable. See Subsection, "FS15 Format Command". 11.12.8 Multi Spindle Control The same descriptions as for normal rigid tapping are applicable. See ...

  • Page 1484

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1456 - 11.12.12 Signal 11.12.12.1 Signals for the rigid tapping function The signals related to interpolation type rigid tapping are basically the same as for normal rigid tapping. This subsection describes only those signals that are related to inter...

  • Page 1485

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1457 - 11.12.13 Timing Charts for Interpolation Type Rigid Tapping Specification The same descriptions as for normal rigid tapping are applicable. See Subsection, "Timing Charts for Interpolation Type Rigid Tapping Specification". 11.12.14 P...

  • Page 1486

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1458 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1610 CTBx CTLx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or dry run 0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied. 1: Linear acceleration/dec...

  • Page 1487

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1459 - (1) T series Least input increment Least command increment 0.001 mm (diameter specification) 0.0005 mm Millimeter input 0.001 mm (radius specification) 0.001 mm 0.0001 inch (diameter specification) 0.0005 mm Millimeter machine Inch input0.0001 i...

  • Page 1488

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1460 - (2) M series Least input increment and least command increment Increment system IS-AIS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E UnitMillimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 0.000001 mm Millimeter input 0.0010.0001 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0...

  • Page 1489

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1461 - NOTE If a feedrate exceeding the feedrate found by the expression below is used, an incorrect travel amount may result or a servo alarm may be issued. Be sure to use a feedrate not exceeding the feedrate found by the following expression: Fmax...

  • Page 1490

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1462 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 4000 CSO [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit spindle # 3 CSO Reference position return direction in Cs contouring control 0 : The spindle returns to the reference position counterclockwise (CCW). 1...

  • Page 1491

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1463 - 4056 Gear ratio (HIGH) 4057 Gear ration (MEDIUM HIGH) 4058 Gear ratio (MEDIUM LOW) 4059 Gear ratio (LOW) [Data type] Word spindle [Unit of data] Motor speed per spindle rotation × 100 [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 These parameters set...

  • Page 1492

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1464 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5202 CHR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 3 CHR When the option for interpolation type rig...

  • Page 1493

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1465 - - Cautions when a function such as the spindle positioning function is used together CAUTION 1 When the spindle orientation function is to be used at the same time The spindle orientation function positions the spindle by using sensors and the...

  • Page 1494

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1466 - CAUTION (6) When the Cs contouring control function based on a serial spindle is used together with rigid tapping, the rigid tapping mode must not be specified in the Cs contouring control mode, and the Cs contouring control mode must not be spe...

  • Page 1495

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1467 - Reference item Manual name Item name USER’S MANUAL (B-63944EN) Rigid tapping Auxiliary function / 2nd auxiliary function Spindle serial output / analog output Spindle speed control CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (This manual) Canned cycle spindle...

  • Page 1496

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1468 - 11.13 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL Overview This function can exercise synchronous control on spindles. This function can also control the rotation phase of spindles, so that not only a round rod but also a non-standard workpiece can be grasped b...

  • Page 1497

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1469 - When the parameter SSS (No. 3704#4) is se to 1 Which slave spindle is synchronized with which master spindle is set using parameter No. 4831. Master spindle Slave spindle. Spindle number Arbitrary spindle Arbitrary spindle - When four spindles ...

  • Page 1498

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1470 - - Configuration of synchronized spindles (in a multi-path system) When the parameter SSS (No. 3704#4) is se to 0 The configuration of synchronized spindles is as follows: Master spindle Slave spindle. Spindle number First spindle of each pathS...

  • Page 1499

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1471 - Example of parameter setting) Spindle configuration of each path Six spindles (four spindles of path 1 + two spindles of path 2) Logic spindle number common to system Path number + intra-path spindle number First spindle (S1) First spindle of pat...

  • Page 1500

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1472 - Path 1Path 2Spindle S1(S11)Spindle S2(S12)Spindle S3(S13)Spindle S4(S14)Spindle S5(S21)Spindle S6(S22)Master spindle with which slave spindle is synchronized Example 2: Combining spindles of different paths for spindle synchronization Paramet...

  • Page 1501

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1473 - • When the parameter SCB(No. 4800#5) is set to 1 The configuration of synchronized spindles is as follows (regardless of the setting of bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No. 3704): Master spindle Slave spindle. Spindle number First spindle of path 1 ...

  • Page 1502

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1474 - When the two spindles hold a workpiece, do not specify spindle phase synchronization. - Speed specification • In the spindle synchronous control mode, the specification of a speed for the master spindle is valid. • In the spindle synchron...

  • Page 1503

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1475 - Spindle S2 : Placed in synchronous control state with spindle speed S200 (1/min). If the speed of each slave spindle specified by multiplying the speed specified for the master spindle by a speed ratio exceeds the value set in the parameter RTSM...

  • Page 1504

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1476 - • The maximum speed in spindle synchronous control depends on the maximum speed (parameter No. 4020) of the spindle motor of the master spindle. Example) Maximum speed of the spindle motor of a master spindle: 6000 min-1 Maximum speed of the...

  • Page 1505

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1477 - Signal Spindle synchronous control signal SPSYC<Gn038#2> [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal specifies switching to the spindle synchronous control mode for the first/second spindles. [Operation] When this signal is set ...

  • Page 1506

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1478 - However, when this signal is set to 1 from 0 again, a phase matching operation is performed. This signal is valid only when bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No. 3704 is set to 0. Set a phase shift amount in parameter No. 4034. When bit 5 (SCB) of parame...

  • Page 1507

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1479 - NOTE 1 Before specifying these signals, ensure that the spindle synchronous speed control completion signal FSPSYx is set to 1. When the spindle synchronous speed control completion signal FSPSYx is set to 0, phase matching operation is not perfo...

  • Page 1508

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1480 - Spindle synchronous speed control completion signal for each spindle FSPSY1 to FSPSY4<Fn288#0 to Fn288#3> [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals post that spindle synchronous control (speed synchronization) with each spi...

  • Page 1509

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1481 - This signal is valid only when bit 4 (SSS) of parameter No. 3704 is set to 0. When bit 5 (SCB) of parameter No. 4800 is set to 1, an address of n = 0 is valid. NOTE Even if this signal is once set to 1, this signal is set to 0 when the speed di...

  • Page 1510

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1482 - Spindle phase error monitor signal SYCAL<Fn044#4> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal posts that in the spindle synchronous control mode for the first/second spindles, the error pulse difference between the two spindles ...

  • Page 1511

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1483 - Spindle synchronous speed ratio control signal SBRT<Gn038#1> [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal specifies switching to speed ratio control in spindle synchronous control. [Operation] When this signal is set to 1, speed ...

  • Page 1512

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1484 - - Signal allocation of spindle-type signals The signal allocation of spindle-type varies according to the path number to which each spindle belongs and intra-path spindle number. Here, the address allocation of the spindle synchronous control s...

  • Page 1513

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1485 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3799 SVPs [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit spindle # 3 SVPs As synchronization errors displayed on the spindle screen: 0: Monitor values are displayed. 1: Peak-hold values are display...

  • Page 1514

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1486 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3716 A/Ss [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit spindle NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 0 A/Ss Spindle motor type is : 0: Analog spi...

  • Page 1515

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1487 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 4800 SCB [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 5 SCB The combination of a master spindle and slave s...

  • Page 1516

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1488 - 4810 Error pulse between two spindles when synchronizing phases in the spindle synchronization control mode [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word spindle [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 255 Set an allowable err...

  • Page 1517

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1489 - - When spindle synchronization control is exercised with the first spindle selected as a master spindle and the second spindle selected as a slave spindle No.4831(1)=0 No.4831(2)=1 No.4831(3)=0 No.4831(4)=0 - When spindle synchronization con...

  • Page 1518

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1490 - 4832 Master spindle of each slave spindle under spindle synchronization control (spindle number common to the system) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input ...

  • Page 1519

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1491 - 7635 Ratio of slave spindle speed in spindle synchronization control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte spindle [Valid data range] 0 to 9 This parameter sets the ratio of master spindle speed:slave spindle speed (1:n) in spindle s...

  • Page 1520

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1492 - Reference item For details of the parameters (No. 4000 to No. 4539), signals, and alarms for the serial spindle control unit, refer to the manuals related to serial spindles listed below. FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series PARAMETER MANUAL (B-652...

  • Page 1521

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1493 - 11.14 SPINDLE ORIENTATION Overview This function stops the spindle at a specified position. The spindle can be stopped in either of the following two ways. - The spindle is stopped by applying a function of the spindle control unit. - The spindl...

  • Page 1522

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1494 - <2> Orientation with the stop position set externally: Bit 0 (ORT) of parameter No. 3729 = 1 By externally setting the 12-bit orientation external stop position command signal and inputting the spindle orientation command signal, the spin...

  • Page 1523

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1495 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn070 ORCMA Gn078 SH07ASH06ASH05ASH04ASH03ASH02A SH01A SH00A Gn079 SH11ASH10A SH09A SH08A Gn074 ORCMB Gn080 SH07BSH06BSH05BSH04BSH03BSH02B SH01B SH00B Gn081 SH11BSH10B SH09B SH...

  • Page 1524

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1496 - 4031 Stop position in orientation by a position coder (MAIN spindle) 4204 Stop position in orientation by a position coder (SUB spindle) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word spindle [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range...

  • Page 1525

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1497 - Note NOTE Spindle orientation with the spindle positioning function differs from that described in this section. For details, see "Spindle Positioning." Reference item Manual name Item name FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIRER αi series DESCRIPTIO...

  • Page 1526

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1498 - 11.15 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING Overview Spindle output switching switches between the two motor windings, one for low speed and the other for high speed, incorporated into the special spindle motors. This ensures that the spindle motor demonstra...

  • Page 1527

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1499 - - When gear selection output signals, GR2O and GR1O <F034 #0, #1>, are used (for machining centers in which constant surface speed control is not provided and GTT, bit 4 of parameter No. 3706, is set to 0) Set two gears, which are almost th...

  • Page 1528

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1500 - 11.16 SIMPLE SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL Overview Spindles can be synchronized with each other for control. Two spindles can be combined, one as a master spindle and the other as a slave spindle, so that Cs contouring control, rigid tapping, spi...

  • Page 1529

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1501 - - Configuration of synchronized spindles In simple spindle synchronous control, a spindle that accepts an S command/move command is referred to as a master spindle, and a spindle that ignores a command for itself and performs operation in synch...

  • Page 1530

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1502 - 2 Cs contour control mode When the Cs contouring control option is used together, Cs contouring control on a slave spindle operating in synchronism with the master spindle is possible. (Control independent of the master spindle is impossible.) ...

  • Page 1531

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1503 - With a move command for positioning of a Cs contouring control axis or spindle in the parking state, only the movement of the spindle in the parking state is stopped by updating the coordinate system. Reference position return operation for a C...

  • Page 1532

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1504 - NOTE 4 Do not specify a reference position return operation in the Cs contouring control mode or a spindle orientation operation in the spindle positioning mode while the two spindles are placed in the parking state. When the two spindles are pla...

  • Page 1533

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1505 - - Relationship between simple spindle synchronous control and spindle synchronous control The spindle synchronous control mode and the simple spindle synchronous control mode cannot be selected for the same spindle at the same time. In a mode ot...

  • Page 1534

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1506 - NOTE 1 After initialization to the spindle rotation control mode, operation is performed with a speed command for the master spindle. So, a speed change can occur. 2 Even if the master spindle is already at the reference position, the slave spind...

  • Page 1535

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1507 - - Position deviation check and alarm display When simple spindle synchronous control is used in a mode other than the spindle rotation control mode, the master spindle and slave spindle are checked for a position deviation. An in-position check ...

  • Page 1536

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1508 - Signal Simple spindle synchronous control signal ESRSYC<Gn064#6> [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal specifies switching to the simple spindle synchronous control mode for the first/second spindles. [Operation] When this...

  • Page 1537

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1509 - Second simple spindle synchronous parking signal PKESS2<Gn122#7> or PKESS2<Gn031#7> [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal parks the second spindle in simple spindle synchronous control. [Operation] When this signal ...

  • Page 1538

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1510 - Phase error monitor signal SYCAL<Fn044#4> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal posts that in the simple spindle synchronous control mode for the first/second spindles, the error pulse difference between the two spindles i...

  • Page 1539

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1511 - Even in the simple spindle synchronous control mode, the signals that need to be input/output or are used to control those functions (such as spindle orientation) directly specified from the PMC for the spindle control unit are provided independe...

  • Page 1540

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1512 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3704 SSY [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 5 SSY Simple synchronous spindle contr...

  • Page 1541

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1513 - NOTE 1 This parameter is valid only when bit 5 (SSY) of parameter No. 3704 is set to 0. 2 If the parking signals PK7 and PK8 for synchronization control are used when simple spindle synchronous control and synchronization control are used at the ...

  • Page 1542

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1514 - 4821 Master axis of each slave spindle under simple synchronous spindle control NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte spindle [Valid data r...

  • Page 1543

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1515 - 4826 Allowable error count for the error pulses between two spindles in the simple synchronization spindle control mode [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word spindle [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set th...

  • Page 1544

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1516 - Reference item For details of the parameters (No. 4000 to No. 4539), signals, and alarms for the serial spindle control unit, refer to the manuals related to serial spindles listed below. FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series PARAMETER MANUAL (B-6528...

  • Page 1545

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1517 - 11.17 SIMPLE SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL INDEPENDENT PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION FUNCTION Overview When Cs contouring control axes are placed under simple spindle synchronous control, pitch error compensation can be exercised on the master spindle ...

  • Page 1546

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1518 - - Example of setting simple spindle synchronous control pitch error compensation) - Parameter setting Parameter number Description Setting value 3601#1 Enable independent pitch error compensation for Cs contouring control axes 1 3620 Reference p...

  • Page 1547

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1519 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3601 EPC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 1 EPC The pitch error compensation on ...

  • Page 1548

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1520 - 3666 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position for each slave axis when independent pitch error compensation is performed under simple spindle synchronous control NOTE When this parameter is set, the power ...

  • Page 1549

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1521 - 3671 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely positive position for each slave axis when independent pitch error compensation is performed under simple spindle synchronous control NOTE When this parameter is set, the power ...

  • Page 1550

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1522 - 3676 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely negative position for each slave axis when independent both-direction pitch error compensation is performed under simple spindle synchronous control NOTE When this parameter is ...

  • Page 1551

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1523 - 3681 Pitch error compensation value at the reference position when a movement is made to the reference position in the direction opposite to the reference position return direction for each slave axis in the case where independent both-direction...

  • Page 1552

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1524 - 11.18 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION Overview With this function, an overheat alarm (OH0704) is raised and the spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL is issued when the spindle speed deviates from the specified speed due to m...

  • Page 1553

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1525 - <2> When time p specified in parameter No. 4914 elapses after the specified speed Sc changes. - Examples of spindle speed fluctuation detection (Example 1) When an alarm (OH0704) is issued after a specified spindle speed is reached Spind...

  • Page 1554

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1526 - Specified speed : (Speed specified by address S and five-digit value) × (spindle override) Actual speed : Speed detected with a position coder p : Period after a change occurs in the actual spindle speed until detection starts Parameter No.4914...

  • Page 1555

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1527 - - Spindle that can be subjected to the spindle speed fluctuation detection function, depending on the relationship between system configuration and spindle The table below show some examples explaining the spindle to be subjected to the spindle ...

  • Page 1556

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1528 - Examples of spindles subjected to detection - Specified spindle :Indicates which path is specifying which spindle. - Feedback pulse :Indicates the contents of the feedback pulse to be used, depending on a selected position coder. - Feedback subje...

  • Page 1557

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1529 - *2 The signals for selecting spindle feedback of each path (SLPCA<Gn064.2>, SLPCB<Gn064.3>, SLPCC<Gn0403.4>, SLPCD<Gn0403.5>) are set to select feedback in each path, for both path 1 and path 2. *3 The signals for selectin...

  • Page 1558

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1530 - Spindle specified Spindle FB 1st spindle command Spindle PC1 *SSTP1#1 0 1 *SSTP2#1 0 1 *SSTP3#1 0 1 *SSTP4#1 0 1 2nd spindle commandSpindle PC23rd spindle commandSpindle PC34th spindle commandSpindle PC4 PC2SLC#1 0 ...

  • Page 1559

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1531 - Spindle specified Spindle FB *SSTP#2 0 1 ×SOV#2 0% <>0% G26 This feedback is subjected to spindle speed fluctuation detection. Spindle specified Spindle FB 1st spindle commandSpindle PC1*SSTP#1 0 1 ×SOV#1 0% <>0%G26 ...

  • Page 1560

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1532 - Sharing a spindle between different paths Spindle specified Spindle FB*SSTP#1 0 1 ×SOV#1 0% <>0% G26 Path 1 SLSPA~D#1 1 2 ~ n 1st spindle command Spindle PC1 *SSTP1#1 0 1 *SSTP2#1 0 1 2nd spindle command Spindle P...

  • Page 1561

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1533 - Signal Spindle fluctuation detection alarm signal SPAL <Fn035#0> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that the actual spindle speed is not within a tolerance to the specified speed. [Output condition] The si...

  • Page 1562

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1534 - 4912 Spindle variation ratio (r) for not issuing a spindle speed fluctuation detection alarm [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word spindle [Unit of data] 1%, 0.1% [Valid data range] 1 to 100, 1 to 1000 When the spindle speed fluctua...

  • Page 1563

    B-63943EN-1/02 11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION - 1535 - Number Message Description PS5305 ILLEGAL SPINDLE NUMBER For the spindle selection function using address P under multi spindle control: <1>Address P is not specified. <2>The spindle selected with parameter No.3781 is not specified. &...

  • Page 1564

    11.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1536 - NOTE 14 For a serial spindle, carefully check the gear count selection statuses of clutch/gear signals (CTH1, CTH2) and gear selection signals (GR30, GR20, GR10 (type M)/GR1, GR2(type T). The spindle speed fluctuation detection function does not...

  • Page 1565

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1537 - 12 TOOL FUNCTIONS

  • Page 1566

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1538 - 12.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF LATHE SYSTEM T Overview When address T followed by a numeric value is specified, the code signal and strobe signal are sent to the machine and are used to select a tool on the machine side. Just one T code can be specified in a ...

  • Page 1567

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1539 - 12.1.1 Tool Offset T Overview Tool offset is used to compensate for the difference when the tool actually used differs from the imagined tool used in programming (usually, standard tool). Offset amounton X axisStandard toolActual toolOffset amounton Z...

  • Page 1568

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1540 - 12.1.2 Tool Geometry Offset and Tool Wear Offset T Overview Tool geometry offset and tool wear offset are possible to divide the tool offset to the tool geometry offset for compensating the tool shape or tool mounting position and the tool wear offset ...

  • Page 1569

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1541 - 12.1.3 Offset T Explanation - Compensation methods Two methods are available to geometry compensation and wear compensation, compensation with tool movement and compensation with coordinate shift. Which compensation method to select can be specified ...

  • Page 1570

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1542 - NOTE 1 When G50 X_Z_T_ ; is specified, the tool is not moved. The coordinate system in which the coordinate value of the tool position is (X,Z) is set. The tool position is obtained by subtracting the offset value corresponding to the tool offset numbe...

  • Page 1571

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1543 - - Canceling offset with reset Tool offset is canceled under one of the following conditions: <1> The power to the CNC is turned off and turned back on <2> The reset button on the MDI unit is pressed <3> A reset signal is input from...

  • Page 1572

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1544 - • Machine coordinate system setting (G53), reference position return (G28), second, third, and fourth reference position return (G30), floating reference position return (G30.1), and manual reference position return Basically, before performing these ...

  • Page 1573

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1545 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 WNPLWMLGC LGT LWT LGN 5002 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 1 LGN Geometry offset number of tool offset 0: Is the same as wear offset number 1: Specifies the geometry offset number by the ...

  • Page 1574

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1546 - # 7 WNP Imaginary tool tip number used for tool nose radius compensation, when the geometry/wear compensation function is equipped, is the number specified by: 0: Geometry offset number 1: Wear offset number #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 TGC 50...

  • Page 1575

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1547 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 LVC TGC 5006 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit # 1 TGC If a T code is specified in a block where G50, G04, or G10 is specified: 0: No alarm is issued. 1: The alarm (PS0245) is issued. # 3 ...

  • Page 1576

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1548 - Number of digits of an offset number used with a T code command 5028 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 3 Specify the number of digits of a T code portion that is used for a tool offset number (wear offset n...

  • Page 1577

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1549 - 12.1.4 Extended Tool Selection Function T Overview In lathe system machines, tools are changed mainly with the following two methods: (1) With a turret holding multiple tools, tools are changed by turning the turret (T command). (2) With an automatic ...

  • Page 1578

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1550 - - T command operation (1) When bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No.5040 is 0 The T command performs an auxiliary function and tool compensation. The code signal issued to the machine is the T command value except the last 1 to 3 digits. For example, suppose tha...

  • Page 1579

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1551 - - Compensation number of tool-nose radius compensation Same as for tool compensation described above. - Specification of G43, etc. (1) When bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No.5040 is 0 G codes of group 23 such as G43 cannot be specified. Specifying such a G ...

  • Page 1580

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1552 - Limitation - Switching between tool compensation mode and another compensation mode In the tool compensation (G43.7) mode, a command such as a tool length compensation command (G43/G44, G43.1, G43.4, or G43.5) cannot be specified. Similarly, in a mode ...

  • Page 1581

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1553 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 TLG TCT 5040 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 3 TCT The tool change method is based on: 0: Turret rotation. (Tool change operation is performed with a T command only.) With ...

  • Page 1582

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1554 - 12.1.5 Active Offset Value Change Function Based on Manual Feed Overview When rough machining/semifinish machining is to be performed using a single tool, you may make a fine adjustment of a tool offset value. Moreover, at setup time, you may want to m...

  • Page 1583

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1555 - - Changing a tool offset value The tool offset value with the offset number corresponding to an T code specified in automatic operation is changed. If there is no currently valid tool offset value as in a case where no T code is specified after a cycle...

  • Page 1584

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1556 - Example - Specified workpiece coordinate system : G56 - Workpiece origin offset of G56 (X axis) : 50.000 - Workpiece origin offset of G56 (Z axis) : 5.000 - Workpiece origin offset of G56 (C axis) : 180.000 - Workpiece origin offset of G56 (Y axis) : -60...

  • Page 1585

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1557 - Signal Active offset value change mode signal CHGAO<Gn297#4> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects the active offset value change mode based on manual feed. [Operation] If all of the following conditions are satisfied, the active offs...

  • Page 1586

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1558 - Active offset value change in-progress signal MCHAO<Fn297#5> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Posts that the active offset value change mode based on manual feed is selected and an offset value is being changed. [Output condition] When ...

  • Page 1587

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1559 - Signal address - When bit 2 (MOP) of parameter No. 5040 is set to 0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn297 AOFS2AOFS1CHGAO Fn297 MCHAO - When bit 2 (MOP) of parameter No. 5040 is set to 1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn203 AOFS2AOFS1CHGAO F...

  • Page 1588

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1560 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3115 APL [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 5 APL When the active offset value change mode based on manual feed is selected, the relative position indication is automatically: 0: Not pr...

  • Page 1589

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1561 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5041 AON ATP ACR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 ACR If the active offset value change mode based on manual feed is selected in the reset state or clear state, the tool offset value: 0: Can b...

  • Page 1590

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1562 - # 6 AON A tool offset value changed with the active offset value change function based on manual feed becomes valid: 0: In the next block where a T code is specified 1: In the next buffered block NOTE 1 This parameter is valid when bit 6 (EVO) of pa...

  • Page 1591

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1563 - Caution CAUTION 1 When bit 1 (ATP) of parameter No. 5041 is set to 0, a tool offset value change can be made by making a movement on any of the basic axes. When an offset value change for an axis is undesirable, interlock the axis. 2 When a movement is...

  • Page 1592

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1564 - 12.2 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM M Overview Selection of tools can be done by commanding tool numbers with up to an 8-digit numeral after address T. Signal Refer to “AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION” Parameter 3032 Allowab...

  • Page 1593

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1565 - 12.2.1 Tool Compensation Memory M Overview Tool compensation values include geometry compensation values and wear compensation values. (Fig. 12.2.1(a) Geometric compensation and wear compensation) Tool compensation values can also be used without disc...

  • Page 1594

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1566 - - Tool compensation memory One of the tool compensation memory A/B/C can be selected according to the configuration of offset amount. (1) Tool compensation memory A There is no difference between geometry compensation memory and wear compensation mem...

  • Page 1595

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1567 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3205 OSC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit # 4 OSC On the offset screen, offset value erasure by a soft key is: 0: Enabled. 1: Disabled. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3290 GOF WOF [Input type] Par...

  • Page 1596

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1568 - 3294 Start number of tool offset values whose input by MDI is disabled 3295 Number of tool offset values (from the start number) whose input by MDI is disabled [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 999 When the...

  • Page 1597

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1569 - 5013 Maximum value of tool wear compensation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (offset unit) [Minimum unit of data] The increment system of a tool offset value is followed. [Valid data range] The settings o...

  • Page 1598

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1570 - 5014 Maximum value of incremental input for tool wear compensation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (offset unit) [Minimum unit of data] The increment system of a tool offset value is followed. [Valid data...

  • Page 1599

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1571 - 12.2.2 Active Offset Value Change Function Based on Manual Feed Overview When rough machining/semifinish machining is to be performed using a single tool, you may make a fine adjustment of a tool length compensation value or cutter compensation value. ...

  • Page 1600

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1572 - Example - Specified H code: H10 - Value set with offset number 10: 54.700 mm - Travel distance on the Z-axis by manual feed: -2.583 mm In this example, the value of offset number 10 becomes: 54.700 + (-2.583) = 52.117 mm NOTE A changed tool lengt...

  • Page 1601

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1573 - - Changing a workpiece origin offset value The workpiece origin offset of the workpiece coordinate system corresponding to a G code from G54 to G59 or from G54.1 P1 to P48 (300) specified during automatic operation is changed on an axis-by-axis basis. ...

  • Page 1602

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1574 - Tool offset memory Changed offset value B No distinction is made between a tool length compensation value and cutter compensation value. The value specified with the offset number corresponding to the currently valid H code or D code is changed. Dependin...

  • Page 1603

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1575 - Signal Active offset value change mode signal CHGAO<Gn297#4> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects the active offset value change mode based on manual feed. [Operation] If all of the following conditions are satisfied, the active offs...

  • Page 1604

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1576 - Signal address - When bit 2 (MOP) of parameter No. 5040 is set to 0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn297 AOFS2AOFS1CHGAO Fn297 MCHAO - When bit 2 (MOP) of parameter No. 5040 is set to 1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn203 AOFS2AOFS1CHGAO F...

  • Page 1605

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1577 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3115 APL [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 5 APL When the active offset value change mode based on manual feed is selected, the relative position indication is automatically: 0: Not p...

  • Page 1606

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1578 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5041 AON ACR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 ACR If the active offset value change mode based on manual feed is selected in the reset state or clear state, the tool length compensation value...

  • Page 1607

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1579 - Limitation - Manual operation that cannot change an active offset value In a mode other than the manual handle feed mode/incremental feed mode/jog feed mode, no active offset value can be changed. Moreover, no active offset value can be changed in the m...

  • Page 1608

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1580 - 12.3 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION 12.3.1 Tool Management Function Overview The tool management function totally manages tool information including information about tool offset and tool life. Explanation A tool type number is specified with a T code. The...

  • Page 1609

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1581 - Details of data The following details the data registered for each data number: - Tool type number (T code) Item Description Data length 4byte Valid data range 0,1 to 99,999,999 - Tool life counter Item Description Data length 4byte Unit of data When...

  • Page 1610

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1582 - - Tool life status Item Description Data length 1byte Detail data 0: Life management is not performed. 1: Tool not yet used 2: Life remains. 3: Life expired. 4: Tool breakage (skip) The machine (PMC) determines tool breakage and stores correspondin...

  • Page 1611

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1583 - T - Tool geometry compensation number (G) Item Description Data length 2byte Valid data range 0 to 999 - Tool wear compensation number (W) Item Description Data length 2byte Valid data range 0 to 999 NOTE When the machine control type is the combine...

  • Page 1612

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1584 - NOTE For the maximum number of tool management function customize data, refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder. - Cartridge management table The storage status of tools in cartridges is managed with the cartridge management table. - ...

  • Page 1613

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1585 - Spindle position First Second Third Fourth Seventh path711 712 713 714 Eighth path 811 812 813 814 Ninth path 911 912 913 914 Tenth path 1011 1012 1013 1014 Standby position First Second Third Fourth First path 121(21) 122(22) 123(23) 124(24) Second p...

  • Page 1614

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1586 - - Tool life management and tool change The CNC performs tool life management, regarding tools having the same tool type number as a group. When a tool type number (T code) is specified by an NC program, the tool management data registered in the CNC is...

  • Page 1615

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1587 - Cartridge management table No. Cartridge No.Pot No. Tool management data No. 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 12 : : : : 29 1 29 2 30 1 30 1 31 2 1 11 : : : 63 2 29 21 64 2 30 0 Spindle management table Standby position table Spindle name Cartridge No.(Spi...

  • Page 1616

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1588 - If multiple tools have the same life value, a search is made according to the following priority: High Spindle position Standby position Low Cartridge If a cartridge contains tools having the same life value, the tool with the smaller t...

  • Page 1617

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1589 - N80 M06; (1) In response to the M06 command, M code binary value 0006 is output to PMC F addresses <F010 to F013> and the MF signal is output to <F007#0>. (2) The machine performs a tool change operation, and moves the tool from the standby...

  • Page 1618

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1590 - (4) Since a tool change operation is not needed, the PMC sends completion signal FIN to the CNC. T code output<F026-F029>Tool function strobesignal TF<F007#3>Completion signalFIN<G004#3> N80 M06; (1) M code binary value 6 is output t...

  • Page 1619

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1591 - Spindle management table Standby position table Spindle name Cartridge No.(Spindle No.)Data No. Standby position name Cartridge No. (Standby position No.) Data No. Spindle position 11 0 Standby position 21 0 - Type for counting the ...

  • Page 1620

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1592 - Tool change signalTLCH<F064#0>Tool reset signalTLRST<G048#7>Tool change - Type for counting time Operations performed when a life is counted by counting time are explained below. Suppose that the tool management data is set as listed below....

  • Page 1621

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1593 - Tool change signalTLCH<F064#0>Tool reset signalTLRST<G048#7>Tool changeIndividual tool changesignalTLCHI<F064#2>Individual tool resetsignalTLRSTI<G048#6>Tool change NOTE Time is counted up while a cutting feed operation after th...

  • Page 1622

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1594 - - When the tool being used is broken A tool breakage is detected by the machine and is posted to the CNC via the PMC. The PMC posts the tool breakage to the CNC in one of the following three methods: - The tool life status is changed to 4 (tool breaka...

  • Page 1623

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1595 - - T code command for specifying a particular tool To specify a particular tool directly without allowing the CNC to select a tool, use the following format: M_ T_ ; NOTE A block for specifying the above command must not contain any other command. M...

  • Page 1624

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1596 - - Tool search order Tools having a tool type number (T) specified by a program are searched sequentially from tool management data number 1 while registered data contents are checked. The following shows how a search operation is made within the NC: I...

  • Page 1625

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1597 - - System variables The following tool management data of the tool being used as a spindle after a tool change by M06 and the tool to be used next which is specified by a T code can be read through custom macro variables: Being usedItem #8401 Data number...

  • Page 1626

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1598 - Being usedItem #8464 Customize data 34 #8465 Customize data 35 #8466 Customize data 36 #8467 Customize data 37 #8468 Customize data 38 #8469 Customize data 39 #8470 Customize data 40 When a cartridge number of a spindle position (11 to 14) or standby po...

  • Page 1627

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1599 - If parameter No. 13265 is set to 0, when a compensation number registered for a tool attached at a spindle position is specified, the specification format varies according to the number of digits as follows, which is the same as for conventional T: When ...

  • Page 1628

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1600 - - G10 format Addition, modification, and deletion are performed for the tool management data and cartridge management table from programs. If a format error is found in the commands from G10 L75/L76/L77 to G11, or if a value beyond the valid data range...

  • Page 1629

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1601 - Signal Tool change signal TLCH<Fn064#0>,TLCH1 to 4<Fn328#0 to #3> [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals post that the life of the last one of the tools having the same tool type number has expired. [Output condition] Thes...

  • Page 1630

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1602 - NOTE 1 Tool change signal TLCH is not cleared by reset. 2 This signal is provided for each spindle position. 3 G48#6 is input signals for the first spindle. Tool skip signals TLSKP<Gn048#5>,TLSKP1 to 4<Gn329#0 to #3> [Classification] Input ...

  • Page 1631

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1603 - Tool life count override signals *TLV0 to *TLV9<Gn049#0 to Gn050#1> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Overrides the life count (time) if parameter LFV (No. 6801#2) is specified. Each of the ten binary code signals has a unique override val...

  • Page 1632

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1604 - Tool management data modification in-progress signal TLSG10<Fn315#2> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal posts that a modification to the tool management data, cartridge management table, or string data is being made by the G10 ...

  • Page 1633

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1605 - Tool life expiration notice signals TLCHB<Fn064#3>,TLCHB1 to 4<Fn329#4 to #7> [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals post that the life of the tool being used has almost expired. [Output condition] These signals turn to &q...

  • Page 1634

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1606 - Life expiration signal TMFNFD<Fn315#6> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates whether a valid tool whose life still remains is left among the tools having the type number specified by a T code. [Output condition] This si...

  • Page 1635

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1607 - Fn064 TLCHBTLCHI TLNW TLCH Fn315 TLMEM TMFNFD TLMOT TLMG10 TLMSRH TLSKF Fn328 TLCHI4TLCHI3TLCHI2TLCHI1TLCH4TLCH3 TLCH2 TLCH1 Fn329 TLCHB4 TLCHB3 TLCHB2 TLCHB1 TLSKF4 TLSKF3 TLSKF2 TLSKF1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3108 PCT [I...

  • Page 1636

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1608 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 13200 NFD NAM T0O TP2 ETE TRT THN TCF [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 TCF When a T code is specified with the tool management function: 0: A cartridge number and pot number found by the NC are out...

  • Page 1637

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1609 - # 7 NFD When a T code is specified, but a valid tool with a remaining lifetime cannot be found in the cartridge: 0: The spindle position and standby position are also searched. 1: The spindle position and standby position are not searched. #7 #6 #...

  • Page 1638

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1610 - # 4 DO2 On the tool management function screen, the second geometry tool offset data is: 0: Displayed. 1: Not displayed. NOTE This parameter is valid when the machine control type is the lathe system or combined system. # 6 DOT On the tool man...

  • Page 1639

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1611 - # 6 SWC The tools with the same tool type number are searched for: 0: Tool with the shortest lifetime. 1: Tool with the small customization data number. In this case, a customization data number is to be set in parameter No. 13260. # 7 TCN Tool ...

  • Page 1640

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1612 - 13222 Number of data items in the first cartridge NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 64 (Extended to 240 or 1000 by the...

  • Page 1641

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1613 - 13232 Number of data items in the third cartridge NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 64(Extended to 240 or 1000 by the ...

  • Page 1642

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1614 - 13238 Start pot number of the fourth cartridge NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1to9999 This parameter sets the start pot ...

  • Page 1643

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1615 - 13260 Customization data number to be searched for [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 0 to 40 When bit 6 (SWC) of parameter No. 13203 is set to 1, this parameter sets a customization data number to be searched for....

  • Page 1644

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1616 - Number Message Description PS5317 ALL TOOL LIFE IS OVER The lives of all tools with the specified tool-type number have expired. Replace the tool. Limitation When the option of this function is used, the following option cannot be used: - FACTOLINK fun...

  • Page 1645

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1617 - 12.3.2 Tool Management Extension Function The following functions have been added to the tool management function: 1. Customization of tool management data display 2. Setting of spindle position/standby position display 3. Input of customize data with ...

  • Page 1646

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1618 - 12.3.2.5 Selection of a tool life count period A tool life count period can be chosen between 1 sec and 8 msec on a tool-by-tool basis. Bit 5 of tool information is used to make a life count period selection. Item Description Data length 1 byte (flag d...

  • Page 1647

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1619 - The details of the data displayed on the total life data screen are as follows: - Sort No. Item Description Data length 2byte Valid data range1 to maximum number of tools (64, 240, or 1,000) The number representing a tool of a different type is display...

  • Page 1648

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1620 - - Total maximum life Item Description Data length 4byte Unit of data When the number of use times is specified: Time When time is specified: Seconds/milliseconds Valid data rangeWhen the number of use times is specified: 0 to 2,147,483,647 time When t...

  • Page 1649

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1621 - - Data to be totaled The data to be totaled on the total life data screen is that for those tools that satisfy the following conditions. No (disabled) Is tool management data enabled? (Is RGS, bit 0 of tool information, set?) Yes (enabled) Yes (not pe...

  • Page 1650

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1622 - NOTE 1 If data is with the same tool type number and both time and number of times are specified as life count types, and the data is to be totaled, the data is totaled for both each time and each number of times and displayed in the time and number of ...

  • Page 1651

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1623 - - Order Item Description Data length 2byte Valid data range1 to maximum number of tools (64, 240, or 1,000) Those tools whose tool life status is "enabled" are displayed in either of the following orders: - If SWC, bit 6 of parameter No. 13203,...

  • Page 1652

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1624 - Item Description Valid data rangeWhen the number of use times is specified: 0 to 99,999,999 times When time is specified: 0 to 3,599,999 s (999 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds) 0 to 3,599,999 milliseconds (59 minutes 59 seconds 999 milliseconds) - Notice ...

  • Page 1653

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1625 - If TDL is 1 - TKEY0 : Permits the input of tool type numbers. - TKEY1 : Permits the input of tool information. (If tool management function large-diameter tool support is used, permits the input of tool shape numbers.) - TKEY2 : Permits the input of the...

  • Page 1654

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1626 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 13201 TDB TDC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit system common NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 0 TDC The function of customizing the tool ...

  • Page 1655

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1627 - 12.3.3 Tool Management Function Oversize Tools Support Overview Tool management function oversize tools support is added to the tool management function. The figure of an oversize tool can be defined freely, and the figure of each oversize tool is regis...

  • Page 1656

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1628 - 212223242526272930 31323334 353637383940 41424344 45 Pot start number Pot end number When pattern start number is 2128 1 2 3 4 5 12345Normal toolOversize tool Free pot Cartridge Tool manage-ment No.Tool information Tool figure No.1 0000...

  • Page 1657

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1629 - Tool figure No. Left directionRight directionUpper directionLower direction Figure 1 2 2 2 2 A 2 1 1 1 1 A 3 2 3 3 1 A 4 2 0 0 0 A 5 2 2 2 2 A Omitted 19 1 3 2 2 A 20 2 2 4 4 A Tool figure setting screen NOTE 1 Even if a tool figure number is set in th...

  • Page 1658

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1630 - - Cartridge of matrix type The area occupied by a tool stored in a cartridge of matrix type is described below. Set left, right, upper, and lower pots occupied relative to a reference pot in steps of 0.5 pot. The maximum specifiable value is 4 (for 2 p...

  • Page 1659

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1631 - 2 31Pots in slant directionsare automatically set asoccupied pots to formrectangular occupied area. Fig. 12.3.3(b) For tool figure pattern number 1 in Table 1 Occupied area Nonoccupied areaWhen 4 is set for left/right/upper/lower When 3 is set for...

  • Page 1660

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1632 - - Cartridge of chain type The area occupied by a tool stored in a cartridge of chain type is described below. As with the matrix type, input data on the tool figure setting screen. In this case, set pots to be occupied only in the left and right direct...

  • Page 1661

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1633 - - Tool management extension function - Customization of tool management data display In customization of tool management data display with the tool management extension function, tool figure number display can be customized. R Item Display width 12 ...

  • Page 1662

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1634 - 13241 Number of rows of the first cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 ...

  • Page 1663

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1635 - 13243 Number of rows of the second cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0...

  • Page 1664

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1636 - 13245 Number of rows of the third cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 ...

  • Page 1665

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1637 - 13247 Number of rows of the fourth cartridge (when the cartridge is of the matrix type) NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0...

  • Page 1666

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1638 - Number Message Description 5361 ILLEGAL MAGAZINE DATA Tools stored in the cartridge are interfering with each other. Reregister the tools in the cartridge, or modify the tool management data or tool figure data. If this alarm is issued, no tool interfe...

  • Page 1667

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1639 - 12.4 TOOL COMPENSATION 12.4.1 Cutter Compensation and Tool Nose Radius Compensation Overview - Cutter compensation Use of cutter compensation can offset a programmed tool path by the tool radius set in the CNC when machining is performed. When the rad...

  • Page 1668

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1640 - - Tool nose radius compensation Use of tool-nose radius compensation can offset a programmed tool path by the tool nose radius set in the CNC when machining is performed. When a machining profile is programmed using this function, and the radius of the...

  • Page 1669

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1641 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5001 EVR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 EVR When a tool compensation value is changed in cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation mode: 0: Enables the change, starting ...

  • Page 1670

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1642 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5003 SUV SUP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 SUP # 1 SUV These bits are used to specify the type of startup/cancellation of cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation. CSC CSU ...

  • Page 1671

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1643 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5004 ODI [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 2 ODI The setting of a cutter compensation/tool-nose radius compensation value is corrected as: 0: Radius value 1: Diameter value #7 #6 #5 ...

  • Page 1672

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1644 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5009 TIP [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 5 TIP In cutter compensation or tool nose radiu...

  • Page 1673

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1645 - 5024 Number of tool compensation values NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 999 Set the maximum allowable number of...

  • Page 1674

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1646 - OFE OFD OFC OFA Unit Valid data range1 0 0 0 0.000001mm ±999.999999mm For inch input OFE OFD OFC OFA Unit Valid data range0 0 0 1 0.001inch ±999.999inch 0 0 0 0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch 0 0 1 0 0.00001inch ±999.99999inch 0 1 0 0 0.000001inch ±999.9...

  • Page 1675

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1647 - 19625 Number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 3 to 8 This parameter sets the number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation...

  • Page 1676

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1648 - Number Message Description PS5448 INTERFERENCE TO AVD. AT G41/G42 In the interference check evade function of cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation, a further interference occurs for an already created interference evade vector. Reference...

  • Page 1677

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1649 - 12.5 CUTTER COMPENSATION 12.5.1 Tool Length Compensation M Overview When the difference between the tool length assumed at the time of programming and the tool length of the tool actually used for machining is set in offset memory, the difference in t...

  • Page 1678

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1650 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3104 DAL DRL [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 DRL Relative position 0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset. 1: The programmed position displa...

  • Page 1679

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1651 - # 6 EVO If a tool compensation value modification is made for tool length compensation A or tool length compensation B in the offset mode (G43 or G44): 0: The new value becomes valid in a block where G43, G44, or an H code is specified next. 1: The n...

  • Page 1680

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1652 - Example 1) An alarm is raised in the following cases:1) G68 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ ; : G43 H1 ; : G69 ; : G49 ;2) G43 H1 ; : G68 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ ; : G49(G43H2,H2 etc.) ; : G69 ;← PS0049 raised← PS0049 raised Example 2...

  • Page 1681

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1653 - Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0027 NO AXES COMMANDED IN G43/G44No axis is specified in G43 and G44 blocks for the tool length offset type C. Offset is not canceled but another axis is offset for the tool length offset type C. Multiple a...

  • Page 1682

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1654 - 12.5.2 Tool Length Compensation Shift Types M Overview A tool length offset operation can be performed by shifting the program coordinate system: The coordinate system containing the axis subject to tool length compensation is shifted by the tool leng...

  • Page 1683

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1655 - - Specifying offset on two or more axes Tool length compensation B enables offset on two or more axes by specifying offset axes in multiple blocks. To perform offset on X and Y axes G19 G43 H_; Performs offset on the X axis. G18 G43 H_; Performs offset...

  • Page 1684

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1656 - CAUTION 8 If offset has been performed on two or more axes with tool length compensation B, a G49 command causes the offset to be canceled on all axes; H0 causes the offset to be canceled only on the axis vertical to the specified plane. 9 If the tool l...

  • Page 1685

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1657 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5001 TAL TLB TLC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 TLC # 1 TLB These bits are used to select a tool length compensation type. Type TLB TLC Tool length compensation A 0 0 ...

  • Page 1686

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1658 - 12.5.3 Second Geometry Tool Offset T Overview To compensate for the difference in tool mounting position and in selected position, this function adds 32 sets of second geometry tool offset for each of the X, Z, and Y axes for all paths (up to 2000 sets...

  • Page 1687

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1659 - Example O (workpiece origin)ZXT01/Z (first) : 5T11 to T16/X (second) : 120T16/Z (second) : - 190T13/Z (second) : - 70T12/Z (second) : - 30T01T12T13T16T11----T11/Z (second) : 10OXZT01/X (first) : 20First path (standard turret)Second path(linear turret) I...

  • Page 1688

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1660 - Signal Second geometry tool offset signal G2SLC<Gn090#7> [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal selects whether to use the second geometry tool offset. [Operation] When a tool number is specified with a T code, only the first geome...

  • Page 1689

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1661 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn090 G2SLCG2Y G2Z G2X G2RVY G2RVZ G2RVX Parameter 3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to 8 Set the allowable numbers of di...

  • Page 1690

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1662 - # 6 LWM Tool offset operation based on tool movement is performed: 0: In a block where a T code is specified. 1: Together with a command for movement along an axis. 5024 Number of tool compensation values NOTE When this parameter is set, the pow...

  • Page 1691

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1663 - Example : When an offset number is specified using the lower 2 digits of a T code, set 2 in parameter No. 5028. Txxxxxx yy xxxxxx : Tool selection yy : Tool offset number NOTE A value longer than the setting of parameter No. 3032 (allowable number...

  • Page 1692

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1664 - 12.6 TOOL AXIS DIRECTION TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION 12.6.1 Tool Axis Direction Tool Length Compensation Overview When a five-axis machine that has two axes for rotating the tool is used, tool length compensation can be performed in a specified tool axis ...

  • Page 1693

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1665 - - Examples of machine configuration and rotation axis calculation formats Let Vx, Vy, Vz, Lc, a, b, and c be as follows : Vx,Vy,Vz : Tool compensation vectors along the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis Lc : Offset value a,b,c : Absolute coordinates on the A-a...

  • Page 1694

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1666 - (2) B-axis and C-axis, with the tool axis on the Z-axis CBZYXWorkpieceCB Vx = Lc * sin(b) * cos(c) Vy = Lc * sin(b) * sin(c) Vz = Lc * cos(b) (3) A-axis and B-axis, with the tool axis on the X-axis WorkpieceBAZYXAB Vx = Lc * cos(b) Vy =...

  • Page 1695

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1667 - (4) A-axis and B-axis, with the tool axis on the Z-axis, and the B-axis used as the master BAZYXWorkpieceBA Vx = Lc * cos(a) * sin(b) Vy = -Lc * sin(a) Vz = Lc * cos(a) * cos(b) (5) A-axis and B-axis, with the tool axis on the Z-axis, and the A-ax...

  • Page 1696

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1668 - - Tool holder offset The machine-specific length from the rotation center of the tool rotation axes (A- and B-axes, A- and C-axes, and B- and C-axes) to the tool mounting position is referred to as the tool holder offset. Unlike a tool length offset val...

  • Page 1697

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1669 - - Rotation axis offset Set offsets relative to the rotation angles of the rotation axes in parameter No. 19659. The compensation vector calculation formula is the same as that used for rotation axis origin compensation, except that Bp and Cp are changed...

  • Page 1698

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1670 - 12.6.2 Control Point Compensation of Tool Length Compensation Along Tool Axis Overview Normally, the control point of tool length compensation along the tool axis is the point of intersection of the centers of two rotation axes. The machine coordinates ...

  • Page 1699

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1671 - According to the machine type, set the values listed in the following table: Table 12.6.2(a) Setting the Tool Holder Offset and Rotation Center Compensation Vector Machine type Tool holder offset Parameter No. 19666 Rotation center compensation vectorPa...

  • Page 1700

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1672 - - Shifting the control point Conventionally, the center of a rotation axis was used as the control point. The control point can now be shifted as shown in the figure below. Then, when the rotation axis is at the 0-degree position also in tool length com...

  • Page 1701

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1673 - The method of shifting the control point can be selected using the following parameters: Table 12.6.2(b) Methods of Shifting the Control Point SVC (bit 5 of parameter No. 19665) SPR (bit 4 of parameter No. 19665) Shift of controlled point 0 - Shift is n...

  • Page 1702

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1674 - The shift vector (Sx, Sy, Sz) is calculated as follows: (A) When bit 5 (SVC) of parameter No. 19665 = 0, the vector is set to 0. (B) When bit 5 (SVC) of parameter No. 19665 = 1, and bit 4 (SBP) of parameter No. 19665 = 0: When the machine type is oth...

  • Page 1703

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1675 - (Example 1) There are linear axes X, Y, and Z, and rotation axes A, B, and C which rotate about the X-, Y-, and Z-axes, respectively. The tool axis direction is controlled with the rotation axes A and C. Parameter RAM(No.19650#0) X 0 Y 0 Z 0 A 1 B 0 C ...

  • Page 1704

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1676 - 19656 Tool axis direction [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 1 to 3 Enter the tool axis direction when the two rotation axes are set at 0 degrees. Data Tool axis direction1 X-axis 2 Y-axis 3 Z-axis 19657 Master ...

  • Page 1705

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1677 - A- and B-axes (The tool axis is the Z-axis and the B-axis is the master.) A- and B-axes (The tool axis is the Z-axis and the A-axis is the master.) Center of rotationCenter of rotationTool axis directionTool axis directionWorkpieceWorkpiece Example of ...

  • Page 1706

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1678 - 19658 Angular displacement of a rotation axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] deg [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer...

  • Page 1707

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1679 - 19662 Spindle center compensation vector in tool axis direction tool length compensation [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied ...

  • Page 1708

    12.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-63943EN-1/02 - 1680 - # 5 SVC The controlled point is: 0: Not shifted. 1: Shifted. The method of shifting is specified by bit 4 (SPR) of parameter No. 19665. NOTE When the machine has no rotation axis for rotating the tool (when parameter No. 19680 is set to 12 to speci...

  • Page 1709

    B-63943EN-1/02 12.TOOL FUNCTIONS - 1681 - 19667 Controlled-point shift vector [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of d...

  • Page 1710

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1682 - 13 PROGRAM COMMAND

  • Page 1711

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1683 - 13.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING Overview Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can be specified with th...

  • Page 1712

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1684 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3455 AXDx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 0 AXDx If a decimal point is omitted for an axis address with which a decimal point can be used, the value is determined: 0: In accordance with the le...

  • Page 1713

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1685 - 13.2 G CODE SYSTEM T Overview There are three G code systems : A,B, and C. Select a G code system using parameter GSC (No. 3401#7) and parameter GSB (No. 3401#6). Table 13.2 (a) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G00 G00 G00 Positioning ...

  • Page 1714

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1686 - Table 13.2 (a) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G25 G25 G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off G26 G26 G26 08 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on G27 G27 G27 Reference position return check G28 G28 G28 Return to reference position...

  • Page 1715

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1687 - Table 13.2 (a) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G50.2 (G250) G50.2 (G250) G50.2 (G250) Polygon turning cancel G51.2 (G251) G51.2 (G251) G51.2 (G251) 20 Polygon turning G52 G52 G52 Local coordinate system setting G53 G53 G53 Machine coordi...

  • Page 1716

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1688 - Table 13.2 (a) G code list G code system A B C Group Function G87 G87 G87 Cycle for side drilling G87.5 G87.5 G87.5 High-speed peck drilling cycle G87.6 G87.6 G87.6 Peck drilling cycle G88 G88 G88 Cycle for side tapping G89 G89 G89 10 Cycle for side bo...

  • Page 1717

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1689 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G23CLRFPMG91 G013402 G23CLRG70G91G19 G18 G01 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 G01 G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared 0: G00 mode (positioning) 1: G01 mode ...

  • Page 1718

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1690 - Note NOTE 1 If the CNC enters the clear state (see parameter CLR (No. 3402#6)) when the power is turned on or the CNC is reset, the modal G codes change as follows. (1) G codes marked with in Table 13.2 are enabled. (2) When the system is cleared due ...

  • Page 1719

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1691 - 13.3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION Overview A program consists of the following components: Table 13.3 (a) Program components Components Descriptions Program code start Symbol indicating the start of a program file Leader section Used for the title of a prog...

  • Page 1720

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1692 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3201 NPE N99 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 5 N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No.3201 = 0, program registration is assumed to be: 0: Completed 1: Not completed # 6 N...

  • Page 1721

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1693 - 13.4 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION Overview Either inch or metric input can be selected by G code. Signal Inch input signal INCH<Fn002#0> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that inch input mode is active. [Output condit...

  • Page 1722

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1694 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ROSx ROTx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis. ROSx ROTx Me...

  • Page 1723

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1695 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3104 MCN [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 MCN Machine position 0: Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machine position is displayed in mm for millimeter machines, or in ...

  • Page 1724

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1696 - Note NOTE 1 When the least input increment and the least command increment systems are different, the maximum error is half of the least command increment. This error is not accumulated. 2 The inch and metric input can also be switched using parameter I...

  • Page 1725

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1697 - 13.5 CUSTOM MACRO 13.5.1 Custom Macro Overview Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, the custom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic and logic operations, and conditional branches for easy development of ...

  • Page 1726

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1698 - G65 Pp Rr Aα Bβ Kk ; P : Macro number of bolt hole circle r : Radius α: Start angle β: Angle between circles k : Number of circles Signal Custom Macro Input Signals UI000 to UI015<Gn054,Gn055>, UI016 to UI031<Gn056,Gn057>, UI10...

  • Page 1727

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1699 - Custom Macro Output Signals UO000 to UO015<Fn054,Fn055>, UO100 to UO131<Fn056 to Fn059> UO016 to UO031<Fn276,Fn277>, UO200 to UO231<Fn280 to Fn283> UO300 to UO331<Fn284 to Fn287> [Classification] Output signal [Functio...

  • Page 1728

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1700 - These system variables can be used on the left side of an assignment statement as well as on the right side. The value assigned to the system variable used on the left side last is used for the value of the system variable to be assigned on the right si...

  • Page 1729

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1701 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn054 UO007UO006UO005UO004UO003UO002 UO001 UO000 Fn055 UO015UO014UO013UO012UO011UO010 UO009 UO008 Fn056 UO107UO106UO105UO104UO103UO102 UO101 UO100 Fn057 UO115UO114UO113UO112UO111UO110 UO109 UO108 Fn058 UO12...

  • Page 1730

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1702 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 SBV SBM HGO MGO G67 6000 SBV SBM HGO V15 MGO G67 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 G67 If the macro continuous-state call cancel command (G67) is specified when the macro continuous...

  • Page 1731

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1703 - # 4 HGO When a GOTO statement in a custom macro control command is executed, a high-speed branch to the 30 sequence numbers immediately before the executed statement is: 0: Not made. 1: Made. # 5 SBM Custom macro statement 0: Not stop the sin...

  • Page 1732

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1704 - NOTE The variables depend on the selected options. Custom macro common variable addition option Not selected Selected Not selected#500 to #549 or #100 to #149 and #500 to #549#500 to #999 or #100 to #199 and #500 to #999Embedded macro option Selecte...

  • Page 1733

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1705 - # 2 VHD With system variables #5121 to #5140: 0: The tool offset value (geometry offset value) in the block currently being executed is read. (This parameter is valid only when tool geometry/tool wear compensation memories are available.) 1: An int...

  • Page 1734

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1706 - # 4 CVA The format for macro call arguments is specified as follows: 0: Arguments are passed in NC format without modifications. 1: Arguments are converted to macro format then passed. Example) When G65 P_ X10 ; is specified, the value in local va...

  • Page 1735

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1707 - # 4 ISO 0: When the EIA code is used, the bit patters of codes specified instead of [, ], #, *, =, ?, @, &, and _ are set in parameter No. 6010 to No. 6018. 1: When the ISO/ASCII code is used, the bit patters of codes specified instead of [, ],...

  • Page 1736

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1708 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6010 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6011 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6013 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 601...

  • Page 1737

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1709 - 6031 Start number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999) 6032 End number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Vali...

  • Page 1738

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1710 - 6037 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #500 to #999) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word system common [Valid data range] 0 to 500 When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom ma...

  • Page 1739

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1711 - When parameter No. 6038 = 900, parameter No. 6039 = 10000000, and parameter No. 6040 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as follows: G900 → O10000000 G901 → O10000001 G902 → O10000002 : G999 → O100000...

  • Page 1740

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1712 - 6043 starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6042 can be called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6043 to disable this mode of calling. If a negative value is set in parameter No. 6041, the modal call mode is entered. Whether the modal call is equiv...

  • Page 1741

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1713 - 6045 Start program number of a subprogram called by M code [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 1 to 99999999 6046 Number of M codes used to call subprograms (number of subprograms called by M codes) [Input ty...

  • Page 1742

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1714 - 6047 Start M code used to call a custom macro [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 6048 Start program number of a custom macro called by M code [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word pa...

  • Page 1743

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1715 - 6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010 to 6059 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9019 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] (-9999 to 9999 : excluding 0, 5, 65, 66 and 67) ...

  • Page 1744

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1716 - 6080 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9020 to 6089 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9029 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 (excluding 30, 98 and 99) Se...

  • Page 1745

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1717 - 6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004 6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 65(A:41H) to 90(Z:5AH) These parameters set th...

  • Page 1746

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1718 - Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0077 TOO MANY SUB,MACRO NESTING The total number of subprogram and macro calls exceeds the permissible range. Another subprogram call was executed during an external memory subprogram call. PS0110 OVERFLOW ...

  • Page 1747

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1719 - Number Message Description PS1099 ILLLEGAL SUFFIX [ ] A suffix was not specified to a variable name that required a suffix enclosed by [ ]. A suffix was specified to a variable name that did not require a suffix enclosed by [ ]. The value enclosed by th...

  • Page 1748

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1720 - 13.5.2 Indirect Axis Address Command Overview When the custom macro function is enabled, indirect specification by an axis number can be performed by using AX[(axis-number)] instead of directly specifying an axis name during specification for an axis a...

  • Page 1749

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1721 - - AXNUM function AXNUM[] can be used to obtain an axis number. AXNUM[(axis-name)]; If the specified (axis-name) is invalid, the alarm (PS0332) occurs. When the number of control axes is three and the first axis name is "X", the second axi...

  • Page 1750

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1722 - 13.5.3 Interruption Type Custom Macro Overview When a program is being executed, another program can be called by inputting an interrupt signal (UINT) from the machine. This function is referred to as an interruption type custom macro function. Expla...

  • Page 1751

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1723 - Do not enter an interrupt signal during execution of an interrupt macro. Signal Interrupt signal for custom macro UINT<Gn053#3> [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal calls and executes a program in memory. During execution, a pro...

  • Page 1752

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1724 - # 5 MSB Interrupt program 0: Uses a dedicated local variable (Macro-type interrupt) 1: Uses the same local variable as in the main program (Subprogram- type interrupt) # 7 MUS Interrupt-type custom macro 0: Not used 1: Used - Setting M code t...

  • Page 1753

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1725 - Reference item Manual name Item name USER’S MANUAL (B-63944EN) Interrupt-type custom macro

  • Page 1754

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1726 - 13.6 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING Overview Canned cycles for drilling make it easier for the programmer to create programs. With a canned cycle for drilling, a frequently-used machining operation can be specified in a single block with a G code; without c...

  • Page 1755

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1727 - - Spindle control In some canned cycles for drilling, a spindle command to rotate the spindle in reverse direction may be output. The following canned cycles for drilling require spindle control: <Machining center system> <Lathe system> R...

  • Page 1756

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1728 - G74 (Counter tapping cycle) G76 (Fine boring cycle) G84 (tapping cycle) Fig. 13.6 (b) Canned cycle for machining center system (1/2) (Note) It is possible to not output M05code by using parameter M5T(No. 5105#...

  • Page 1757

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1729 - G86 (Boring cycle) G87 (Back boring cycle) G88 (Boring cycle) Fig. 13.6 (c) Canned cycle for machining center system (2/2) FINMFM03X,Y Z Z FINMFM05FINMFM03Next block (G99 mode) Next block (G98 mode) Return to ...

  • Page 1758

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1730 - G84 (Face tapping cycle) G88 (Side tapping cycle) Fig. 13.6 (d) Canned cycle for lathe system - M code used for C-axis clamp/unclamp T When an M code specified in parameter No.5110 for C-axis clamp/unclamp is programmed, the CNC issue...

  • Page 1759

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1731 - ・Small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal M In the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode, the small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal is output when positioning at point R on the drilling direction axis is started after positioning at a s...

  • Page 1760

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1732 - Small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal PECK2<Fn066#5> M [Classification] Output signal [Function] Posts whether the small-hole peck drilling cycle is being executed. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 for the following period:...

  • Page 1761

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1733 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3708 TSO [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 6 TSO During a threading or tapping cycle, the spindle override is: 0: Disabled (tied to 100%). 1: Enabled. NOTE During rigid tapping, the override ...

  • Page 1762

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1734 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 RDI RAB F16 5102 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 3 F16 When the Series 15 format is used (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No.0001 set to 1), a canned drilling cycle is specified using : ...

  • Page 1763

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1735 - # 3 PNA In a drilling canned cycle using the Series 15 format (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No. 0001 set to 1 and bit 3 (F16) of parameter No. 5102 set to 0), when a plane where no axis is present is specified in the drilling canned cycle mode: 0: ...

  • Page 1764

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1736 - Dwell time when C-axis unclamping is specified in drilling canned cycle 5111 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] Increment systemIS-AIS-BIS-CIS-D IS-E UnitMetric input 1010.10.01 0.001msecInch input 10.10.010.001 ...

  • Page 1765

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1737 - 5114 Return value of high-speed peck drilling cycle [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid data range] 9 digit of ...

  • Page 1766

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1738 - 5148 Tool retraction direction after orientation in a fine boring cycle or back boring cycle [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] -10 to 10 This parameter sets an axis and direction for tool retraction after spind...

  • Page 1767

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1739 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 CYM 5160 CYM NOL OLS [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path #1 OLS When an overload torque detection signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter, the feedrate and spindle spee...

  • Page 1768

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1740 - 5164 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next advancing after an overload torque detection signal is received [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 255 This para...

  • Page 1769

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1741 - 5166 Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of the next cutting after an overload torque detection signal is received [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 255 This par...

  • Page 1770

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1742 - 5168 Lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 1 to 255 This parameter sets the lower limit of the pe...

  • Page 1771

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1743 - 5172 Feedrate of retraction to point R when no address I is specified [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis ...

  • Page 1772

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1744 - Diagnosis display 520 Total number of retract operations during cutting after G83 is specified 521 Total number of retract operations based on reception of the overload torquedetection signal during cutting after G83 is specified NOTE The total nu...

  • Page 1773

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1745 - 13.7 CANNED CYCLE / MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE T Overview The option canned cycles makes CNC programming easy. For instance, the data of the finish work shape describes the tool path for rough machining. And also, a canned cycles for the thread ...

  • Page 1774

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1746 - Signal Chamfering signal *CDZ<Gn053#7> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Executes chamfering in a threading cycle. Specify the chamfering distance in parameter No. 5130. [Operation] When the signal is set to 1, chamfering is not executed...

  • Page 1775

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1747 - NOTE 1 Programs created in the Series 15 program format can be used for operation on the following functions: 1 Subprogram call M98 2 Thread cutting with equal leads G32 (T series) 3 Canned cycle G90, G92, G94 (T series) 4 Multiple repetitive canned cyc...

  • Page 1776

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1748 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 RTV ROC 1403 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 ROC In the threading cycles G92 and G76, rapid traverse override for retraction after threading is finished is: 0: Effective 1: Not effe...

  • Page 1777

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1749 - 1627 FL rate for acceleration/deceleration in threading cycles for each axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the...

  • Page 1778

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1750 - 13.8 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET T Overview In a machine having double turrets comprising two facing turrets placed on the same control axis, a machining program for facing turrets can be created using G codes as if it existed on the same coordinat...

  • Page 1779

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1751 - X40.0 Z180.0 T0101 ; Position turret A at <1> G68 ; Shift the coordinate system by the distance A to B (120mm), and turn mirror image on. X80.0 Z120.0 T0202 ; Position turret B at,<2> G69 ; Shift the coordinate system by the distance B to A,...

  • Page 1780

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1752 - 13.9 INDEX TABLE INDEXING M Overview By specifying indexing positions (angles) for the indexing axis (one rotation axis, A, B, or C), the index table of the machining center can be indexed. Before and after indexing, the index table is automatically u...

  • Page 1781

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1753 - (8) When *BECLP is turned to "0", the CNC then turns BCLP to "0", informing it received the *BECLP signal. (Type B -- When BCLP turns to "0", the B axis position control servo is turned off.) (9) On the PMC side, when BCLP...

  • Page 1782

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1754 - The figure below shows the timing chart for type-A manual reference position return of the B axis. B axis manual feed selection signal +JαB axis position control servo ONB axis unclamp signal BUCLPB axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCLB axis rotatio...

  • Page 1783

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1755 - - Indexing direction If a value other than 0 is set in the M code for specifying negative direction rotation (parameter No.5511), movement in the negative direction is made only when a move command is specified together with the M code. In this case, ...

  • Page 1784

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1756 - Item Explanation Operation for an index table indexing axis Operation in jog/step/handle mode for an index table indexing axis is disabled. However, manual reference position return is possible. If the axis selection signal is set to 0 during manual r...

  • Page 1785

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1757 - Caution CAUTION 1 While the index table is being positioned, input signals that reset the CNC, such as emergency stop, feed hold, and interlock are functional. If a stop at an any position is not suitable for the machine, appropriate processing is req...

  • Page 1786

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1758 - Signal B axis clamp signal *BCLP<F061#1> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Instructs the PMC side to clamp the B axis mechanically with a clutch or shot pin. [Output condition] The output condition and procedure are the same as those ...

  • Page 1787

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1759 - Parameter - Setting linear or rotation axis #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ROSx ROTx [Data type] Bit axis ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis. ROSx ROTxMeaning 0 0 Linear axis (1) Inch/metric conversion is done. (2) All coordinate val...

  • Page 1788

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1760 - #2 ABS Displaying absolute coordinate value of index axis 0 : Not rounded by 360 degrees The index axis rotates 720 degrees (two rotations) when G90 B720.0; is specified from the 0-degree position. It rotates in reverse direction 720 degrees (two r...

  • Page 1789

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1761 - - Negative direction rotation command M code 5511 Negative direction rotation command M code [Data type] 2-word [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 0 : No M code is defined to set the index table rotation to the negative direction. The rotation direct...

  • Page 1790

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1762 - 13.10 SCALING Overview A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling). One scaling method multiples the same magnification rate and the other scaling method (axis-by-axis scaling) multiples the different magnification rate for each axis. The...

  • Page 1791

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1763 - CAUTION 1 Specify G51 in a separate block. 2 After the figure is enlarged or reduced, specify G50 to cancel the scaling mode. NOTE 1 Entering electronic calculator decimal point input mode (parameter DPI (No. 3401#0) = 1) does not cause the units of ...

  • Page 1792

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1764 - - Scaling along each axis at the same rate of magnification Set parameter XSC (No. 5400#6) to 0. If the scaling magnification P is not specified, the magnification set in parameter (No. 5411) is used. Decimal point input is not accepted as the magnific...

  • Page 1793

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1765 - Y axisX axisbada/b: Scaling magnification of X axisc/d: Scaling magnification of Y axis 0 : Scaling centerProgrammed figureScaled figure0c Fig. 13.10 (b) Scaling of each axis - Scaling of circular interpolation Even if different magnifications are a...

  • Page 1794

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1766 - Even for an R-specified arc, scaling is applied to each of I, J, and K after the radius value (R) is converted into a vector in the center direction of each axis. If, therefore, the above G02 block contains the following R-specified arc, the operation w...

  • Page 1795

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1767 - YXScaling centerOriginal programShape aftercoordinate systemrotationScaled shapeRotation centerafter scalingRotation centerbefore scaling Fig. 13.10 (d) Scaling and coordinate system rotation - Scaling and optional-angle chamfering/corner rounding C...

  • Page 1796

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1768 - Limitation - Tool compensation This scaling is not applicable to cutter/tool nose radius compensation values, tool length offset values, and tool offset values (Fig. 13.10 (f) ). Cutter compensation values are not scaled.Programmed figureScaled figure...

  • Page 1797

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1769 - • End cutting off cycle (G74, G76) • Outer/inner surface cutting off cycle (G75, G77) • Multiple threading cycle (G76, G78) • Traverse grinding cycle (for grinding machines) (G71, G72) • Traverse direct constant-size grinding cycle (for grindi...

  • Page 1798

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1770 - NOTE 1 The position display represents the coordinate value after scaling. 2 When a mirror image was applied to one axis of the specified plane, the following results: (1) Circular command ......................... Direction of rotation is reversed. (2)...

  • Page 1799

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1771 - NOTE When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400 is set to 1, the valid data range is 1 to 9999999. 5421 Scaling magnification for each axis [Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using SCR, ...

  • Page 1800

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1772 - - Alarms only for lathe systems Number Message Description PS0300 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SCALING An illegal G code was specified during scaling. Modify the program. For the T system, one of the following functions is specified during scaling, this alarm is...

  • Page 1801

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1773 - 13.11 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION Overview A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function, it becomes possible, for example, to correct the position of a mounted workpiece using a rotation command when the workpiece is placed with some angle...

  • Page 1802

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1774 - - Angular displacement used when no angular displacement is specified for coordinate system rotation 5410 Angular displacement used when no angular displacement is specified for coordinate system rotation [Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-wo...

  • Page 1803

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1775 - 13.12 THREE-DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION Overview The coordinate system can be rotated about an axis by specifying the center of rotation, direction of the axis of rotation, and angular displacement. This coordinate conversion function is quite us...

  • Page 1804

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1776 - # 7 DAC When a relative position and absolute position are displayed: 0: Values not excluding the amount of travel based on cutter compensation and tool nose radius compensation are displayed. 1: Values excluding the amount of travel based on cutte...

  • Page 1805

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1777 - 13.13 MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER Overview The macro executor function converts custom macros created by machine tool builders to executable programs, registers them in the flash ROM module, and executes them to solve problems as described below. NC ...

  • Page 1806

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1778 - 13.14 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING M Overview Chamfering and corner rounding blocks can be inserted automatically between the following: • Between linear interpolation and linear interpolation blocks • Between linear interpolation...

  • Page 1807

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1779 - 13.15 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING T Overview A chamfering or corner rounding block can automatically be inserted between linear interpolation (G01) along a single axis and that along a single axis normal to that single axis. Chamfering or corner ro...

  • Page 1808

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1780 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5105 SBC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 SBC In a drilling canned cycle, chamfer cycle, or corner rounding cycle: 0: A single block stop is not performed. 1: A single block stop is perform...

  • Page 1809

    B-63943EN-1/02 13.PROGRAM COMMAND - 1781 - 13.16 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING T Overview Angles of straight lines, chamfering value, corner rounding values, and other dimensional values on machining drawings can be programmed by directly inputting these values. In addition, the chamf...

  • Page 1810

    13.PROGRAM COMMAND B-63943EN-1/02 - 1782 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 CRD 3453 [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path # 0 CRD If the functions of chamfering or corner R and direct drawing dimension programming are both enabled, 0: Chamfering or corner R is enable...

  • Page 1811

    B-63943EN-1/02 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT - 1783 - 14 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT

  • Page 1812

    14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1784 - 14.1 DISPLAY/SET 14.1.1 Run Hour and Parts Count Display Overview This function displays the integrated power-on time, the integrated cycle operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer (started by an input signal from PMC) on the screen. The...

  • Page 1813

    B-63943EN-1/02 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT - 1785 - Target part count reached signal PRTSF<Fn062#7> [Classification] Output signal [Function] Reports to the PMC that the specified number of parts have been machined. [Output condition] The PRTSF signal is set to 1 when: - The number of parts mac...

  • Page 1814

    14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1786 - NOTE The setting of 0 is invalid (no count operation is performed with M00.) Moreover, M98, M99, M198 (external device subprogram calling), and M codes used for subprogram calling and macro calling cannot be set as M codes for count-up operation. (Ev...

  • Page 1815

    B-63943EN-1/02 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT - 1787 - 6750 Integrated value of power-on period [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] min [Valid data range] 0 to 999999999 This parameter displays the integrated value of power-on period. 6751 Operation time (integrated...

  • Page 1816

    14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1788 - 6755 Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON time 1 [Input type] Setting input [Data type] 2-word path [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 59999 6756 Integrated value of general-purpose integrating ...

  • Page 1817

    B-63943EN-1/02 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT - 1789 - 14.1.2 Software Operator's Panel Overview The MDI panel can replace the switches on the machine operator's panel. That is, the MDI panel can select a mode or jog feed override, omitting the corresponding switches on the machine operator's panel. The...

  • Page 1818

    14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1790 - Signal Group Function Output signal Related input signal 1 Mode selection MD1O MD2O MD4O ZRNO <Fn073#0> <Fn073#1> <Fn073#2> <Fn073#4> MD1 MD2 MD4 ZRN Jog feed axis select +J1O to +J4O -J1O to -J4O <Fn081> +J1 to +J4 -J1 to...

  • Page 1819

    B-63943EN-1/02 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT - 1791 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn072 OUT7OUT6OUT5OUT4OUT3OUT2 OUT1 OUT0 Fn073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O Fn074 OUT15OUT14OUT13OUT12OUT11OUT10 OUT9 OUT8 Fn075 SPO KEYO*1DRNOMLKOSBKOBDTO Fn076 ROV2OROV1O MP2O MP1O Fn0...

  • Page 1820

    14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1792 - # 3 OP4 JOG feedrate override select, feedrate override select, and rapid traverse override select on software operator's panel 0: Not performed 1: Performed # 4 OP5 Optional block skip select, single block select, machine lock select, and dry...

  • Page 1821

    B-63943EN-1/02 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT - 1793 - 7210 Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “↑” 7211 Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “↓” 7212 Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “→” 7213 ...

  • Page 1822

    14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1794 - 7220 Name of general-purpose switch 1 on software operator's panel (first character) to to 7283 Name of general-purpose switch 8 on software operator's panel (eighth character) 7284 Name of general-purpose switch 9 on software operator's panel ...

  • Page 1823

    B-63943EN-1/02 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT - 1795 - Character code list CharacterCode CharacterCode Character Code A 65 Q 81 6 54 B 66 R 82 7 55 C 67 S 83 8 56 D 68 T 84 9 57 E 69 U 85 32 F 70 V 86 ! 33 G 71 W 87 “ 34 H 72 X 88 # 35 I 73 Y 89 $ 36 J 74 Z 90 % 37 K 75 0 48 & 38 L 76 1 49 ‘ 39 M ...

  • Page 1824

    14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1796 - The following table lists the jog feedrate override values which can be selected by soft switches. *JV0O to *JV15O Override values (%) 15 8 7 0 0 11111111 1111 1111 0.1 11111111 1111 0101 0.14 11111111 1111 0001 0.2 11111111 1110 1011 0.27 11111111 111...

  • Page 1825

    B-63943EN-1/02 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT - 1797 - NOTE 1 The software operator's panel, software operator's panel general-purpose switch, and software operator's panel general-purpose switch extension are option functions. 2 The software operator's panel general-purpose switch function enables the use...

  • Page 1826

    14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1798 - 14.1.3 8-Level Data Protection Function Overview Eight operation levels can be set for CNC and PMC operation and eight protection levels can be set for various types of CNC and PMC data. When various types of CNC and PMC data are changed or output ext...

  • Page 1827

    B-63943EN-1/02 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT - 1799 - - Data protection level A data protection level can be set for each of the following types of data. There are two data protection levels as shown below. - Change protection level Protection level used for changing data - Output protection level Prot...

  • Page 1828

    14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1800 - NOTE 1 Some data types do not have an output function. 2 For data whose protection level is higher than the operation level, the protection level cannot be changed. 3 The current data protection level cannot be changed to a protection level that is hig...

  • Page 1829

    B-63943EN-1/02 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT - 1801 - NOTE Change protection checking of data basically covers the changes made by MDI operation. The changes made by operations are not covered. For example, programmable parameter input by the G10L50 command can be changed regardless of the operation leve...

  • Page 1830

    14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1802 - - Password change screen On the password change screen, the following display or operations can be performed. 1) Displaying the current operation level 2) Changing the passwords of operation levels 4 to 7 NOTE 1 A password consists of 3 to 8 characte...

  • Page 1831

    B-63943EN-1/02 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT - 1803 - - Protection level setting screen On the protection screen, the following display or operations can be performed. 1) Displaying the current operation level 2) Displaying the change protection level and output protection level of each data 3) Changing ...

  • Page 1832

    14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1804 - 14.1.4 Touch Panel Control Overview A display unit with a touch panel enables you to operate soft keys by touching the screen. Moreover, an application using a touch panel can be created with the C language executor. NOTE 1 With a CNC of LCD-mounted...

  • Page 1833

    B-63943EN-1/02 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT - 1805 - 5) Pressing the [TP CAL] soft key displays the touch panel calibration screen for all screens. 6) Press the calibration points (9 points) with a dedicated pen. When a point is pressed correctly, the "+" mark changes to the "Ο"...

  • Page 1834

    14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1806 - 7) After entering the calibration points (9 points), press the <INPUT> key to complete calibration. To cancel calibration or retry, press the <CAN> key. The screen display returns to the previous screen. If the <INPUT> key is press...

  • Page 1835

    B-63943EN-1/02 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT - 1807 - Alarm and message Number Message Description SR5303 TOUCH PANEL ERROR The touch panel is not connected correctly, or the touch panel cannot be initialized when the power is turned on. Correct the cause then turn on the power again. Caution CAUTION ...

  • Page 1836

    14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1808 - 14.1.5 External Touch Panel Interface Outline External Touch Panel(called "ETP" below) of SNP-X protocol can be connected with CNC. ETP has functions that can read out/ write in from/to PMC such control signals as input signal(X),output,sign...

  • Page 1837

    B-63943EN-1/02 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT - 1809 - ETP CNC SIO(25pin) JD36B or JD54(20pin) Shield 03 11 RD SD 02 ...

  • Page 1838

    14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1810 - Counter C0000 to C0399 C5000 to C5199 NOTE This function can be used from D0000 to D8190 though the data table exists from D0000 to D9999. - Protocol Only direct command on SNP-X protocol is available in CNC. ETP also must use the same proto...

  • Page 1839

    B-63943EN-1/02 14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT - 1811 - 14.2 EDIT 14.2.1 Memory Protection Keys Overview Memory protection keys can be provided so as not to inadvertently store, change, or delete programs, offset values, parameters, settings, and so forth. For a multipath system, protection keys are commo...

  • Page 1840

    14.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1812 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3290 KEY [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 7 KEY For memory protection keys: 0: The KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, and KEY4 signals are used. 1: Only the KEY1 signal is used. NOTE 1 The functio...

  • Page 1841

    B-63943EN-1/02 15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA - 1813 - 15 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA

  • Page 1842

    15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B-63943EN-1/02 - 1814 - 15.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE Overview The data shown below can be input/output through reader/puncher interface. 1. Program 2. Offset data 3. Parameter 4. Pitch error compensation data 5. Custom macro common variables. 6. Workpiece coordinate sys...

  • Page 1843

    B-63943EN-1/02 15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA - 1815 - Specify a channel for aninput/output device.I/O CHANNEL (0 to 5) =0 : Channel 1 =1 : Channel 1 =2 : Channel 2In addition, input/output of memorycard interface is enabled.I/O CHANNEL = 0(Channel 1)010101020103Stop bit and other dataNumbe...

  • Page 1844

    15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B-63943EN-1/02 - 1816 - Parameter 0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device 0021 Foreground output device setting 0022 Background input device setting 0023 Background output device setting [Input type] Set...

  • Page 1845

    B-63943EN-1/02 15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA - 1817 - - Parameters Common to all Channels #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit path # 0 TVC TV check 0: Not performed 1: Performed # 1 ISO Code used for data output 0: EIA code 1: IS...

  • Page 1846

    15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B-63943EN-1/02 - 1818 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0100 ENS IOP NCR CRF CTV [Input type] Setting input [Data type] Bit # 1 CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program. 0: Performed 1: Not performed # 2 CRF Output of the end of b...

  • Page 1847

    B-63943EN-1/02 15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA - 1819 - - Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0101 NFD ASI SB2 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit # 0 SB2 The number of stop bits 0: 1 1: 2 # 3 ASI Code used at data input 0: EIA or ISO code (auto...

  • Page 1848

    15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B-63943EN-1/02 - 1820 - 0103 Baud rate (when I/O CHNNEL is set to 0) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to 12 Set the baud rate of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=0. See the following table when setting the baud ra...

  • Page 1849

    B-63943EN-1/02 15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA - 1821 - 0113 Baud rate (when I/O CHNNEL is set to 1) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 to 12 Set the baud rate of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=1. - Parameters of Channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2) #7...

  • Page 1850

    15.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B-63943EN-1/02 - 1822 - Alarm and message Number Message Description SR0001 TH ERROR A TH error was detected during reading from an input device. The read code that caused the TH error and how many statements it is from the block can be verified in the diagnostics screen....

  • Page 1851

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1823 - 16 MEASUREMENT

  • Page 1852

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1824 - 16.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT M Overview The value displayed as a relative position can be set in the offset memory as an offset value by a soft key. Switch to the offset value display screen on the screen. Relative positions are also displayed on this scr...

  • Page 1853

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1825 - 16.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) / AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) Overview When a tool is moved to the measurement position by execution of a command given to the CNC, the CNC automatically measures the difference between the current coo...

  • Page 1854

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1826 - Signal Measuring position reached signals XAE1#1<X004#0>, XAE2#1<X004#1>(M series/T series), XAE3#1<X004#2>(M series only) XAE1#2<X013#0>, XAE2#2<X013#1>(M series/T series), XAE3#2<X013#2>(M series only) XAE1#3<X011#0&...

  • Page 1855

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1827 - Axis specification Signal input Valid parameters Command code T series M series T seriesM series T series M series G36 (parameter G36 (bit 3 of No.3405)=0) Basic 1st axis XAE1 (GAE1) 6241, 6251, 6254 G37 (parameter G36 (bit 3 of No.3405)=0) Basic 3rd axi...

  • Page 1856

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1828 - PS0080 alarm when a movement has been made to distance γ before the measurement position. NOTE 1 The measuring position reached signal requires at least 10 msec. 2 A delay or variation in detecting a measuring position reached signal is 0 to 2 ms just on ...

  • Page 1857

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1829 - NOTE To use independent measuring position reached signals for all the paths in a system having four or more paths, use a G address. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3008 XSG [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this...

  • Page 1858

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1830 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3405 G36 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 3 G36 As a G code to be used with the automatic tool length measurement function (M series)/automatic tool offset function (T series) is: 0: G36 (T series...

  • Page 1859

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1831 - Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation (T series) (for the XAE1 and GAE1 signals) 6241 Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 and GAE1 signals) Feedrate during measurement of automa...

  • Page 1860

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1832 - γ value on the X axis during automatic tool compensation (T series) 6251 γ value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 and GAE1 signals) γ value on the Z axis during automatic tool compensation (T series) 6252 γ value du...

  • Page 1861

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1833 - ε value on the X axis during automatic tool compensation (T series) 6254 ε value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 and GAE1 signals) ε value on the Z axis during automatic tool compensation (T series) 6255 ε value du...

  • Page 1862

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1834 - Alarm and message Number Message Description G37 MEASURING POSITION REACHED SIGNAL IS NOT PROPERLY INPUT (M series) When the tool length measurement function (G37) is performed, a measuring position reached signal goes 1 in front of the area determined by t...

  • Page 1863

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1835 - NOTE NOTE 1 If an H code and G37 are specified in the same block, an alarm will be raised. Specify an H code before a block including G37. 2 A measurement speed (FP), γ, and ε are specified as parameters (FP: No.6241, γ: No.6251, ε: No.6254) by the ma...

  • Page 1864

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1836 - Note NOTE This function is available as an option. Reference item Manual name Item name DESCRIPTIONS (B-63942EN) Automatic tool length measurement Automatic tool offset USER’S MANUAL (Lathe system) (B-63944EN-1) Automatic tool offset (G36,G37) USER’S ...

  • Page 1865

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1837 - 16.2.1 High-speed Measuring Position Reached Signals Overview Measurement can be made by using high-speed measuring position reached signals HAE1 to HAE8 (connected not through the PMC but directly to the CNC ), instead of the standard measuring position r...

  • Page 1866

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1838 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6225 2A8 2A7 2A6 2A5 2A4 2A3 2A2 2A1 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path 2A1 to 2A8 Specify which high-speed measurement position arrival signal is enabled for each AE2 signal of G37 (automatic tool length meas...

  • Page 1867

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1839 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6240 AMH AE0 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 AE0 Measurement position arrival is assumed when the automatic tool compensation signals XAE1 and XAE2 <X004#0,1> (T series) or the automatic t...

  • Page 1868

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1840 - 16.3 SKIP FUNCTION 16.3.1 Skip Function Overview Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command, execution of the command is inte...

  • Page 1869

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1841 - NOTE 1 The skip signal width requires at least 10 msec. 2 The delay or variation on the CNC side (excluding the PMC side) in detecting the skip signal is 0 to 2 msec. Therefore, the measurement error is the sum of 2 msec and the delay or variation (includin...

  • Page 1870

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1842 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3008 XSG [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is: 0: F...

  • Page 1871

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1843 - 3019 Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal and measurement position arrival signals are assigned NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word pat...

  • Page 1872

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1844 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6200 SKF SRE HSS SK0 GSK [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 GSK As a skip signal, the skip signal SKIPP is: 0: Invalid. 1: Valid. # 1 SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made ...

  • Page 1873

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1845 - # 7 SKPXE For the skip function (G31), the skip signal SKIP is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. Enabling and disabling the skip signals Parameter IGX (No.6201#4) GSK (No.6200#0) SKPXE (No.6201#7)Skip signal SKIPP Skip signal SKIP Multi-step skip signal SKI...

  • Page 1874

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1846 - NOTE For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the description of parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285. Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G code ...

  • Page 1875

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1847 - 16.3.2 Multiple axis command skip function Overview In a G31 block, the move command can be executed for multiple axes. When the skip signal is input externally during execution of this command, the execution is aborted for all axes and the next block is e...

  • Page 1876

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1848 - 16.3.3 High-speed Skip Signal Overview The skip function operates based on a high-speed skip signal (HDI0 to HDI7 : connected directly to the CNC; not via the PMC) instead of an ordinary skip signal. In this case, up to eight signals can be input. (Either ...

  • Page 1877

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1849 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6207 SFN [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 1 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-s...

  • Page 1878

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1850 - # 6 SRE When a high-speed skip signal is used: 0: The signal is assumed to be input on the rising edge (contact open → close). 1: The signal is assumed to be input on the falling edge (contact close → open). #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6202 1S8 1S7...

  • Page 1879

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1851 - 16.3.4 Multi-step Skip Overview The multi-step skip function stores the coordinate values when skip signals (four or eight signals when normal skip signals are used or eight signals when high-speed skip signals are used) are input in the block where G31P1...

  • Page 1880

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1852 - NOTE 1 The skip signal width requires at least 10 msec. 2 The delay or variation on the CNC side (excluding the PMC side) in detecting the skip signal is 0 to 2 msec. Therefore, the measurement error is the sum of 2 msec and the delay or variation (includi...

  • Page 1881

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1853 - WARNING 1 SKIP6 to SKIP8 are at the same addresses as skip signal ESKIP (axis control by PMC) and measurement position arrival signal XAE and ZAE (tool length automatic measurement). Be careful when using both. (T series) 2 SKIP2 and SKIP6 to SKIP8 are at ...

  • Page 1882

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1854 - 3012 Skip signal assignment address NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Valid data range] 0 to 727 Set an X address to which the skip signal ...

  • Page 1883

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1855 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6200 SKF SLS SK0 GSK [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 GSK As a skip signal, the skip signal SKIPP is: 0: Invalid. 1: Valid. # 1 SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made val...

  • Page 1884

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1856 - # 4 IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP, SKIPP, and SKIP2 to SKIP8 are: 0: Enabled as skip signals. 1: Disabled as skip signals. # 7 SKPXE For the skip function (G31), the skip signal SKIP is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. Enabling and ...

  • Page 1885

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1857 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6202 1S8 1S7 1S6 1S5 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6203 2S8 2S7 2S6 2S5 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6204 3S8 3S7 3S6 3S5 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6205 4S8 4S7 4S6 4S5 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1 ...

  • Page 1886

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1858 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6207 SFN [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 1 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip functi...

  • Page 1887

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1859 - Alarm and message Number Message Description PS0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G code (such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation) of group 07 is not canceled. - A torque limit skip was not sp...

  • Page 1888

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1860 - 16.3.5 Torque Limit Skip Function Overview When the movement command following G31 P99 (or G31 P98) is executed with the servo motor torque limit*1 overridden, cutting feed similar to linear interpolation (G01) can be performed. When the servo motor torque...

  • Page 1889

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1861 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3008 XSG [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. # 2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is: 0: Fixed at the...

  • Page 1890

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1862 - 3019 Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal and measurement position arrival signals are assigned NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word pat...

  • Page 1891

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1863 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6201 SKPXE IGX TSE [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 2 TSE When the torque limit skip function (G31 P99/98) is used, the skip position held in a system variable (#5061 to #5080 (#100151 to #100182 for...

  • Page 1892

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1864 - signal or the multiphase skip function (when SLS (bit 5 of parameter No. 6200) is 1) using the high-speed skip signal. To use the multiphase skip signal, the option for the multiphase skip function is required. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6207 SFN SFP ...

  • Page 1893

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1865 - 6283 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P2) 6284 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P3) 6285 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P4) [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real path [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [M...

  • Page 1894

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1866 - 6287 Positional deviation limit in torque limit skip [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 327670 This parameter sets a positional deviation limit for each axis imposed when torque l...

  • Page 1895

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1867 - 16.4 COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT T 16.4.1 Input of tool offset value measured Overview This is a function of setting an offset value by key-inputting a workpiece diameter manually cut and measured from the MDI keyboard. First the workpiece is cut in the lo...

  • Page 1896

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1868 - Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Gn040 PRC Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5005 PRC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 2 PRC Direct input of tool offset value and workpiece coordinate-system shift value...

  • Page 1897

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1869 - 16.4.2 Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B Overview When the touch sensor is provided, the tool offset value can be automatically settable in the tool offset memory, by moving the tool to make contact with the touch sensor during manual operation. The wo...

  • Page 1898

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1870 - value. The corresponding tool wear offset value becomes 0. (Tool offset value to be set) = (Mechanical coordinate value when tool compensation value write signal has become “1”) – (Reference value (parameter value) corresponding to the tool compensati...

  • Page 1899

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1871 - NOTE 2 Axis interlock that has occurred for the axis direction identified by parameter–based automatic decision and two–axis, four–direction interlock that has occurred because of a PS alarm being issued are canceled when the manual mode is exited or ...

  • Page 1900

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1872 - Example 1 The difference between the reference tool nose tip position and the measuring tool nose tip position can be set as the tool offset value. Define the reference tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference position (machine zero position) as t...

  • Page 1901

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1873 - Example 2 The measuring reference point may be an imaginary point (imaginary zero point), as shown in the figure below. The difference between the imaginary zero point and the measuring tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference point can be set as ...

  • Page 1902

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1874 - • If the tool setter function for a one-turret/two-spindle lathe is used For the tool set function for a one–turret/two–spindle lathe, the workpiece coordinate shift amount for the Z–axis is automatically set in any of workpiece coordinate systems ...

  • Page 1903

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1875 - Setting of workpiece coordinate system shift amount To deviate the programmed zero point of the workpiece coordinate system from the workpiece end face, such as by adding a cutting allowance, use the incremental input of the workpiece coordi...

  • Page 1904

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1876 - - Basic procedure to set tool offset value To use the tool setter function for a one–turret/two–spindle lathe, first specify the spindle to be measured, using the S2TLS (G040.5) (spindle measurement select) signal. (1) Execute manual reference position...

  • Page 1905

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1877 - (9) Set the tool compensation value writing mode signal GOQSM to “0”. The writing mode is canceled and the blinking “OFST” indicator light goes off. When the tool setter function for a one–turret/two–spindle lathe is in use, the S1MES or S2MES ...

  • Page 1906

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1878 - (9) Set the workpiece coordinate system shift amount write mode select signal WOQSM to “0”. The writing mode is canceled and the blinking “WSFT” indicator light goes off. When the tool setter function for a one–turret/two–spindle lathe is in u...

  • Page 1907

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1879 - - When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation is turned “1”, he manual feed interlock signal also automatically calculates the tool geometry compensation for the tool compensation number pointed to by the cursor and sets the r...

  • Page 1908

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1880 - Tool offset number select signals OFN0 to OFN5, OFN6 to OFN9<Gn039#0 to #5, Gn040#0 to #3> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects the tool offset number. [Operation] When the mode for writing tool compensation is selected, the cursor is ...

  • Page 1909

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1881 - Spindle 1 under measurement signal S1MES <Fn062#3> Spindle 2 under measurement signal S2MES <Fn062#4> [Classification] Input signal [Function] For the tool setter function of the one–turret/two–spindle lathe, it is indicated which spindle,...

  • Page 1910

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1882 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3003 DIT [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path # 3 DIT Interlock for each axis direction 0: Enabled 1: Disabled #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3008 XSG [Input type] Parameter input [Dat...

  • Page 1911

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1883 - Example 1. In case of No.3012=5, No.3019=6 If parameter XSG(No.3008#2) is set to 1, skip signal for PMC axis control , measurement position arrival signal, tool offset write signal are assigned to X0006. skip signal is assigned to X0005. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 ...

  • Page 1912

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1884 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5005 QNI [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 5 QNI With the tool length measurement function, a tool compensation number is selected by: 0: Operation through the MDI panel by the operator (selection ...

  • Page 1913

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1885 - 5015 Distance to X-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 1 (X1P) 5016 Distance to X-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 1 (X1M) 5017 Distance to Z-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 1 (Z1P) 5018 Distance to Z-axis - contact surface of touch s...

  • Page 1914

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1886 - Z-axis− contact surface→←Z-axis + contact surface ↑X-axis + contact surfaceX-axis− contact surface↓Measuremenet○ reference position X2p +X Z2p+Z Z2mX2m 5020 Tool offset number used with the function for direct input of offset value measu...

  • Page 1915

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1887 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5051 2AT 2NR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 2NR When the tool setter function for one-turret/two-spindle lathes is used: 0: One touch sensor is used. 1: Two touch sensors are used. # 1 2AT...

  • Page 1916

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1888 - 5054 Workpiece coordinate system memory for spindle 1 5055 Workpiece coordinate system memory for spindle 2 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte path [Valid data range] 54 to 59 Specify a workpiece coordinate system from G54 to G59 for which...

  • Page 1917

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1889 - 16.5 TOOL LENGTH / WORKPIECE ZERO POINT MEASUREMENT M Overview Two functions have been provided to measure the tool length: The automatic tool length measurement function automatically measures the tool length at a programmed command (G37); The tool lengt...

  • Page 1918

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1890 - Workpiece origin offset measurement mode selection signal WOQSM<Gn039#6> [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects workpiece coordinate system shift measurement mode. [Operation] When the signal goes "1" in manual operation mode, w...

  • Page 1919

    B-63943EN-1/02 16.MEASUREMENT - 1891 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5007 WMCWMHWMATMA TC3 TC2 [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 TC2 # 1 TC3 If a tool length compensation value is set by pressing the [MEASURE] or [+MEASURE] soft key in tool length measurem...

  • Page 1920

    16.MEASUREMENT B-63943EN-1/02 - 1892 - 5022 Distance (L) from reference tool tip position to the reference measurement surface [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied ax...

  • Page 1921

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1893 - 17 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

  • Page 1922

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1894 - 17.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL 17.1.1 PMC Axis Control Overview The PMC can directly control any given axis, independent of the CNC. An axis can be controlled by signals alone without using an NC program. For example, by specifying an amount of travel, fe...

  • Page 1923

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1895 - Explanation Under PMC axis control, various types of control are exercised using signals. To allow the command operations indicated in Table 17.1.1 (a) Commands that can be executed by PMC axis control, 40 groups of input/output signals are availa...

  • Page 1924

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1896 - - Signals Three types of signals are used with PMC control: Group-by-group signals are assigned to each group. Axis-by-axis signals are assigned to each axis. Path-by-path signals are assigned to each path. - Relationships between groups and axe...

  • Page 1925

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1897 - Group-by-group signal Input signal address Output signal address Group 34 G8154 to G8161, G8162#5 F8133 to F8135, F8145 Group 35 G8166 to G8173, G8174#5 F8136 to F8138, F8148 3Group 6 G8178 to G8185, G8186#5 F8139 to F8141, F8151 Group 37 G9142 to ...

  • Page 1926

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1898 - Path 2Path 1PMCCNCGroup 2 commandGroup 1 commandGroup 2Group 1DI / DOFirst axis controlSecond axis controlThird axis controlFourth axis control Fig. 17.1.1 (b) Example of correct relationships between groups and axes In Fig. 17.1.1 (c) Example o...

  • Page 1927

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1899 - Path 2Path 1PMCCNCGroup 5 commandGroup 1 commandGroup 5(Signal addresses areallocated to path 2.)DI / DOFirst axis controlThird axis controlGroup 1(Signal addresses areallocated to path 1.)Second axis controlFourth axis control Fig. 17.1.1 (d) Co...

  • Page 1928

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1900 - - Relationships between paths and groups (path-by-path signals, path-by-path parameters) Path-by-path signal addresses are allocated in the signal area of each path. (See Table 17.1.1 (c) Path-by-path signal allocation.) However, PMC axis control...

  • Page 1929

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1901 - Group-by-group signal Input signal (G) address Output signal (X) address Group 39 G9150#0,1,6,7 F9129#5,7 Group 40 G9150#0,1,6,7 F9129#5,7 A path-by-path signal is input/output to and from a signal of the path to which the group belongs (for examp...

  • Page 1930

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1902 - - Direct signal, path-by-path parameter The direct signal (X) and path-by-path parameter differ from the path-by-path signals (G, F). The direct signals and parameter values set for the paths to which all axes related to a group belong are valid. ...

  • Page 1931

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1903 - - Relationships between axes and paths (axis-by-axis signals, axis-by-axis parameters) The specifications of the axis-by-axis signals and axis-by-axis parameters associated with the relationships between paths and axes are the same as the NC speci...

  • Page 1932

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1904 - Basic procedure (1) In parameter No. 8010, set one of groups 1 to 40 for use with each axis to be used. When movements are made along multiple axes for synchronization by using one group, ensure that the feedrate-related parameters (rapid traverse,...

  • Page 1933

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1905 - commands [2] and [3] are stored in the buffers, and command [4] has been issued (the axis control block data signal is set). (In the simultaneous start mode (described later), however, only one command is buffered.) Block 1Block 2Block 3Block 4Blo...

  • Page 1934

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1906 - When the execution of command [1] is completed: Command [2] is transferred from the waiting buffer to the executing buffer; Command [3] is transferred from the input buffer to the waiting buffer; and Command [4] is transferred to the input buffer ...

  • Page 1935

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1907 - Table 17.1.1 (f) Buffering status in PMC axis control EBUFg EBSYgExclusive OR (XOR) CNC buffer status 0 0 1 1 0 The previous block has already been read into the CNC buffer. The PMC can issue the next block. 0 1 1 0 1 The previous block has not ye...

  • Page 1936

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1908 - Command Overview of commands As described in step (3) in the basic procedure, one PMC axis control command block is represented by the axis control block data signals. PMC axis control enables the commands indicated in Table 17.1.1 (g) Command l...

  • Page 1937

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1909 - No. Com-mand Operation Data 1 Data 2 Description (12) 0Bh External pulse synchronization - position coder Pulse weight--- Synchronous operation with the position coder is performed. (13) 0Dh External pulse synchronization - first manual handle Puls...

  • Page 1938

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1910 - Details of commands A detailed description of each command is provided below. The parenthesized number following each command title represents the value of the axis control command signals EC0g to EC6g. (1) Rapid traverse ( 00h ) This command perf...

  • Page 1939

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1911 - With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, select a dry run signal and manual rapid traverse selection signal to be used. The table below indicates the relationships between the bit and signals. Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Dry run signal Manual rapid ...

  • Page 1940

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1912 - (2) Cutting feed - feed per minute ( 01h ) THIS COMMAND PERFORMS THE SAME OPERATION AS “G94 G01” OF THE CNC. Axis control block data Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to .6 Cutting feed - feed minute (01h)EI...

  • Page 1941

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1913 - With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, select a dry run signal and manual rapid traverse selection signal to be used. The table below indicates the relationships between the bit and signals. Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Dry run signal Manual rapid ...

  • Page 1942

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1914 - (3) Cutting feed - feed per revolution ( 02h ) This command performs the same operation as "G95 G01" of the CNC. Set the amount of feed along the axis per spindle revolution. The feedrate per spindle revolution depends on whether the M se...

  • Page 1943

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1915 - [Valid data range] 1 to 65535 (However, data within the ranges indicated below must be specified.) Valid data range IS-A to IS-E Unit Metric input 0.01 to 500.00 mm/rev Linear axis Inch input 0.0001 to 9.9999 inch/rev Rotation axis 0.01 to 500.00...

  • Page 1944

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1916 - Axis control block data Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to .6 Skip command (03h) EIF0g to EIF15gG144,145 Cutting feedrate EID0g to EID31gG146 to 149 Total moving distance Cutting feedrate The specifications of...

  • Page 1945

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1917 - (6) Reference position return ( 05h ) This command performs the same operation as manual reference position return of the CNC after rapid traverse in the reference position return direction set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006. Reference posi...

  • Page 1946

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1918 - (7) Continuous feed ( 06h ) This command performs a continuous feed operation along a controlled axis in a certain direction. This command performs the same operation as continuous feed in the JOG mode of the CNC. Continuous feed is performed unti...

  • Page 1947

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1919 - Maximum feedrate (when an override of 245% is applied) IS-B IS-C Metric input (mm/min)Inch input (inch/min) Metric input (mm/min) Inch input (inch/min) 1 times 166458 1664.58 16645 166.45 20 times 166458916645.89 166458 1664.58 200 times (NOTE 1)...

  • Page 1948

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1920 - (8) First reference position return ( 07h ) This command performs the same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with "G28" of the CNC. Axis control block data Signal abbreviationSignal address (group...

  • Page 1949

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1921 - (9) Second reference position return ( 08h ) This command performs the same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with "G28 P2" of the CNC. Axis control block data Signal abbreviationSignal address (gr...

  • Page 1950

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1922 - (11) Fourth reference position return ( 0Ah ) This command performs the same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position done with "G28 P4" of the CNC. Axis control block data Signal abbreviationSignal address (...

  • Page 1951

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1923 - Axis control block data Signal abbreviationSignal address (group 1) Data EC0g to EC6gG143.0 to .6 External pulse synchronization - position coder command (0Bh) EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Pulse weight Pulse weight Set an external pulse weight. When s...

  • Page 1952

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1924 - (13) External pulse synchronization - first manual handle ( 0Dh ) (14) External pulse synchronization - second manual handle ( 0Eh ) (15) External pulse synchronization - third manual handle ( 0Fh ) Each of these commands performs a synchronous ope...

  • Page 1953

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1925 - (16) Speed command ( 10h ) This command performs a continuous feed operation based on a speed command. By using bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006, set a rotation axis as a controlled axis for which this command is executed. The continuous feed co...

  • Page 1954

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1926 - NOTE 1 The following feedrate error can occur: (a) With the speed command based on PMC axis control, a servo motor speed is specified as a feedrate. So, in order to specify a feedrate for an axis when a gear is used between the axis and servo...

  • Page 1955

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1927 - Maximum feedrate Specify a maximum feedrate during torque control by using the unit min-1. When there is no torque generation target or the feedrate exceeds the specified value during torque control, the alarm (SV0422) is issued. When updating the ...

  • Page 1956

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1928 - value of the error counter exceeds the value set in parameter No. 1885. At the time of switching back to position control, follow-up operation is performed. If the error counter is not updated (with bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 set to 1), no e...

  • Page 1957

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1929 - stops when the position deviation is decreased to within the in-position width. If follow-up operation is not performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 1), the torque control mode signal TRQMx is set to 0 when a cancellation conditio...

  • Page 1958

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1930 - CAUTION 1 If a movement is made along a torque control axis in the torque control mode, set bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 for follow-up operation to 1. 2 If a movement has been made along a torque control axis when torque control is canceled, ...

  • Page 1959

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1931 - Axis control block data Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1)Data EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to .6Auxiliary function command (12h for the auxiliary function 1 command)(14h for the auxiliary function 2 command)(15h for the auxiliary function 3 comma...

  • Page 1960

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1932 - NOTE 1 When using this command with the T series, cancel tool offset and tool-nose radius compensation beforehand. 2 When using this command with the M series, cancel cutter compensation, tool length compensation, and tool offset beforehand. 3 Befo...

  • Page 1961

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1933 - Related parameters Parameter ROTx (No.1006#0) Parameter ROAx (No.1008#0) Parameter RABx (No.1008#1) Parameter (No.1260) (22) Cutting feed-sec/block ( 21h ) This command performs cutting feed according to a specified period of time. Axis control b...

  • Page 1962

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1934 - Relationships between groups and axes at the time of simultaneous start All axes that belong to all groups specified in the simultaneous start mode need to be in the same path. In the example shown in Fig. 17.1.1 (i) Incorrect specification of th...

  • Page 1963

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1935 - In Fig. 17.1.1 (j) Correct specification of the simultaneous start mode, three groups, namely, group g1p1, group g2p2, and group g3p3, are specified as simultaneous start mode groups. In this case, the axes specified for the groups belong to the...

  • Page 1964

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1936 - The simultaneous start mode on command (EC0g to EC6g: 41h) enables multiple groups to start commands simultaneously. The simultaneous start mode is set. The simultaneous start mode off command (EC0g to EC6g: 40h) cancels the mode in which multiple...

  • Page 1965

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1937 - EID1g = Group 18 : EID22g = Group 39 EID23g = Group 40 When a block specifying the simultaneous start mode on command is executed, the setting of blocks specifying those groups to be simultaneously started in the input buffer is awaited before e...

  • Page 1966

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1938 - NOTE 5 If the axis control temporary stop signal ESTPg is set to 1 for a group placed in the simultaneous start mode, a gradual stop occurs on the controlled axes of all groups placed in the simultaneous start mode. 6 If the block stop signal ESBKg...

  • Page 1967

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1939 - - Command buffering The continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the external pulse synchronization commands (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh) are not buffered. So, the axis control command read completion signal EBSYg need not be checked at ...

  • Page 1968

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1940 - (4) External pulse synchronization - 2nd manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Eh) (5) External pulse synchronization - 3rd manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Fh) (6) Speed command(EC0g to EC6g : 10h) (7) Torque control (EC0g to EC6g : 11h) When an immediate...

  • Page 1969

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1941 - Commands that cannot be executed successively in the superimposition mode If a command indicated below is specified when the NC program is being executed, the NC program is executed after the termination of the PMC axis control command. - Rapid tra...

  • Page 1970

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1942 - Signal Signal list (PMC axis control) Number Symbol Signal name (1) EAX1 to EAX32 Controlled axis selection signals (2) EC0g to EC6g Axis control command signals (3) EIF0g to EIF15g Controlled axis feed signals (4) EID0g to EID31g Axis control dat...

  • Page 1971

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1943 - Signal list (Related signals) Number Symbol Signal name (1) *+ED1 to *+ED8 *- ED1 to *- ED8 External deceleration signal 1 (2) *+ED21 to *+ED28 *- ED21 to *- ED28 External deceleration signal 2 (3) *+ED31 to *+ED38 *- ED31 to *- ED38 External dece...

  • Page 1972

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1944 - Signal Detail (PMC axis control) (1) Controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX32 <G0136> [Classification] Input signal, axis-by-axis signal [Function] Exercises PMC axis control. [Function] When the signal is set to "1", PMC...

  • Page 1973

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1945 - (4) Axis control data signals EID0g to EID31g <G146 to 149, G158 to 161, G170 to 173, G182 to 185> [Classification] Input signal, group-by-group signal [Function] One of the axis control block data signals [Operation] Four-byte command i...

  • Page 1974

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1946 - The speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) can also be terminated by setting the reset signal ECLRg to "1". When this command is terminated, the servo motor decelerates and stops, and the axis moving signal EGENg is set to "0". Confi...

  • Page 1975

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1947 - ESBKg(input)Command block[1][2][3](input)EBUFg(input)EBSYg(output)Input buffer[2]Waiting buffer[1][2]Executing buffer[1]Beginning of executionMore than 8 msec Table 17.1.1 (i) Timing chart of block stop related signals (11) Auxiliary function cod...

  • Page 1976

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1948 - (15) Auxiliary function completion signal EFINg <G142.0, G154.0, G166.0, G178.0> [Classification] Output signal, group-by-group signal [Function] Indicates whether an auxiliary function is completed. [Operation] When this signal is set to...

  • Page 1977

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1949 - (17) Buffering disable signal EMBUFg <G142.2, G154.2, G166.2, G178.2> [Classification] Input signal, group-by-group signal [Function] Indicates the buffering disabled state. [Operation] When this signal is set to "1", commands fr...

  • Page 1978

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1950 - (18) Controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL <F129.7> [Classification] Output signal, path-by-path signal [Function] Indicates whether PMC axis control is being exercised. [Operation] When this signal is set to "0", contro...

  • Page 1979

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1951 - (21) Alarm signal EIALg <F130.2, F133.2, F136.2, F139.2> [Classification] Output signal, group-by-group signal [Function] Indicates the alarm state related to PMC axis control. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" when a servo a...

  • Page 1980

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1952 - (22) Axis moving signal EGENg <F130.4, F133.4, F136.4, F139.4> [Classification] Output signal, group-by-group signal [Function] Indicates the state of movement on an axis. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" when the tool is mo...

  • Page 1981

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1953 - (24) Negative-direction overtravel signal EOTNg <F130.6, F133.6, F136.6, F139.6> (25) Positive-direction overtravel signal EOTPg <F130.5, F133.5, F136.5, F139.5> [Classification] Output signal, group-by-group signal [Function] Indicat...

  • Page 1982

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1954 - (27) Override cancellation signal EOVCg <G150.5 (, G162.5, G174.5, G186.5)> [Classification] Input signal, path-by-path signal (group-by-group signal) [Function] Disables override. [Operation] When override is enabled, independently of the...

  • Page 1983

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1955 - (31) Override 0% signal EOV0 <F129.5> [Classification] Output signal, path-by-path signal [Function] Indicates whether the override value is 0%. [Operation] This signal is set to "1" when the feedrate override is 0%. (32) Skip s...

  • Page 1984

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1956 - (36) Axis control superimposed command signals EASIP1 to EASIP32 <G200> [Classification] Input signal, axis-by-axis signal [Function] Performs a superimposition operation between a PMC axis control command and an NC control command. [Opera...

  • Page 1985

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1957 - Signal detail (Related signals) The signals related to PMC axis control are detailed below. The [Function] field and [Operation] field provide descriptions related to PMC axis control. For the general functions of the signals, see the description o...

  • Page 1986

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1958 - (7) Third reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 09h) (8) Fourth reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 0Ah) (9) Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g : 20h) (10) Cutting feed - sec/block (EC0g to EC6g : 21h) For each command ...

  • Page 1987

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1959 - (8) Rapid traverse override signal ROV1 <G14.0>, ROV2 <G14.1> [Classification] Input signal, path-by-path signal [Function] Overrides the rapid traverse rate. Shared by the CNC. [Operation] This signal is a two-bit code signal, and s...

  • Page 1988

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1960 - NOTE 1 Change the level of this signal from 1 to 0 before switching from a speed command to a position command. 2 After switching from a speed command to a position command, be sure to perform a manual reference position return operation before mak...

  • Page 1989

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1961 - PMC → CNC Signals common to all groups (path-by-path signals) The signals below are assigned on a path-by-path basis. For details of relationships with groups assigned to signals, see Table 17.1.1 (c) Path-by-path signal allocation. Examp...

  • Page 1990

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1962 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G6150 EDRN#7 ERT#7 EOVC#7 EROV2#7 EROV1#7 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G6151 *EFOV7#7*EFOV6#7 *EFOV5#7*EFOV4#7*EFOV3#7*EFOV2#7 *EFOV1#7 *EFOV0#7 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G7150 EDRN#8 ERT#8 EOVC#8 EROV2#8 EROV1#8 #7 ...

  • Page 1991

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1963 - Signals common to all groups (axis-by-axis signals) The signals below are assigned on an axis-by-axis basis. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G136 EAX8 EAX7 EAX6 EAX5 EAX4 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1136 EAX16EAX15EAX14EAX13EAX12EAX1...

  • Page 1992

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1964 - Group-by-group signals The signals below are assigned on a group-by-group basis. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G142 EBUFA#1ECLRA#1 ESTPA#1ESOFA#1ESBKA#1EMBUFA#1 ELCKZA#1 EFINA#1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G143 EMSBKA#1 EC6A#1 EC5A#1 EC4A#1 EC3A#1 ...

  • Page 1993

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1965 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G166 EBUFC#1ECLRC#1 ESTPC#1ESOFC#1ESBKC#1EMBUFC#1 ELCKZC#1 EFINC#1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G167 EMSBKC#1 EC6C#1 EC5C#1 EC4C#1 EC3C#1 EC2C#1 EC1C#1 EC0C#1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G168 EIF7C#1 EIF6C#1 EIF5C#1 EIF4C#1 ...

  • Page 1994

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1966 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1142 EBUFA#2ECLRA#2 ESTPA#2ESOFA#2ESBKA#2EMBUFA#2 ELCKZA#2 EFINA#2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1143 EMSBKA#2 EC6A#2 EC5A#2 EC4A#2 EC3A#2 EC2A#2 EC1A#2 EC0A#2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1144 EIF7A#2 EIF6A#2 EIF5A#2 EIF4A...

  • Page 1995

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1967 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1166 EBUFC#2ECLRC#2 ESTPC#2ESOFC#2ESBKC#2EMBUFC#2 ELCKZC#2 EFINC#2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1167 EMSBKC#2 EC6C#2 EC5C#2 EC4C#2 EC3C#2 EC2C#2 EC1C#2 EC0C#2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G1168 EIF7C#2 EIF6C#2 EIF5C#2 EIF4C...

  • Page 1996

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1968 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G2142 EBUFA#3ECLRA#3 ESTPA#3ESOFA#3ESBKA#3EMBUFA#3 ELCKZA#3 EFINA#3 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G2143 EMSBKA#3 EC6A#3 EC5A#3 EC4A#3 EC3A#3 EC2A#3 EC1A#3 EC0A#3 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G2144 EIF7A#3 EIF6A#3 EIF5A#3 EIF4A...

  • Page 1997

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1969 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G2166 EBUFC#3ECLRC#3 ESTPC#3ESOFC#3ESBKC#3EMBUFC#3 ELCKZC#3 EFINC#3 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G2167 EMSBKC#3 EC6C#3 EC5C#3 EC4C#3 EC3C#3 EC2C#3 EC1C#3 EC0C#3 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G2168 EIF7C#3 EIF6C#3 EIF5C#3 EIF4C...

  • Page 1998

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1970 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G3142 EBUFA#4ECLRA#4 ESTPA#4ESOFA#4ESBKA#4EMBUFA#4 ELCKZA#4 EFINA#4 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G3143 EMSBKA#4 EC6A#4 EC5A#4 EC4A#4 EC3A#4 EC2A#4 EC1A#4 EC0A#4 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G3144 EIF7A#4 EIF6A#4 EIF5A#4 EIF4A...

  • Page 1999

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1971 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G3166 EBUFC#4ECLRC#4 ESTPC#4ESOFC#4ESBKC#4EMBUFC#4 ELCKZC#4 EFINC#4 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G3167 EMSBKC#4 EC6C#4 EC5C#4 EC4C#4 EC3C#4 EC2C#4 EC1C#4 EC0C#4 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G3168 EIF7C#4 EIF6C#4 EIF5C#4 EIF4C...

  • Page 2000

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1972 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G4142 EBUFA#5ECLRA#5 ESTPA#5ESOFA#5ESBKA#5EMBUFA#5 ELCKZA#5 EFINA#5 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G4143 EMSBKA#5 EC6A#5 EC5A#5 EC4A#5 EC3A#5 EC2A#5 EC1A#5 EC0A#5 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G4144 EIF7A#5 EIF6A#5 EIF5A#5 EIF4A...

  • Page 2001

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1973 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G4166 EBUFC#5ECLRC#5 ESTPC#5ESOFC#5ESBKC#5EMBUFC#5 ELCKZC#5 EFINC#5 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G4167 EMSBKC#5 EC6C#5 EC5C#5 EC4C#5 EC3C#5 EC2C#5 EC1C#5 EC0C#5 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G4168 EIF7C#5 EIF6C#5 EIF5C#5 EIF4C...

  • Page 2002

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1974 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G5142 EBUFA#6ECLRA#6 ESTPA#6ESOFA#6ESBKA#6EMBUFA#6 ELCKZA#6 EFINA#6 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G5143 EMSBKA#6 EC6A#6 EC5A#6 EC4A#6 EC3A#6 EC2A#6 EC1A#6 EC0A#6 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G5144 EIF7A#6 EIF6A#6 EIF5A#6 EIF4A...

  • Page 2003

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1975 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G5166 EBUFC#6ECLRC#6 ESTPC#6ESOFC#6ESBKC#6EMBUFC#6 ELCKZC#6 EFINC#6 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G5167 EMSBKC#6 EC6C#6 EC5C#6 EC4C#6 EC3C#6 EC2C#6 EC1C#6 EC0C#6 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G5168 EIF7C#6 EIF6C#6 EIF5C#6 EIF4C...

  • Page 2004

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1976 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G6142 EBUFA#7ECLRA#7 ESTPA#7ESOFA#7ESBKA#7EMBUFA#7 ELCKZA#7 EFINA#7 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G6143 EMSBKA#7 EC6A#7 EC5A#7 EC4A#7 EC3A#7 EC2A#7 EC1A#7 EC0A#7 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G6144 EIF7A#7 EIF6A#7 EIF5A#7 EIF4A...

  • Page 2005

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1977 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G6166 EBUFC#7ECLRC#7 ESTPC#7ESOFC#7ESBKC#7EMBUFC#7 ELCKZC#7 EFINC#7 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G6167 EMSBKC#7 EC6C#7 EC5C#7 EC4C#7 EC3C#7 EC2C#7 EC1C#7 EC0C#7 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G6168 EIF7C#7 EIF6C#7 EIF5C#7 EIF4C...

  • Page 2006

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1978 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G7142 EBUFA#8ECLRA#8 ESTPA#8ESOFA#8ESBKA#8EMBUFA#8 ELCKZA#8 EFINA#8 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G7143 EMSBKA#8 EC6A#8 EC5A#8 EC4A#8 EC3A#8 EC2A#8 EC1A#8 EC0A#8 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G7144 EIF7A#8 EIF6A#8 EIF5A#8 EIF4A...

  • Page 2007

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1979 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G7166 EBUFC#8ECLRC#8 ESTPC#8ESOFC#8ESBKC#8EMBUFC#8 ELCKZC#8 EFINC#8 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G7167 EMSBKC#8 EC6C#8 EC5C#8 EC4C#8 EC3C#8 EC2C#8 EC1C#8 EC0C#8 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G7168 EIF7C#8 EIF6C#8 EIF5C#8 EIF4C...

  • Page 2008

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1980 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G8142 EBUFA#9ECLRA#9 ESTPA#9ESOFA#9ESBKA#9EMBUFA#9 ELCKZA#9 EFINA#9 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G8143 EMSBKA#9 EC6A#9 EC5A#9 EC4A#9 EC3A#9 EC2A#9 EC1A#9 EC0A#9 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G8144 EIF7A#9 EIF6A#9 EIF5A#9 EIF4A...

  • Page 2009

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1981 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G8166 EBUFC#9ECLRC#9 ESTPC#9ESOFC#9ESBKC#9EMBUFC#9 ELCKZC#9 EFINC#9 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G8167 EMSBKC#9 EC6C#9 EC5C#9 EC4C#9 EC3C#9 EC2C#9 EC1C#9 EC0C#9 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G8168 EIF7C#9 EIF6C#9 EIF5C#9 EIF4C...

  • Page 2010

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1982 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G9142 EBUFA#10ECLRA#10 ESTPA#10ESOFA#10ESBKA#10 EMBUFA#10 ELCKZA#10 EFINA#10 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G9143 EMSBKA#10 EC6A#10 EC5A#10EC4A#10EC3A#10EC2A#10 EC1A#10 EC0A#10 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G9144 EIF7A#10EIF6A#10...

  • Page 2011

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1983 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G9166 EBUFC#10ECLRC#10 ESTPC#10ESOFC#10ESBKC#10 EMBUFC#10 ELCKZC#10 EFINC#10 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G9167 EMSBKC#10 EC6C#10 EC5C#10EC4C#10EC3C#10EC2C#10 EC1C#10 EC0C#10 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G9168 EIF7C#10EIF6C#10...

  • Page 2012

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1984 - NOTE 1 The bits other than the override cancellation signal EOVC at the address where EOVC is positioned are path-by-path signals. In the case of group 1, for example, the bits (G150.0 to 4,6,7) other than G150.5 are path-by-path signals. 2 Whethe...

  • Page 2013

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1985 - Group-by-group signals) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F130 EBSYA#1EOTNA#1 EOTPA#1EGENA#1EDENA#1EIALA#1 ECKZA#1 EINPA#1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F131 EMF3A#1EMF2A#1 EABUFA#1 EMFA#1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F132 EM28A#1EM24A#1 EM22A#1EM21A#1...

  • Page 2014

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1986 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1130 EBSYA#2EOTNA#2 EOTPA#2EGENA#2EDENA#2EIALA#2 ECKZA#2 EINPA#2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1131 EMF3A#2EMF2A#2 EABUFA#2 EMFA#2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F1132 EM28A#2EM24A#2 EM22A#2EM21A#2EM18A#2EM14A#2 EM12A#2 E...

  • Page 2015

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1987 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F2130 EBSYA#3EOTNA#3 EOTPA#3EGENA#3EDENA#3EIALA#3 ECKZA#3 EINPA#3 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F2131 EMF3A#3EMF2A#3 EABUFA#3 EMFA#3 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F2132 EM28A#3EM24A#3 EM22A#3EM21A#3EM18A#3EM14A#3 EM12A#3 EM...

  • Page 2016

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1988 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F3130 EBSYA#4EOTNA#4 EOTPA#4EGENA#4EDENA#4EIALA#4 ECKZA#4 EINPA#4 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F3131 EMF3A#4EMF2A#4 EABUFA#4 EMFA#4 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F3132 EM28A#4EM24A#4 EM22A#4EM21A#4EM18A#4EM14A#4 EM12A#4 EM...

  • Page 2017

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1989 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F4130 EBSYA#5EOTNA#5 EOTPA#5EGENA#5EDENA#5EIALA#5 ECKZA#5 EINPA#5 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F4131 EMF3A#5EMF2A#5 EABUFA#5 EMFA#5 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F4132 EM28A#5EM24A#5 EM22A#5EM21A#5EM18A#5EM14A#5 EM12A#5 EM...

  • Page 2018

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1990 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F5130 EBSYA#6EOTNA#6 EOTPA#6EGENA#6EDENA#6EIALA#6 ECKZA#6 EINPA#6 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F5131 EMF3A#6EMF2A#6 EABUFA#6 EMFA#6 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F5132 EM28A#6EM24A#6 EM22A#6EM21A#6EM18A#6EM14A#6 EM12A#6 EM...

  • Page 2019

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1991 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F6130 EBSYA#7EOTNA#7 EOTPA#7EGENA#7EDENA#7EIALA#7 ECKZA#7 EINPA#7 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F6131 EMF3A#7EMF2A#7 EABUFA#7 EMFA#7 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F6132 EM28A#7EM24A#7 EM22A#7EM21A#7EM18A#7EM14A#7 EM12A#7 EM...

  • Page 2020

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1992 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F7130 EBSYA#8EOTNA#8 EOTPA#8EGENA#8EDENA#8EIALA#8 ECKZA#8 EINPA#8 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F7131 EMF3A#8EMF2A#8 EABUFA#8 EMFA#8 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F7132 EM28A#8EM24A#8 EM22A#8EM21A#8EM18A#8EM14A#8 EM12A#8 EM...

  • Page 2021

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1993 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F8130 EBSYA#9EOTNA#9 EOTPA#9EGENA#9EDENA#9EIALA#9 ECKZA#9EINPA#9 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F8131 EMF3A#9EMF2A#9 EABUFA#9 EMFA#9 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F8132 EM28A#9EM24A#9 EM22A#9EM21A#9EM18A#9EM14A#9 EM12A#9EM11A...

  • Page 2022

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1994 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F9130 EBSYA#10EOTNA#10 EOTPA#10EGENA#10 EDENA#10EIALA#10 ECKZA#10 EINPA#10 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F9131 EMF3A#10EMF2A#10 EABUFA#10 EMFA#10 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F9132 EM28A#10EM24A#10 EM22A#10EM21A#10EM18A#10E...

  • Page 2023

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1995 - Related signals DI → CNC The signals below are direct signals related to PMC axis control. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X004 SKIP #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X011 SKIP#3 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X013 SKIP#2 PMC → CNC...

  • Page 2024

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1996 - CNC → PMC The signals below are output signals related to PMC axis control. For axis-type signals, addresses for the 1st axis to 8th axis are indicated. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F094 ZP8 ZP7 ZP6 ZP5 ZP4 ZP3 ZP2 ZP1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0...

  • Page 2025

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1997 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1005 DLZx [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 1 DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs 0: Disabled 1: Enabled #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ZMIx DIAx [Inpu...

  • Page 2026

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 1998 - NOTE RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1201 ZPR [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system when the manual reference position return is performed ...

  • Page 2027

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 1999 - 1250 Coordinate system of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is performed [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the i...

  • Page 2028

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2000 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1803 TQF [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 TQF When torque control is performed by the PMC axis control, follow-up operation is: 0: Not performed. 1: Performed. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #...

  • Page 2029

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2001 - 1836 Servo error amount where reference position return is possible [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets a servo error used to enable reference pos...

  • Page 2030

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2002 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2000 DGP NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit axis # 1 DGP Upon power-up, the digital servo parameter ...

  • Page 2031

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2003 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3002 IOV [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 4 IOV Override-related signal logic is: 0: Used without modification (A signal of negative logic is used as a negative logic signal, and a signa...

  • Page 2032

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2004 - 3010 Time lag in strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BUFFER [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word path [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 The time required to send strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF after the M, S, T, and B c...

  • Page 2033

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2005 - NOTE The time is counted in units of 4 ms. If the set value is not a multiple of four, it is raised to the next multiple of four Example When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed. When 0 is set, 4 ms is assumed. The time count period may change, depend...

  • Page 2034

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2006 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8001 SKE AUX NCC RDE OVE MLE [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 MLE Whether all axis machine lock signal MLK is valid for PMC-controlled axes 0: Valid 1: Invalid The axis-by-axis machine lock ...

  • Page 2035

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2007 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8002 FR2 FR1 PF2 PF1 F10 DWE RPD [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 RPD Rapid traverse rate for PMC-controlled axes 0: Feedrate specified with parameter No.1420 1: Feedrate specified with the f...

  • Page 2036

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2008 - #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8004 NCI DSL JFM NMT CMV [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 CMV If an axis control command based on PMC axis control is specified for the same axis when the CNC specifies a move command and a...

  • Page 2037

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2009 - # 1 CDI In axis control by the PMC, when diameter programming is specified for a PMC-controlled axis: 0: The amount of travel and feedrate are each specified with a radius. 1: The amount of travel is specified with a diameter while the feedrate...

  • Page 2038

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2010 - # 6 EZR In PMC axis control, bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is: 0: Invalid. With a PMC controlled axis, the alarm (PS0224) is not issued. 1: Valid. A reference position return state check is made on a PMC controlled axis as with an NC axis ...

  • Page 2039

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2011 - 8010 Selection of the DI/DO group for each axis controlled by the PMC [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 1 to 40 Specify the DI/DO group to be used to specify a command for each PMC-controlled axis. For addr...

  • Page 2040

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2012 - 8020 FL feedrate for reference position return along each axis in PMC axis control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Real axis [Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit) [Minimum unit of data] Depend on the increment sys...

  • Page 2041

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2013 - 8030 Time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word axis [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 For each axis, this p...

  • Page 2042

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2014 - 8032 Feedrate for acceleration/deceleration calculation when a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] min-1 [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 When a feedrate is specified und...

  • Page 2043

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2015 - Alarm (PS5130) In general, if the CNC and PMC attempt to simultaneously control an axis subject to superimposition, the alarm (PS5130) is issued. - When the CNC specifies a command for other than incremental cutting feed based on automatic operatio...

  • Page 2044

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2016 - Number Message Description PS5065 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT(PMC AXIS)Axes having different increment systems have been specified in the same DI/DO group for PMC axis control. Modify the setting of parameter No. 8010. PS5130 NC AND SUPERIMPOSE AXIS CONFL...

  • Page 2045

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2017 - CAUTION 3 Under PMC axis control, manual absolute mode is always set. If the PMC starts control of an axis after manual intervention (manual continuous feed, manual handle feed, etc.) is performed during automatic operation while manual absolute m...

  • Page 2046

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2018 - 17.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT Overview In the external data input function, the CNC can be operated by the external data which use the signal of PMC. This function is an optional function. There are following functions in the external data input. - Ex...

  • Page 2047

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2019 - Explanation - The basic external data input procedure The following signals are used to send data from the PMC to the CNC. Signal name Input signal Output signalAddress signal for external data input EA0 to EA6 Data signal for external data inp...

  • Page 2048

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2020 - No. Item ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3EA2EA1EA0ED31 to ED16 ED15 to ED0 1 External program number 1 0 0 0 X X X XProgram number (BCD 4 digits with unsign) 2 External tool offset 1 0 0 1 X X X XOffset value (BCD 8 digits with sign *1) 3 Extended externa...

  • Page 2049

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2021 - NOTE For axis code, refer to the following table. Axis code Axis EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 1st axis 0 0 0 0 2nd axis 0 0 0 1 3rd axis 0 0 1 0 4th axis 0 0 1 1 5th axis 0 1 0 0 6th axis 0 1 0 1 7th axis 0 1 1 0 8th axis 0 1 1 1 9th axis 1 0 0 0 10th axis 1 ...

  • Page 2050

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2022 - The controller checks the state of the RST (NC reset) signal for a reset input between the rising edge of the ESTB signal (read signal for external data input) and the start of the search. Concretely, the controller cancels the external program num...

  • Page 2051

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2023 - - External Tool offset These signals provide for changing the tool compensation value via the PMC. When the offset number is specified by a part program, data input from the PMC is added to the offset value. The offset value ca...

  • Page 2052

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2024 - Data specification for external tool offset (For milling machine) Address Data *1 E A 6 E A 5 E A 4 E A 3 E A 2 E A 1 E A 0 E D 31E D 30… ED 1 ED 0 0 0 1 a/i g/w 0 r/l Sign 0: + Specified by BCD 8-digit code 1: - (0 to +/- 7999...

  • Page 2053

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2025 - Data specification for external tool offset (For the lathe turning machine) Address Data *1 E A 6 E A 5 E A 4 E A 3 E A 2 E A 1 E A 0 E D 31E D 30… ED 1 ED 0 0 0 1 a/i g/w Sign 0: + Specified by BCD 8-...

  • Page 2054

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2026 - - External workpiece coordinate system shift In the external workpiece coordinate system shift, the shift value can be externally modified by the signal of PMC. Each axis has this shift value (parameter No. 1220), and this shift value is added to ...

  • Page 2055

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2027 - - External message (a) External alarm message By sending alarm number from PMC, the CNC is brought to an alarm status; an alarm message is sent to the CNC, and the message is displayed on the screen of the CNC. Reset of alarm status is also d...

  • Page 2056

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2028 - Data specification method in external message Item EA6EA5EA4EA3EA2EA1 EA0 ED15 to ED0(binary) Alarm set 100000 0 Alarm No. Alarm clear 100000 1 Alarm No. Operator message list100010 0 Message No. Operator message clear 100010 1 Message No. Message ...

  • Page 2057

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2029 - - Substitution of the number of required parts and number of machined parts Substitution is possible for the number of parts required and the number of parts machined. Data specification for No. of parts required and No. of partsmachined. Address...

  • Page 2058

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2030 - Search completion signal for external data input ESEND <Fn060.1> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal report that program number search, specified by external data input, has been completed. [Output condition] This signal ...

  • Page 2059

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2031 - To use this function for multi-path control, the setting for the first path (main) is used. The EXIN specifications cannot be changed for each path. For details of EXIN and how to change ladder software, refer to the PMC specifications and other ma...

  • Page 2060

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2032 - 6310 Setting for number addition to external operator messages NOTE When these parameters are set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Word machine group [Unit of data] [Vali...

  • Page 2061

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2033 - Alarm and message Number Message Description DS059 SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND The No. specified for a program No. or sequence No. search could not be found. There was an I/O request issued for a pot No. or offset (tool data), but either no tool num...

  • Page 2062

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2034 - 17.3 EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT Overview The conventional external machine zero point shift value function cannot make shifts on multiple axes simultaneously. With this extended function, external machine zero point shifts can be p...

  • Page 2063

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2035 - R103 = 11101101 (EDh) the machine position on the second axis is shifted, and the shift value at that time is: EDCCh [pulse] * 0.0002 [mm/pulse] = -0.932 mm - Relationship with the error compensation functions This function is superposed ...

  • Page 2064

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2036 - - Multi-path PMC With a multi-path PMC, the PMC R area allocated to each path is used. Example) When the first PMC is assigned to path 1, and the second PMC is assigned to paths 2 and 3, the R area of the first PMC is assigned to shift values fo...

  • Page 2065

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2037 - Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1203 EMS [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] Bit path # 0 EMS The extended external machine zero point shift function is: 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. NOTE When this parameter is set to 1, the ...

  • Page 2066

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2038 - NOTE This function is optional. To use this function, the option for "external machine zero point shift" or "external data input" is required.

  • Page 2067

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2039 - 17.4 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT Overview MDI key codes can be sent from the PMC to CNC by means of interface signals. This allows the CNC to be controlled in the same way as when the operator performs MDI key operation. Signal - Signal list Control is r...

  • Page 2068

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2040 - - Signal detail The processing flow in the PMC is shown below. (START)< EKSET = EKENB >Set key codeInvert EKSET< Has key input ended? >< INHKY = 0 >< INHKY = 0 >< EKSET = EKENB >Set ENBKY = 0(END)1) Set the external k...

  • Page 2069

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2041 - External key input mode selection signal ENBKY<Gn066#1> [Classification] Input signal [Function] While this signal is turned on "1", external key input control is enabled. In external key input control mode, any MDI key operations...

  • Page 2070

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2042 - Key code read completion signal EKENB<F053#7> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal reports that the CNC has read a key code. [Output condition] When the CNC completes key code read operation, the logical state of this sign...

  • Page 2071

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2043 - - MDI Key Code Table (00H to 7FH) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 Space 0 @ P 1 1 A Q 2 2 B R 3 # 3 C S 4 4 D T 5 5 E U 6 & 6 F V 7 7 G W 8 ( 8 H X 9 ) 9 I Y A ; (EOB) * J Z B + K [ C , L D - (Mi...

  • Page 2072

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2044 - - MDI Key Code Table (80H to FFH) 8 9 A B C D E F 0 RESET [F0] (Note2)1 [F1] (Note2)2 [F2] (Note2)3 [F3] (Note2)4 INSERT [F4] (Note2)5 DELETE [F5] (Note2)6 CAN ALTER [F6] (Note2)7 [F7] (Note2)8 Curs...

  • Page 2073

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2045 - NOTE 2 Handling of the soft keys [F0] to [F9], [FR], and [FL] in the key code table are the key codes for the soft keys. They are associated with the MDI keys as shown below. Key configuration for 7-soft key type LCD, or etc. : 5 keys + 2 keys ...

  • Page 2074

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2046 - 17.5 ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL Overview This function enables the following three operations in pushing the switch installed in the machine only by the change in a minimum LADDER program. (1) Changes to MEM mode. (2) Execution of macro program registe...

  • Page 2075

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2047 - End of macro program (6) Please instruct M02 or M30 at the end of the macro program. Moreover, please input external reset signal (ERS) or reset&rewind signal (RRW) with M02 or M30 on the PMC side. The program which had been selected before...

  • Page 2076

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2048 - The following Figure shows the above-mentioned sequence. - Interruption of sequence Interruption by reset or emergency stop The abnormal end signal (MCSP) becomes “1” when the operation is interrupted by reset or emergency stop, and the...

  • Page 2077

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2049 - Under such a condition, when reset or emergency stop are input, the operation which is described in “Interruption by reset or emergency stop” is executed. Stop by alarm When the execution of macro program is stopped by alarm, the abnormal ...

  • Page 2078

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2050 - Notes NOTE 1 Even if the macro call is being executed, mode selection signal (MD1,MD2,MD4) is effective. Therefore, please change the LADDER program to disable the mode change when the macro call executing signal (MCEXE) is “1” when the inconv...

  • Page 2079

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2051 - Signal Macro call start signal MCSTx <Gn512.0 to Gn513.7> [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal starts the macro call sequence. When the standing fall of this signal is detected, CNC starts the corresponding macro program. O ...

  • Page 2080

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2052 - Abnormal end signal MCSP <Fn512.2> [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies the sequence of the macro call is terminated abnormally. [Output condition] This signal is set to "1" in the following case: - Whe...

  • Page 2081

    B-63943EN-1/02 17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION - 2053 - 6095 The first O number of the program used by the macro call function [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2-word path [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 Specify the first O number of the program used by the macro call function. For instance,...

  • Page 2082

    17.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2054 - NOTE The folders set as the search targets are searched, and the program found first is called. The search order is as follows. LIBRARY/, MTB2/, MTB1/, SYSTEM/ Alarm and message Number Message Description DS0021 START ERROR(ONE TOUCH MACRO) An...

  • Page 2083

    B-63943EN-1/02 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION - 2055 - 18 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION This chapter describes the specifications of the embedded Ethernet function.

  • Page 2084

    18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2056 - 18.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD The embedded Ethernet function can be used by selecting one of two types of devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into th...

  • Page 2085

    B-63943EN-1/02 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION - 2057 - 18.2 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION This section describes the setting of parameters for the embedded Ethernet function. 18.2.1 Parameter Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function This subsection describes the settings required to...

  • Page 2086

    18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2058 - Settings of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function - Settings on the COMMON screen Item Description IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100") SUBNET MASK Specify a mask ...

  • Page 2087

    B-63943EN-1/02 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION - 2059 - - FOCAS2/Ethernet setting items Item Description PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specify a port number to be used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet function. The valid input range is 5001 to 65535. PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set this item to 0 when it is used as the FOCAS2...

  • Page 2088

    18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2060 - - Initial setting of the PCMCIA Ethernet card The PCMCIA Ethernet card is factory-set to the following default values, for ease of connection with a servo guide or FANUC LADDER-III. IP ADDRESS : 192.168.1.1 SUBNET MASK : 255.255.255.0 ROUTE...

  • Page 2089

    B-63943EN-1/02 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION - 2061 - Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function The following shows a setting example required for the FOCAS2/Ethernet function to operate. In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through FOCAS2/Ethernet. HUBCNC 1CN...

  • Page 2090

    18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2062 - 18.2.2 Setting Parameters for The FTP File Transfer Function This section describes the settings required for the FTP file transfer function to operate using the embedded Ethernet function. Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for...

  • Page 2091

    B-63943EN-1/02 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION - 2063 - Settings for the FTP file transfer function - Settings on the COMMON screen Item Description IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet. (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100") SUBNET MASK Specify a mas...

  • Page 2092

    18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2064 - Settings on the FTP transfer screen Page keys PAGEPAGE can be used to make settings for the three host computers for connection destinations 1 to 3. FTP transfer screen (1st page) FTP transfer screen (2nd page) Item Descript...

  • Page 2093

    B-63943EN-1/02 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION - 2065 - Changing the host computer to be connected for the FTP file transfer function Select a destination. 1 Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key causes soft key [HOST SELECT] to be displayed. Pressing this soft key causes soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT...

  • Page 2094

    18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2066 - Example of setting the FTP file transfer function The following shows a setting example required for the FTP file transfer function to operate. (WindowsXP Professional is used as the OS for the personal computer). In this example, one person...

  • Page 2095

    B-63943EN-1/02 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION - 2067 - 18.2.3 Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function The DHCP/DNS function is set up by using the COMMON screen (detail) and NC parameters. 18.2.3.1 Setting up DNS This subsection describes the procedure for setting up a DNS. Procedure 1 Enable the DN...

  • Page 2096

    18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2068 - - Display item Item Description DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 Up to two DNS IP addresses can be specified. The CNC searches for the DNS server using DNS IP addresses 1 and 2 in that order. 18.2.3.2 Setting up DHCP This subsection describes the proc...

  • Page 2097

    B-63943EN-1/02 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION - 2069 - When the DHCP server is connected successfully If the host name is not specified, the CNC automatically assigns a host name in the "NC-<MAC-address>" format. Example of automatically assigned host name If the DHCP serv...

  • Page 2098

    18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2070 - - Check item Item Description IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER IP ADDRESS DNS IP ADDRESS 1,2 DOMAIN If the DHCP server is connected successfully, the items obtained from the DHCP server are displayed. If the DHCP server cannot be connected, &q...

  • Page 2099

    B-63943EN-1/02 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION - 2071 - 18.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES There are two types of embedded Ethernet devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. Screen operation is required to switch between these two types of devices. Procedure...

  • Page 2100

    18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2072 - 18.4 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET Communication using the embedded Ethernet can be restarted. Procedure 1 Press the function key SYSTEM. 2 Soft keys [EMBED] and [PCMCIA] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) 3 ...

  • Page 2101

    B-63943EN-1/02 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION - 2073 - 18.5 MAINTENANCE SCRESSN FOR EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION With the embedded Ethernet function, a dedicated maintenance screen is available. The maintenance screen enables operations to be checked when the embedded Ethernet function operates ab...

  • Page 2102

    18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2074 - 6 To send the PING command to the desired destination, enter the address of the destination on the PING setting screen. (Page keys PAGEPAGE are used for switching.) PING connection status screen 7 After entering the address and the REPEAT c...

  • Page 2103

    B-63943EN-1/02 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION - 2075 - Displaying Communication status screen Procedure 1 Press the function key SYSTEM. 2 Soft keys [EMBED] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) 3 By pressing the [EMBED] soft key, the Ethernet Setting s...

  • Page 2104

    18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2076 - Displaying a software status screen Procedure 1 Press the function key SYSTEM. 2 Soft keys [EMBED] and [PCMCIA LAN] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.) 3 To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Eth...

  • Page 2105

    B-63943EN-1/02 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION - 2077 - 18.6 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION This screen displays the log of the embedded Ethernet function. Displaying the log screen Procedure 1 Press the function key SYSTEM. 2 To display the log screen for the embedded Ethernet p...

  • Page 2106

    18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-63943EN-1/02 - 2078 - (2) Soft key [COMMON] Displays the log related to the parameter settings of the embedded Ethernet function and the basic communication function. (3) Soft key [FOCAS2] Displays the log related to the FOCAS2/Ethernet function. (4) Soft key [F...

  • Page 2107

    B-63943EN-1/02 18.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION - 2079 - Error No. Log message Description and necessary action E-0A06 Network is too busy An excessive amount of data is flowing over the network. One possible solution is to divide the network. E-0B00 The own IP address is wrong Specify a correct I...

  • Page 2108

    19.OPERATIONAL DEVICE B-63943EN-1/02 - 2080 - 19 OPERATIONAL DEVICE

  • Page 2109

    B-63943EN-1/02 19.OPERATIONAL DEVICE - 2081 - 19.1 MDI KEY SETTING Overview Since the MDI key of this CNC identifies the type automatically, no settings are required. When connecting an MDI key created by the machine tool builder, parameter setting is required for correct key input. Parameter ...

  • Page 2110

  • Page 2111

    APPENDIX

  • Page 2112

  • Page 2113

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2085 - A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

  • Page 2114

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2086 - A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES Interface addresses among CNC and PMC are as follows: [Example of controlling one path using one PMC] G0000~F0000~X000~Y000~CNCPMCMachine tool [Example of controlling three path using one PMC] G0000~F0000~X0...

  • Page 2115

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2087 - [Example of controlling multipath CNC using PMC system] G0000~F0000~X000~Y000~CNCPMCI/O devicefor firstmachinePath 1G1000~F1000~G2000~F2000~G3000~F3000~G4000~F4000~FirstPMCG0000~F0000~G1000~F1000~G2000~F2000~G3000~F3000~G0000~F0000~...

  • Page 2116

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2088 - - Expression of signals Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Fn000 OP SA STL SPL RWD In an item where both lathe system and machining center system are described, some signals are covered ...

  • Page 2117

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2089 - NOTE 1 In X addresses in the table, the emergency stop signal for each signal is *ESP<X008.4>, *ESP<X008.0>, and *ESP<X008.1>, respectively. 2 For multipath control, one of the following superscripts is attached to...

  • Page 2118

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2090 - MT → CNC Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X000 X001 X002 X003 ESKIP -MIT2#1+MIT2#1-MIT1#1+MIT1#1 X004 T series SKIP #1 SKIP6 #1 SKIP5 #1SKIP4 #1SKIP3 #1SKIP2 #1SKIP8 #1 SKIP7 #1 ESKIP ...

  • Page 2119

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2091 - PMC → CNC Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn000 Gn001 Gn002 Gn003 Gn004 MFIN3#PMFIN2#PFIN#P Gn005 BFIN#P AFL#P TFIN#PSFIN#P MFIN#PGn006 SKIPP#P OVC#P *ABSM#P SRN#PGn007 RLSO...

  • Page 2120

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2092 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn021 Gn022 Gn023 ALNGH#P RGHTH#P HNDLF#P Gn024 Gn025 Gn026 *SSTP4#SP SWS4#SP PC4SLC#P PC3SLC#PGn027 CON#P *SSTP3#SP*SSTP2#SP*SSTP1#SPSWS3#SPSWS2#...

  • Page 2121

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2093 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn043 ZRN#P DNCI#P MD4#PMD2#P MD1#PGn044 MLK#P BDT1#PGn045 BDT9#P BDT8#P BDT7#PBDT6#PBDT5#PBDT4#PBDT3#P BDT2#PGn046 DRN#P KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK#P Gn047 Gn048 TLRST#P T...

  • Page 2122

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2094 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn065 Gn066 EKSET RTRCT#P IGNVRY#PGn067 HCREQ HCABT Gn068 Gn069 Gn070 MRDYA#SP ORCMA#SP SFRA#SPSRVA#SPCTH1A#SPCTH2A#SPTLMHA#SP TLMLA#SPGn071 RCHA#SP RSL...

  • Page 2123

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2095 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn087 Gn088 Gn089 Gn090 G2SLC#P G2Y#P G2Z#P G2X#P G2RVY#PG2RVZ#P G2RVX#PGn091 Gn092 Gn093 Gn094 Gn095 Gn096 HROV#P *HR...

  • Page 2124

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2096 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn109 *-ED38#SV *-ED37#SV *-ED36#SV*-ED35#SV*-ED34#SV*-ED33#SV*-ED32#SV *-ED31#SVGn110 +LM8#SV +LM7#SV +LM6#SV+LM5#SV+LM4#SV+LM3#SV+LM2#SV +LM1#SVGn111 Gn112 -LM8#SV -LM7#SV -LM6#SV...

  • Page 2125

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2097 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn131 Gn132 +MIT8#P +MIT7#P +MIT6#P+MIT5#P+MIT4#P+MIT3#P+MIT2#P +MIT1#PGn133 Gn134 -MIT8#P -MIT7#P -MIT6#P-MIT5#P-MIT4#P-MIT3#P-MIT2#P -MIT1#PGn135 Gn136 EAX8#SV E...

  • Page 2126

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2098 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn153 Gn154 EBUF#PX ECLR#PX ESTP#PX ESOF#PX ESBK#PX EMBUF#PX ELCKZ#PX EFIN#PXGn155 EMSBK#PX EC6#PX EC5#PXEC4#PXEC3#PXEC2#PXEC1#PX EC0#PXGn156 EIF7#PX EIF6#PX EIF5#PXEIF4#PXEIF3#PXEI...

  • Page 2127

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2099 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn175 *EFOV7#P *EFOV6#P *EFOV5#P*EFOV4#P*EFOV3#P*EFOV2#P*EFOV1#P *EFOV0#PGn176 Gn177 Gn178 EBUF#PX ECLR#PX ESTP#PX ESOF#PX ESBK#PX EMBUF#PX ELCKZ#PX EFIN#PXGn179 EMSBK#PX E...

  • Page 2128

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2100 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn197 Gn198 Gn199 IOLBH2 IOLBH1 Gn200 EASIP8#SV EASIP7#SV EASIP6#SVEASIP5#SVEASIP4#SVEASIP3#SVEASIP2#SV EASIP1#SVGn201 Gn202 NDCAL8#SV NDCAL7#SV NDCAL6#SVNDC...

  • Page 2129

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2101 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn263 Gn264 ESSYC4#SPESSYC3#SPESSYC2#SP ESSYC1#SPGn265 PKESE4#SPPKESE3#SPPKESE2#SP PKESE1#SPGn266 MRDYD#SP ORCMD#SP SFRD#SPSRVD#SPCTH1D#SPCTH2D#SPTLMHD#SP TLMLD#SPGn267 RCH...

  • Page 2130

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2102 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn285 UI315#P UI314#P UI313#PUI312#PUI311#PUI310#PUI309#P UI308#PGn286 UI323#P UI322#P UI321#PUI320#PUI319#PUI318#PUI317#P UI316#PGn287 UI331#P UI330#P UI329#PUI328#PUI327#PUI326#PUI325#P UI...

  • Page 2131

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2103 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn307 Gn308 Gn309 Gn310 Gn311 Gn312 Gn313 Gn314 Gn315 Gn316 Gn317 Gn318 Gn319 ...

  • Page 2132

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2104 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn329 TLNCT4#P TLNCT3#P TLNCT2#PTLNCT1#PTLSKP4#PTLSKP3#PTLSKP2#P TLSKP1#PGn330 TKEY5#PTKEY4#PTKEY3#PTKEY2#PTKEY1#P TKEY0#PGn331 Gn332 Gn333 Gn334 Gn335 ...

  • Page 2133

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2105 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn351 Gn352 *FHRO7#P *FHRO6#P *FHRO5#P*FHRO4#P*FHRO3#P*FHRO2#P*FHRO1#P *FHRO0#PGn353 FHROV#P *FHRO9#P *FHRO8#PGn354 THD07#P THD06#P THD05#PTHD04#PTHD03#PTHD02#PTHD01#P THD00#PG...

  • Page 2134

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2106 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn411 HS4IE#P HS3IE#P HS2IE#PHS1IE#PHS4E#PHS3E#SHS2E#P HS1E#PGn412 Gn413 Gn414 Gn415 Gn416 Gn417 Gn418 Gn419 Gn420 ...

  • Page 2135

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2107 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Gn433 Gn434 Gn435 Gn436 Gn437 Gn438 Gn439 Gn440 Gn441 Gn442 Gn443 Gn444 Gn445 ...

  • Page 2136

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2108 - CNC → PMC Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn000 OP#P SA#P STL#P SPL#P RWD#PFn001 MA#P TAP#P ENB#SPDEN#PBAL#P RST#P AL#P Fn002 MDRN#P CUT#P SRNMV#PTHRD#PCSS#PRPDO#P INCH#PFn003 MEDT#P MMEM#PMRMT#PMMDI#PMJ#P MH#P M...

  • Page 2137

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2109 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn021 Fn022 S07#P S06#P S05#P S04#P S03#P S02#P S01#P S00#P Fn023 S15#P S14#P S13#P S12#P S11#P S10#P S09#P S08#P Fn024 S23#P S22#P S21#P S20#P S19#P S18#P S17#P S16#P Fn025 S31#P ...

  • Page 2138

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2110 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn043 SYCAL4#SPSYCAL3#SPSYCAL2#SP SYCAL1#SPFn044 SYCAL#PFSPPH#PFSPSYC#PFSCSL#P Fn045 ORARA#SP TLMA#SP LDT2A#SPLDT1A#SPSARA#SPSDTA#SPSSTA#SP ALMA#SPFn046 MORA2A#SP MORA1A#SP PORA2A#S...

  • Page 2139

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2111 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn065 SYNMOD#P RTRCTF#P RSMAX#PRSPM#P RSPP#PFn066 PECK2#P RTPT#P Fn067 Fn068 Fn069 Fn070 PSW08#P PSW07#P PSW06#PPSW05#PPSW04#PPSW03#PPSW02#P PSW01#PFn071 ...

  • Page 2140

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2112 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn087 Fn088 Fn089 Fn090 ABTSP3#SPABTSP2#SPABTSP1#SP ABTQSV#PFn091 ABTSP4#SP Fn092 TRSPS#PTRMTN#PTRACT#P Fn093 SVWRN4#P SVWRN3#P SVWRN2#PSVWR...

  • Page 2141

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2113 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn109 Fn110 MDTCH8#SV MDTCH7#SV MDTCH6#SVMDTCH5#SVMDTCH4#SVMDTCH3#SVMDTCH2#SV MDTCH1#SVFn111 Fn112 EADEN8#SV EADEN7#SV EADEN6#SVEADEN5#SVEADEN4#SVEADEN3#SVEADEN2#SV EADEN1#S...

  • Page 2142

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2114 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn131 EMF3A#PXEMF2A#PXEABUFA#PX EMFA#PXFn132 EM28A#PX EM24A#PX EM22A#PXEM21A#PXEM18A#PXEM14A#PXEM12A#PX EM11A#PXFn133 EBSYB#PX EOTNB#PX EOTPB#PXEGENB#PXEDENB#PXEIALB#PXECKZB#PX EINPB#PXF...

  • Page 2143

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2115 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn153 Fn154 Fn155 Fn156 Fn157 Fn158 Fn159 Fn160 MSP07#P MSP06#P MSP05#PMSP04#PMSP03#PMSP02#PMSP01#P MSP00#PFn161 MSP15#P MSP14#P...

  • Page 2144

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2116 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn175 Fn176 Fn177 Fn178 Fn179 Fn180 Fn181 Fn182 EACNT8#SV EACNT7#SV EACNT6#SVEACNT5#SVEACNT4#SVEACNT3#SVEACNT2#SV EACNT1#SVFn183 ...

  • Page 2145

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2117 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn197 Fn198 Fn199 MCHAO#P Fn200 R08O2#SP R07O2#SP R06O2#SPR05O2#SPR04O2#SPR03O2#SPR02O2#SP R01O2#SPFn201 R12O2#SPR11O2#SPR10O2#SP R09O2#SPFn202 AR072#SP AR062#SP...

  • Page 2146

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2118 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn241 Fn242 Fn243 Fn244 Fn245 Fn246 Fn247 Fn248 Fn249 Fn250 Fn251 Fn252 Fn253 ...

  • Page 2147

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2119 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn263 Fn264 SPWRN8#P SPWRN7#P SPWRN6#PSPWRN5#PSPWRN4#PSPWRN3#PSPWRN2#P SPWRN1#PFn265 SPWRN9#PFn266 ORARD#SP TLMD#SP LDT2D#SPLDT1D#SPSARD#SPSDTD#SPSSTD#SP ALMD#SPFn267 MORA2D...

  • Page 2148

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2120 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn285 UO315#P UO314#P UO313#PUO312#PUO311#PUO310#PUO309#P UO308#PFn286 UO323#P UO322#P UO321#PUO320#PUO319#PUO318#PUO317#P UO316#PFn287 UO331#P UO330#P UO329#PUO328#PUO327#PUO326#PUO325#P UO...

  • Page 2149

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2121 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn307 Fn308 Fn309 Fn310 Fn311 Fn312 Fn313 Fn314 Fn315 TLMEM#P TMFNFD#P TLMOT#P TLMG10#PTLMSRH#P TLSKF#PFn316 F...

  • Page 2150

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2122 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn329 TLCHB4#P TLCHB3#P TLCHB2#PTLCHB1#PTLSKF4#PTLSKF3#PTLSKF2#P TLSKF1#PFn330 Fn331 Fn332 Fn333 Fn334 Fn335 Fn336 Fn337 ...

  • Page 2151

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2123 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn356 THREND#P MTHML#PFn395 Fn396 Fn397 Fn398 Fn399 Fn400 SUCLPD#SPSUCLPC#SPSUCLPB#SP Fn401 SCLPD#SPSCLPC#SPSCLPB#SP Fn402 M...

  • Page 2152

    A.INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2124 - Address Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Fn416 Fn417 Fn418 Fn419 Fn414 to Fn516 MSEMI8#SV MSEMI7#SV MSEMI6#SV MSEMI5#SV MSEMI4#SV MSEMI3#SV MSEMI2#SV MSEMI1#SVFn517 RP18 RP17 RP1...

  • Page 2153

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2125 - A.2 LIST OF SIGNALS A.2.1 List of Signals (In Order of Functions) A : Available B : Available only with multi path control - : Unavailable Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesI/O Link β Manual handle interface (Per...

  • Page 2154

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2126 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesSignals for selecting the manual feed axis for feed axis synchronous control SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ8 G140 A A Machine coordinate match state output signals SYNMT1 to SYNMT8 F210 A A Synchro...

  • Page 2155

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2127 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesExternal deceleration Setting 5 of external deceleration : deceleration signals in negative direction *-ED51 to *-ED58 G344 A A Extended external machine zero point shift Extended ex...

  • Page 2156

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2128 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesTool change reset signal 2 TLRST2 G328#1 A A Tool change reset signal 3 TLRST3 G328#2 A A Tool change reset signal 4 TLRST4 G328#3 A A Individual tool change signals TLCHI F064#2 A A...

  • Page 2157

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2129 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesTool offset number selection signals OFN0 to OFN5, OFN6 to OFN9 G039#0 to #5, G040#0 to #3 - A Tool offset measurement mode selection signal GOQSM G039#7 - A Tool length / workpiece...

  • Page 2158

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2130 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesCycle start signal ST G007#2 A A Feed hold signal *SP G008#5 A A Automatic operation signal OP F000#7 A A Cycle start lamp signal STL F000#5 A A Cycle start / feed hold Feed hold lam...

  • Page 2159

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2131 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesSHA00 to SHA11 G078#0 to G079#3 A A SHB00 to SHB11 G080#0 to G081#3 A A SHC00 to SHC11 G208#0 to G209#3 A A Spindle orientation Spindle orientation external stop position command sig...

  • Page 2160

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2132 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesSFRA G070#5 A A SFRB G074#5 A A SFRC G204#5 A A CW command signals (serial spindle) SFRD G266#5 A A ORCMA G070#6 A A ORCMB G074#6 A A ORCMC G204#6 A A Orientation command signals (s...

  • Page 2161

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2133 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesROTAA G072#1 A A ROTAB G076#1 A A ROTAC G206#2 A A Rotational direction command signals for orientation stop position change (serial spindle) ROTAD G268#1 A A NRROA G072#2 A A NRROB ...

  • Page 2162

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2134 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesSDTA F045#2 A A SDTB F049#2 A A SDTC F168#2 A A Speed detection signals (serial spindle) SDTD F266#2 A A SARA F045#3 A A SARB F049#3 A A SARC F168#3 A A Spindle speed arrival signal ...

  • Page 2163

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2135 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesMORA1A F046#6 A A MORA1B F050#6 A A MORA1C F169#6 A A Magnetic sensor orientation completion signals (serial spindle) MORA1D F267#6 A A MORA2A F046#7 A A MORA2B F050#7 A A MORA2C F1...

  • Page 2164

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2136 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesSpindle phase synchronous control completion signal FSPPH F044#3 A A FSPPH1 F289#0 A A FSPPH2 F289#1 A A FSPPH3 F289#2 A A Spindle phase synchronous control completion signal (for ea...

  • Page 2165

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2137 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesJog feed/incremental feed Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT G019#7 A A CNC ready signal MA F001#7 A A CNC ready signal Servo ready signal SA F000#6 A A Rapid traversing signa...

  • Page 2166

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2138 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesSoftware operator’s panel signal (ROV1) ROV1O F076#4 A A Software operator’s panel signal (ROV2) ROV2O F076#5 A A Software operator’s panel signal (BDT) BDTO F075#2 A A Softwa...

  • Page 2167

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2139 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesChopping feedrate override signals *CHP1 to *CHP8 G051#0 to #3 - A Chopping start signal *CHPST G051#6 - A Chopping hold signal *CHLD G051#7 - A Chopping-in-progress signal CHPMD F0...

  • Page 2168

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2140 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesRapid traverse override signals ROV1, ROV2 G014#0, #1 A A 1% step rapid traverse override selection signals HROV G096#7 A A 1% rapid traverse override signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 G096#0...

  • Page 2169

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2141 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesG143#7 A A G155#7 A A G167#7 A A Block stop disable signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control) EMSBK G179#7 A A F132, F142 A A F135, F145 A A F138, F148 A A Auxiliary function cod...

  • Page 2170

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2142 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesF130#3 A A F133#3 A A F136#3 A A Auxiliary function executing signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control) EDEN F139#3 A A F130#6 A A F133#6 A A F136#6 A A Negative-direction overtr...

  • Page 2171

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2143 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesSIND G033#7 A A SIND2 G035#7 A A SIND3 G037#7 A A Spindle motor speed command selection signals SIND4 G273#7 A A R01I to R12I G032#0 to G033#3 A A R01I2 to R12I2 G034#0 to G035#3 A A...

  • Page 2172

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2144 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesInput signals for P-code macro EUI00 to EUI15 G082, G083 A A Macro executor Output signals for P-code macro EUO00 to EUO15 F084, F085 A A All-axis machine lock signal MLK G044#1 A A ...

  • Page 2173

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2145 - Function Signal name Symbol Address T seriesM seriesRigid tapping signal RGTAP G061#0 A A RGSPP F065#0 A A Spindle rotation direction signals RGSPM F065#1 A A Rigid tapping-in-progress signal RTAP F076#3 A A Rigid tapping Rigid tappin...

  • Page 2174

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2146 - A.2.2 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) A : Available B : Available only with multi path control - : Unavailable Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM series*ABSM Manual absolute signal G006#2 A A *+ED1 to *+ED8 External decelera...

  • Page 2175

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2147 - Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM series*FLWU Follow-up signal G007#5 A A *FV0 to *FV7 Feedrate override signals G012 A A G151 A A G163 A A G175 A A *EFOV0 to *EFOV7 Feedrate override signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control) G...

  • Page 2176

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2148 - Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM seriesABTSP4 4th spindle unexpected disturbance torque detection signal F091#4 A A AFL Auxiliary function lock signal G005#6 A A AICC AI contour control mode signal F062#0 A A AL Alarm signal F001#...

  • Page 2177

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2149 - Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM seriesCTH1A, CTH2A G070#3, #2 A A CTH1B, CTH2B G074#3, #2 A A CTH1C, CTH2C G204#3, #2 A A CTH1D, CTH2D Clutch/gear signals (serial spindle) G266#3, #2 A A CUT Cutting feed signal F002#6 A A DEFMDA ...

  • Page 2178

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2150 - Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM seriesF130#3 A A F133#3 A A F136#3 A A EDEN Auxiliary function executing signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control) F139#3 A A EDRN Dry run signal (PMC axis control) G150#7 A A G142#0 A A G154#0...

  • Page 2179

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2151 - Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM seriesF131#2 A A F134#2 A A F137#2 A A EMF2 Auxiliary function 2nd strobe signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis control) F140#2 A A F131#3 A A F134#3 A A F137#3 A A EMF3 Auxiliary function 3rd strob...

  • Page 2180

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2152 - Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM seriesESSYC1 G264#0 A A ESSYC2 G264#1 A A ESSYC3 G264#2 A A ESSYC4 Spindle simple synchronous control signal (for each spindle) G264#3 A A G142#5 A A G154#5 A A G166#5 A A ESTP Axis control tempora...

  • Page 2181

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2153 - Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM seriesHEAD2 Path select signal 2 G062#7 B B HEAD3 Path select signal 3 G408#1 B B HEAD4 Path select signal 4 G408#2 B B F293, F294 A A HPS01 to HPS16 High-speed position switch signals Y***, Y***+1...

  • Page 2182

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2154 - Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM seriesLDT1A F045#4 A A LDT1B F049#4 A A LDT1C F168#4 A A LDT1D Load detection signals 1 (serial spindle) F266#4 A A LDT2A F045#5 A A LDT2B F049#5 A A LDT2C F168#5 A A LDT2D Load detection signals 2...

  • Page 2183

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2155 - Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM seriesMMLK All-axis machine lock check signal F004#1 A A MORA1A F046#6 A A MORA1B F050#6 A A MORA1C F169#6 A A MORA1D Magnetic sensor orientation completion signals (serial spindle) F267#6 A A MOR...

  • Page 2184

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2156 - Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM seriesORARA F045#7 A A ORARB F049#7 A A ORARC F168#7 A A ORARD Orientation completion signals (serial spindle) F266#7 A A ORCMA G070#6 A A ORCMB G074#6 A A ORCMC G204#6 A A ORCMD Orientation comma...

  • Page 2185

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2157 - Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM seriesR01I to R12I G032#0 to G033#3 A A R01I2 to R12I2 G034#0 to G035#3 A A R01I3 to R12I3 G036#0 to G037#3 A A R01I4 to R12I4 Spindle motor speed command signals G272#0 to G273#3 A A R01O to R12O ...

  • Page 2186

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2158 - Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM seriesRTAP Rigid tapping-in-progress signal F076#3 A A RTNT Rigid tapping retraction start signal G062#6 A A RTO Software operator’s panel signal (RT) F077#6 A A RTPT Rigid tapping retraction com...

  • Page 2187

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2159 - Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM seriesX004#7 A A SKIP X004#7 A A SKIP2 to SKIP6, SKIP7, SKIP8 X004#2 to #6, #0, #1 A A SKIPP Skip signal G006#6 A A SLPCA, SLPCB Path spindle feedback selection signal G064#2, #3 A A SLPCC, SLPCD ...

  • Page 2188

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2160 - Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM seriesSRSP4R 4th serial spindle ready signals F034#3 A A SRSRDY All-spindle operation ready signal F034#7 A A SRVA G070#4 A A SRVB G074#4 A A SRVC G204#4 A A SRVD CCW command signals (serial spindl...

  • Page 2189

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2161 - Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM seriesTB_BASE Table base signal G298#0 A A TF Tool function strobe signal F007#3 A A TFIN Tool function completion signal G005#3 A A THD00 to THD15 Thermal displacement compensation data G354 to G3...

  • Page 2190

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2162 - Symbol Signal name Address T seriesM seriesTLRSTI Individual tool change reset signals G048#6 A A TLRSTI1 Individual tool change reset signals 1 G328#4 A A TLRSTI2 Individual tool change reset signals 2 G328#5 A A TLRSTI3 Individual t...

  • Page 2191

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2163 - A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses) A : Available B : Available only with multi path control - : Unavailable Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesX004#2 to #6, #0, #1 Skip signal SKIP2 to SKIP6, SKIP7, SKIP8 A A X00...

  • Page 2192

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2164 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesG019#7 Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT A A G023#3 Maximum manual handle feedrate switch signal HNDLF A A G023#6 Tool axis right-angle direction feed mode signal RGHTH A A G023#7 Too...

  • Page 2193

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2165 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesG038#7 B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP - A G039#0 to #5 OFN0 to OFN5 A A G040#0 to #3 Tool offset number selection signals OFN6 to OFN9 A A G039#6 Workpiece origin offset measurement mo...

  • Page 2194

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2166 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesG066#0 All-axis VRDY off alarm ignore signal IGNVRY A A G066#1 External key input mode selection signal ENBKY A A G066#4 Retract signal RTRCT A A G066#7 Key code read signal EKSET A A G067#6 ...

  • Page 2195

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2167 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesG074#1 Torque limit command HIGH signals (serial spindle) TLMHB A A G074#3, #2 Clutch/gear signals(serial spindle) CTH1B, CTH2B A A G074#4 CCW command signals(serial spindle) SRVB A A G074#5 ...

  • Page 2196

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2168 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesG090#4 G2X A - G090#5 G2Z A - G090#6 2nd figure tool offset axis select signal G2Y A - G090#7 2nd figure tool offset signal G2SLC A - G096#0 to #6 1% rapid traverse override signals *HROV0 to...

  • Page 2197

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2169 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesG142#5 Axis control temporary stop signals (for group 1) (PMC axis control) ESTP A A G142#6 Reset signals (for group 1) (PMC axis control) ECLR A A G142#7 Axis control command read signals (f...

  • Page 2198

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2170 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesG166#2 Buffering disable signals (for group 3) (PMC axis control) EMBUF A A G166#3 Block stop signals (for group 3) (PMC axis control) ESBK A A G166#4 Servo off signals (for group 3) (PMC axi...

  • Page 2199

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2171 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesG192 Each-axis VRDY off alarm ignore signal IGVRY1 to IGVRY8 A A G196 Reference position return deceleration signal *DEC1 to *DEC8 A A G199#0, G199#1 Manual handle generators selection signal...

  • Page 2200

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2172 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesG207#2 Motor power cutoff command signals (serial spindle) MPOFC A A G208#0 to G209#3 Spindle orientation external stop position command signals SHC00 to SHC11 A A G251#1 Loader control selec...

  • Page 2201

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2173 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesG270#0 to G271#3 Spindle orientation external stop position command signals SHD00 to SHD11 A A G272#0 to G273#3 Spindle motor speed command signals R01I4 to R12I4 A A G273#5 Spindle motor com...

  • Page 2202

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2174 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesG411#0 to #2 Manual handle feed axis selection signals HS1E to HS3E A A G411#4 to #6 Manual handle interrupt axis selection signals HS1IE to HS3IE A A F000#0 Rewinding signal RWD A A F000#4 F...

  • Page 2203

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2175 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesF034#3 4th serial spindle ready signals SRSP4R A A F034#4 3rd serial spindle ready signals SRSP3R A A F034#5 2nd serial spindle ready signals SRSP3R A A F034#6 1st serial spindle ready signal...

  • Page 2204

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2176 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesF049#7 Orientation completion signals (serial spindle) ORARB A A F050#0 Power line switch signals(serial spindle) CHPB A A F050#1 Spindle switch completion signals (serial spindle) CFINB A A ...

  • Page 2205

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2177 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesF075#3 Software operator’s panel signal (SBK) SBKO A A F075#4 Software operator’s panel signal (MLK) MLKO A A F075#5 Software operator’s panel signal (DRN) DRNO A A F075#6 Software oper...

  • Page 2206

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2178 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesF129#7 Controlled axis selection status signals (PMC axis control) *EAXSL A A F130#0 In-position signals (PMC axis control) EINP A A F130#1 Following zero checking signals (PMC axis control) ...

  • Page 2207

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2179 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesF139#3 Auxiliary function executing signals (PMC axis control) EDEN A A F139#4 Axis moving signals (PMC axis control) EGEN A A F139#5 Positive-direction overtravel signals (PMC axis control) ...

  • Page 2208

    INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-63943EN-1/02 - 2180 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesF264#0 to F265#0 Spindle warning detail signals 1 to 9 SPWRN1 to SPWRN9 A A F266#0 Alarm signals(serial spindle) ALMD A A F266#1 Speed zero signals(serial spindle) SSTD A A F266#2 Speed detec...

  • Page 2209

    B-63943EN-1/02 APPENDIX INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC - 2181 - Address Signal name Symbol T seriesM seriesF342 Synchronous slave axis confirmation signals SYCS1 to SYCS7 A A F343 Composite axis confirmation signals MIXO1 to MIXO7 A A F344 Superimposed control master axis confirmation signals OVMO...

  • Page 2210

  • Page 2211

    B-63943EN-1/02 INDEX i-1 INDEX <Number> 2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN / 3RD, 4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ............................498 3-dimensional Rigid Tapping............................ 1378, 1455 5-AXIS MACHINING FUNCTION ............................. 989 8-Level Data Protection...

  • Page 2212

    INDEX B-63943EN-1/02 i-2 CUSTOM MACRO..................................................... 1697 Custom Macro............................................................. 1697 Customization of tool management data display......... 1617 CUTTER COMPENSATION ..................................... 16...

  • Page 2213

    B-63943EN-1/02 INDEX i-3 HELICAL INTERPOLATION B..................................688 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE ....................... 1199 High-speed Measuring Position Reached Signals ....... 1837 High-Speed Position Switch............................................37 High-speed Skip Sig...

  • Page 2214

    INDEX B-63943EN-1/02 i-4 Multiple axis command skip function ......................... 1847 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK ....................................................................... 1196 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL................................... 1338 Multi-step Skip.............

  • Page 2215

    B-63943EN-1/02 INDEX i-5 <S> SCALING ................................................................... 1762 Second feedrate override...............................................726 Second Geometry Tool Offset..................................... 1658 Selection of a tool life count per...

  • Page 2216

    INDEX B-63943EN-1/02 i-6 TESTING A PROGRAM..............................................558 THREADING ............................................................... 606 Threading ......................................................................606 Threading Cycle Retract (Canned Cycle) .....

  • Page 2217

    Revision Record FANUC Series 30i/300i/300is-MODEL A, Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A5, Series 31i/310i/310is-MODEL A, Series 32i/320i/320is-MODEL A CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-63943EN-1) 02 May, 2004Addition of functions Addition of following models - ...

  • Page 2218

    • No part of this manual may bereproduced in any form.• All specifications and designsare subject to change withoutnotice.

x